OS/2 Shareware BBS: 10 Tools/10-Tools.zip/VSCPPv4.zip/VACPP/IBMCPP/HELP/TOOLINFO.INF

OS/2 Help File | 1995-03-10 | 434KB | 16,499 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Notices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

First Edition (October 1994)

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country
where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:  INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states
do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time.

It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information
about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are
not announced in your country.  Such references or information must not be
construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming,
or services in your country.

Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your
IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.1. Copyright Notices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COPYRIGHT LICENSE: This publication contains printed sample application
programs in source language, which illustrate OS/2 programming techniques. You
may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without
payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or
distributing application programs conforming to the OS/2 application
programming interface.

Each copy of any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work, which
is distributed to others, must include a copyright notice as follows: "(C)
(your company name) (year).  All rights reserved."

(C)Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1994. All rights
reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users - Documentation related to restricted rights -
Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2. Disclaimers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not
imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM
operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended
to state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any
functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
of IBM's intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may
be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and
verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or
services, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's
responsibility.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director
of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.3. Trademarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are
trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries:

IBM
OS/2
Presentation Manager


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. About This Book ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 Tools Reference is a detailed technical reference for tools in the
OS/2 Toolkit. It is intended for use by application programmers creating
programs using OS/2 system functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Throughout this publication, there are references to specific values for
character strings.  These values are for the Single-Byte Character Set (SBCS).
When using the Double-Byte Character Set, notice that one DBCS character equals
two SBCS characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. Prerequisite Knowledge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 Tools Reference is intended for programmers knowledgeable in at least
one programming language in which OS/2 programs can be written.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. Organization of This Book ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

   o  Introduction

      This chapter contains information about all chapters in the book and the
      function of the tools.

   o  PACK and PACK2

      This chapter describes the pack, unpack, pack2, and unpack2 tool, which
      reduces and expands the size of files.

   o  Dialog Editor

      This chapter describes the Dialog Editor and how it is used to create and
      modify dialog boxes.

   o  Executable File Header Utility (EXEHDR)

      This chapter describes the Executable File Header Utility (EXEHDR) that
      displays and modifies the contents of an executable-file header.

   o  Font Editor

      This chapter describes the Font Editor and how it is used to define fonts
      and edit character width.

   o  Forwarded Entry Point (FWDSTAMP)

      This chapter describes the FWDSTAMP, which adds entry points, called
      forwarders to a dynamic link library file.

   o  Icon Editor

      This chapter describes the Icon Editor, which lets you create your own
      icons, pointers, and bit maps and save them for use by applications.

   o  Link for Object and Library Files (LINK386)

      LINK386 is a tool used to combine object files and standard library files
      into a single file: an executable file, a dynamic-link library, or a
      device driver.

   o  Make Message File (MKMSGF)

      This chapter describes the MKMSGF tool, which reads the input message
      file and creates an output message file.

   o  MAP File to SYM File Creator (MAPSYM)

      This chapter describes  MAPSYM, which is a program that creates .SYM
      files from .MAP files.

   o  View and Set Program Type For Executable File (MARKEXE)

      This MARKEXE program enables you to view and set the program type for an
      executable file.

   o  Message Segment Binder (MSGBIND)

      This chapter describes MSGBIND, which binds a message segment to an
      executable program.

   o  Object Utility Description

      This chapter describes how Object Utility/2 provides a facility for
      registering Workplace Shell classes, creating instances of Workplace
      Shell classes, and modifying instances of Workplace Shell classes.

   o  Program Maintenance Utility (NMAKE)

      This chapter describes how NMAKE automates the process of building an
      application from project files.

   o  Quick Information (KwikINF)

      This chapter discusses KwikINF, a method of accessing information in
      online documents from anywhere on the desktop.

   o  Resource Compiler

      This chapter describes the OS/2 Resource Compiler an
      application-development tool that lets you add application resources ,
      such as message strings, pointers, menus, and dialog boxes, to the
      executable file of your application.

   o  T Terminal Emulator

      This chapter discusses how the T Terminal Emulator communicates with the
      machine being debugged.

   o  Workplace Class List

      This chapter discusses the Workplace Class List tool, which creates
      Workplace Shell object classes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4. Related Publications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following diagram provides an overview of the OS/2 Warp, Version 3
Technical Library.

Books can be ordered by calling toll free 1-800-342-6672 weekdays between 8:00
a.m. and 8:00 p.m. (EST). In Canada, call 1-800-465-4234.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Introduction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 Tools Reference is a technical reference for the OS/2* tools. The
following is a brief description of each chapter in this book and the function
of each tool.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. Data Compression (PACK) PACK2 and UNPACK2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

You can use PACK and UNPACK to compress and expand files. The options,
parameters, and function for PACK2 are identical to PACK.

Description

Data Compression (PACK) is a tool that reduces the size of a file by
compressing its data. Decompression (UNPACK) works in reverse and allows you to
expand files. You can use PACK for a single file or group of files, thereby
reducing the disk space required for your OS/2 application. The only difference
between PACK and PACK2 is that PACK2 has a better compression algorithm. For
more information see PACK and PACK2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Dialog Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

The Dialog Editor draws dialog boxes and controls on the screen so you can see
what they look like when used by your application.

Description

You can use the Dialog Editor to create and modify dialog box and modify the
controls and text within dialog boxes.  As you create the dialog box and its
controls, you see them on the screen as the user sees them when using your
program.  You can place each dialog box and its controls where you want them on
the screen. You also can test the dialog box before you incorporate it into
your application.  The Dialog Editor saves the dialog boxes in a ASCII-text
format files that have .DLG extensions. For more information see Dialog Editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Executable File Header Utility (EXEHDR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

The Executable File Header Utility (EXEHDR) displays and modifies the contents
of an executable-file header.

Description

EXEHDR generates an output listing showing the contents of the file header and
information about each object or segment in the file. Options are provided that
let you change values in the file header. For more information see Executable
File Header Utility (EXEHDR).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. Font Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

Use the Font Editor to design and save fonts for use in your applications.

Description

The Font Editor enables you to edit an enlarged version of each character in an
editing window, using the mouse to switch the enlarged representation of pels
to black or white.

A font is a set of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks, and other
symbols that share a common typeface design and line weight.  An application
loads a font from a dynamic-link library file (DLL file).  For more information
see Font Editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. Forwarded Entry Point (FWDSTAMP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

FWDSTAMP adds entry points, called forwarders, to a dynamic link library file.

Description

Forwarders point to API functions or other exported code or data. They contain
and import reference so that the final target address of the forwarded entry is
contained in a different module.  A forwarder might be called an imported
export. For more information see Forwarded Entry Point (FWDSTAMP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. Icon Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

The Icon Editor lets you create icons, pointers, and bit maps and save them for
use by applications.

Description

You can customize Icons, pointers, and bit maps for your application.

An application can use an icon to represent a minimized standard window.  For
example, for an application that lists telephone numbers you could create a
telephone icon. For more information see Icon Editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7. Link for Object and Library Files (Link386) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

Link386 is used to combine object files and standard library files into a
single file: an executable file, a dynamic-link library, or a device driver.

Description

LINK386 can produce dynamic-link libraries (.DLL) and device Drivers (.SYS), in
addition to executable files (.EXE). For additional information, see Link for
Object and Library Files (LINK386).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8. Make Message File (MKMSGF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

There are two ways that the output message file can be used:

   o  Selected messages can be bound to the message segment of an executable
      file using the MSGBIND program.

   o  Messages can be accessed directly from the output message file. For more
      information see Make Message File (MKMSGF).

 Description

 The Make Message File (MKMSGF) program reads the input message file specified
 and creates an output message file that DosGetMessages uses to display
 messages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9. MAP File to SYM File Creator (MAPSYM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

MAP File to SYM File Creator (MAPSYM) is a program that creates .SYM files from
.MAP files.

Description

.SYM files are used by the kernel debugger for symbolic debugging.  MAPSYM must
be run from the directory in which the file to be converted is located. For
more information see MAP File to SYM File Creator (MAPSYM).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.10. View and Set Program Type For Executable File (MARKEXE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

The MARKEXE program enables you to view and set the program type for an
executable file.

Description

Use MARKEXE with the OS/2 Linear Executable Linker (Link386) or the OS/2
Segmented Executable Linker (LINK) to change or set the program type of
programs you have created. For more information see View and Set Program Type
For Executable File (MARKEXE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.11. Message Segment Binder (MSGBIND) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

Message Segment Binder (MSGBIND) is a program that binds a message segment to
an executable program.

Description

Message Segment Binder reads an input file that specifies the executable files
to modify. For each executable file, MSGBIND specifies which message files to
scan, and for each message file, it specifies which messages to include in the
executable file. For more information see Message Segment Binder (MSGBIND).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.12. Object Utility/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

Object Utility/2 provides a facility for registering Workplace Shell classes,
creating instances of Workplace Shell classes, and modifying instances of
Workplace Shell classes.

Description

The Object Utility/2 has attributes that can be set or modified.  The
attributes modify the behavior of the objects to enable or disable copying,
deletion, and other attributes.  For more information see Object Utility
Description


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.13. Program Maintenance Utility (NMAKE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

Program Maintenance Utility (NMAKE) automates the process of updating project
files and can be used to make backups, configure data files, and run programs
when data files are modified.

Description

Program Maintenance Utility (NMAKE) compares the modification dates for one set
of files (the target files) with those of another set of files (the dependent
files).  If any dependent files have changed more recently than the target
files, NMAKE executes a series of commands to bring the targets up-to-date. For
more information see Program Maintenance Utility (NMAKE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14. Quick Information (KwikINF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

KwikINF provides you with a quick and convenient method of accessing
information in online documents stored in the OS/2 BOOKSHELF from anywhere on
the desktop, with the exception of DOS or WIN-OS/2* sessions.

Description

You can open a dialog with KwikINF by pressing a user-selectable hot key after
starting KwikINF.  The KwikINF window also allows you to initiate searches for
text strings in on-line documents of your choice. For more information see
Quick Information (KwikINF).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.15. Resource Compiler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

The OS/2 Resource Compiler (RC) is an application-development tool that lets
you add application resources, such as message strings, pointers, menus, and
dialog boxes, to the executable file of your application.

Description

The Resource Compiler is primarily intended to prepare data for OS/2
applications that use functions such as WinLoadString, WinLoadPointer,WinLoad
Menu, and WinLoadDlg.  For more information see Resource Compiler.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.16. T Terminal Emulator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

The T Terminal Emulator is used to communicate with the machine to be debugged
or to send ASCII files.

Description

The Kernel Debugger uses the T Terminal Emulator to communicate with the
machine to be debugged.  You can also use T Terminal Emulator to send and
receive ASCII files. For more information see T Terminal Emulator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.17. Workplace Class List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purpose

Workplace Class List creates a workplace object class and an instance of a
workplace object class.

Description

Workplace objects are constructed using the SOM protocol and are called
Predefined, Subclass or Replaced object classes. For a definition of
Predefined, Subclass and Replaced classes, see Workplace Class List.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. PACK and PACK2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PACK reduces the size of a file by compressing its data. You can use PACK for a
single file or for a group of files, thereby reducing the disk space required
for your OS/2 application.

The options, parameters, and function for PACK2 are identical to PACK.  The
only difference between PACK and PACK2 is that PACK2 has a better compression
algorithm.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. Starting PACK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You start PACK with a single command from the command line. The input required
can be specified in one of two ways:

   o  You can type on the command line the names of all the files you want to
      compress (Method 1). See Starting PACK: Method 1.

   o  You can type the name of a single file that contains a list of all the
      files you want to compress (Method 2). See Starting PACK: Method 2.

 When using PACK, select the method that is suitable for you.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.1. Starting PACK: Method 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can start PACK with a single command from the command line. You can type
the names of all the files you want to compress directly on the command line.
Include the drive and path if the files are not in the working directory. You
can specify file names with any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters.
File-name extensions are not required; however, if you specify a file name that
has an extension, also type the extension.

The command-syntax is as follows:

  PACK sourcefile [packedfile]
    [/H:headerpath\
    |/H:headerfile
    |/H:headerpath\ headerfile]
    [/D:headerdate]
    [/T:headertime]
    [/C] [/A] [/R]

where:

 sourcefile          Specifies the name of the file you want packed
                     (compressed). This parameter is required. Include the
                     drive and path if the file is not in the working
                     directory. Global file-name characters are permitted.

                     When the data is compressed, the name of the source file
                     is placed in the header of the compressed file and is used
                     as the destination file name during unpacking.

 packedfile          Specifies the name of the file that will contain the
                     compressed data.  Files that contain compressed data can
                     be recognized by the @ symbol as the last character in the
                     file name.  If you do not specify this parameter, PACK
                     places the compressed data in sourcefile and modifies its
                     name to contain the @ symbol.

 /H:headerpath\ or /H:headerfile or /H:headerpath\headerfile These parameters
                     can be used separately or they can be paired.

      /H:headerpath\
           Specifies the destination path to be placed in the header of the
           file that contains the compressed data. Drive letters are not
           permitted. Unless this path is overridden with the UNPACK command,
           it will be the destination path when the file is uncompressed.
           Headerpath must end with a back slash (\).

      /H:headerfile
           Specifies the name of the file to be placed in the header of the
           compressed file. This file name will be used as the destination file
           for the uncompressed data and cannot be overridden.

           If a header file name is not specified, PACK automatically uses
           sourcefile as the name of the file that is placed in the header of
           the compressed file.

      /H:headerpath\headerfile
           Specifies that both a destination path and a destination file name
           are to be placed in the header of the file that has the compressed
           data.

 /D:headerdate       Records the date in the header of the file that has the
                     compressed data, and also in the destination file when it
                     is uncompressed.

                     The date must follow the format /D:MM-DD-YYYY (for
                     example: /D:08-20-1991 and /D:12-30-2010)

 /T:headertime       Records the time in the header of the file that has the
                     compressed data, and also in the destination file when it
                     is uncompressed.

                     The time must follow the format /T:HH.MM (for example
                     /T:02.06 and /T:14.54). Hour 00 represents 12 a.m. and
                     hour 12 represents 12 p.m.

 /C                  Specifies that the current path be placed in the header of
                     the file that contains the compressed data. When the
                     UNPACK command is used, this path will be the destination
                     path for the file that contains the uncompressed data.

                     You cannot use /C when the headerpath is used.

 /A                  Adds data from sourcefile to the data in packedfile.

                     The source file can be either in a compressed or
                     uncompressed state. If the source file is in an
                     uncompressed state, the data is compressed before being
                     added to the file containing the compressed data.

 /R                  Removes the file specified by sourcefile from the file
                     that contains only compressed data. The sourcefile
                     parameter must specify the path and file name exactly as
                     they appear in the header of the file with the compressed
                     data; otherwise, the following error message appears on
                     the screen.

                                          The specified file to remove was not found.

                     The /R parameter is valid only when used in conjunction
                     with sourcefile and packedfile.

 Note:  To display the path and file-name information stored in the header of
        the file that contains the compressed data, use the UNPACK command and
        specify the SHOW option. For information about the SHOW option, see the
        UNPACK command in the online OS/2 Command Reference.

 You can also get end-to-end compressed data by using global file-name
 characters. For example:

    PACK *.EXE BUNDLE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.2. Starting PACK: Method 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can start PACK with a single command from the command line. You can type
the name of a single file that contains a list of all the files you want to
compress.

Include the drive and path if the files are not in the working directory. You
can specify file names with any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters.
File-name extensions are not required; however, if you specify a file name that
has an extension, also type the extension.

The command-line syntax is as follows:

  PACK listfile [packedfile] /L
    [/H:headerpath\
    |/H:headerfile
    |/H:headerpath\ headerfile]
    [/D:headerdate]
    [/T:headertime]
    [/C]

where:

 listfile            Specifies the name of the file that contains a list of
                     files that are to be compressed. When naming a list file,
                     do not use global file-name characters.

                     For information about list files, see Creating a List
                     File.

 packedfile          Specifies the name of the file that will contain the
                     compressed data. Files that contain compressed data can be
                     recognized by the @ symbol as the last character in the
                     file name. If you do not specify this parameter, PACK
                     places the compressed data in sourcefile and modifies its
                     name to contain the @ symbol.

 /L                  Indicates that filename is a list file. A list file is not
                     compressed; it simply contains a listing of the names of
                     the files that are to be compressed.

 /H:headerpath\ or /H:headerfile or /H:headerpath\ headerfile These parameters
                     can be used separately or they can be paired.

      /H:headerpath\
           Specifies the destination path (drive letters are not permitted) to
           be placed in the header of the file that contains the compressed
           data. Unless this path is overridden with the UNPACK command, it
           will be the destination path when the file is uncompressed.
           Headerpath must end with a back slash (\).

      /H:headerfile
           Specifies the name of the file to be placed in the header of the
           compressed file. This file name will be used as the destination file
           for the uncompressed data and cannot be overridden.

           If a header file name is not specified, PACK automatically uses
           sourcefile as the name of the file that is placed in the header of
           the compressed file.

      /H:headerpath\ headerfile
           Specifies that both a destination path and a destination file name
           are to be placed in the header of the file that has the compressed
           data.

 /D:headerdate       Records the date in the header of the file that has the
                     compressed data, and also in the destination file when it
                     is uncompressed.

                     The date must follow the format /D:MM-DD-YYYY. For
                     example: /D:08-20-1991 and /D:12-30-2010.

 /T:headertime       Records the time in the header of the file that has the
                     compressed data, and also in the destination file when it
                     is uncompressed.

                     The time must follow the format /T:HH.MM. For example
                     /T:02.06 and /T:14.54. Hour 00 represents 12 a.m. and hour
                     12 represents 12 p.m.

 /C                  Specifies that the current path be placed in the header of
                     the file that contains the compressed data. When the
                     UNPACK command is used, this path will be the destination
                     path for the file that contains the uncompressed data.

                     You cannot use /C when the headerpath is used.

 Note:  The path and file-name information stored in the header of the file
        that contains the compressed data can be displayed by using the /SHOW
        option available with UNPACK. For information about the /SHOW option,
        see the UNPACK command in the on line OS/2 Command Reference.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. Creating a List File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use a list file with PACK, you must first create a file that contains the
names of the files you want to compress. You can give the list file any name.
Following is an example of specifying a list file at the command line.

  PACK DEVICE.LST DEVICE.DRV /L

The /L indicates that DEVICE.LST is a list file. If the list file is not in the
working directory, you must specify the drive and path. Global file-name
characters are not permitted in the list-file name. DEVICE.DRV is the
destination file for the end-to-end-compressed data. (End-to-end compressed
data is the data from each of the files contained in the list file. This data
is stored in a contiguous format in the destination file.)

The syntax used in the list file is similar to that used in the command line.
The syntax for a single line in the list file follows:

  sourcefile
    [/H:headerpath\
    |/H:headerfile
    |/H:headerpath\ headerfile]
    [/D:headerdate]
    [/T:headertime]
    [/C]

When using the list-file method (method 2), global file-name characters are not
permitted in the source-file name. Notice also that "PACK" is excluded and
packedfile is not permitted in the list file, because they were specified on
the command line. You can include comments or blank lines by entering a
semicolon as the first character of the line. An example of a list file
follows.

  ;This is a comment
  C:\OS2\COMMAND.COM
  CONFIG.SYS /H:CONFIG.BAK /C
  \OS2\INSTALL\DDINSTAL.EXE
   /H:\OS2\DDINSTAL.TMP
   /D:10-15-91 /T:11.45


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. Starting UNPACK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNPACK restores a file of compressed data to its original size and copies it to
a specified drive and path. To start the UNPACK command, type:

  UNPACK sourcefile
  [destinationdrive:] [destinationpath]
  [/SHOW] [/N:singlefile]
  [/V] [/F]

where:

 sourcefile          Specifies the name of an existing file that contains
                     compressed data.  If this file contains one or more files
                     of compressed data, UNPACK restores each file within the
                     file.

 destinationdrive:   Specifies the name of the drive where you want UNPACK to
                     copy one or more restored files.

                     When you specify a destination drive but not a path,
                     UNPACK uses the path information stored in the header of
                     the file that contains the compressed data.

 destinationpath     Specifies the name of the directory (and its
                     subdirectories) where you want UNPACK to copy one or more
                     restored files.

                     When specified, the destination path overrides the path
                     information stored in the header of the file that contains
                     the compressed data.

 /SHOW               Displays the destination path and file-name information
                     that are saved in the header of each file containing
                     compressed data.

 /N:singlefile       Extracts and uncompresses one file from a file that
                     contains multiple files of compressed data.

 /V                  Verifies that sectors written to the target disk are
                     recorded properly.  This parameter lets you know that
                     critical data has been correctly recorded.

                     This parameter causes UNPACK to run slower because a check
                     is made for each entry recorded on the disk.

 /F                  Specifies that files with extended attributes should not
                     be unpacked or copied if the destination file system does
                     not support extended attributes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Dialog Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You use the Dialog Editor to create and modify dialog boxes, and to create and
modify the controls and text within dialog boxes. As you create the dialog box
and its controls, you see them on the screen as the user will see them when
your program is run. You can place each dialog box and its controls where you
want them on the screen. In addition, you can test the dialog box before you
incorporate it into your application.

Each dialog box and control can have either an integer identifier or a symbolic
identifier that equates to an integer identifier. You use the identifier in
your application to refer to the dialog box or control. If you intend to use
symbolic identifiers in your application, you must enter the symbolic and
integer identifiers in an include file.  If you do not use symbolic names, the
Dialog Editor supplies an integer identifier for each control and for the
dialog box itself.  You can use the Dialog Editor to create the include file,
or you can use a text editor to create the include file before using the Dialog
Editor.

It is good programming practice to plan the resources that your application
will use and to choose a naming and numbering convention for the symbolic or
integer identifiers before you create them.  Keep the include file separate
from other include files used by your application.  Include files used by the
Dialog Editor can contain only #define statements that define their symbolic
identifiers and equivalent integers.

Although the Dialog Editor draws dialog boxes and controls on the screen so you
can see what they look like when used by your application, it does not save
them as graphics.  Instead, the Dialog Editor saves them in an ASCII-text
format file that has a .DLG extension.  Refer to the dialog template section of
this chapter.

The Dialog Editor also creates a compiled form of the .DLG file in a resource
file with a .RES extension. The .DLG and .RES files can contain more than one
dialog box.  The resource file can contain other application resources, such as
icons, bit maps, and string tables.  It is attached to the executable (.EXE)
file of the application during the compile and link process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Designing Dialog Boxes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Dialog boxes should be designed to clearly identify the information that the
user is required to complete. The following are a few Common User Access*
guidelines:

   o  Lay out the controls in columns, starting at the upper-left corner, for
      left-to-right or top-to-bottom scanning.
   o  Vertically and horizontally align selection and entry fields so that the
      cursor moves in a straight line.
   o  Arrange the controls in the sequence in which the user would complete
      them.
   o  If there are only a few entry fields, locate them at the top of the
      dialog box.
   o  Make groups of controls obvious by use of group boxes and white space.
   o  Align group boxes, where possible.  Group boxes can be extended to the
      right to line up with other group boxes.
   o  Use field identifiers to identify the purpose of single and multiple
      groups of choices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. Creating a Dialog Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To run the Dialog Editor, select Dialog Editor from the Development Tools
folder. The main window appears, displaying the menu bar choices File, Edit,
Control, Arrange, Options, and Help. On line help that tells you how to use the
editor is available on most Dialog Editor windows.

To create a new dialog box, start with either one of the following steps:

   o  Select New Dialog from the Edit menu.  The editor opens new files with
      the extensions .RES and .DLG. This also opens a new include file.
   o  Select New from the File menu.  This opens new files with the extensions
      .RES and .DLG. You can open a new include file or an existing one.

 The above steps have the same effect.

 When you edit a dialog box, the names of the resource and include files are
 shown in the title bar of the Dialog Editor. If you are editing a new file
 that has not yet been named or saved, (Untitled) appears in the title bar in
 place of a name. If (Untitled) appears in the title bar in place of a name,
 there are unsaved changes.

 The Dialog Box ID field appears in the status area. A default integer number
 is supplied in the entry field. Type a symbolic identifier for the dialog box,
 such as MYDIALOG. Tab to the integer field and type the integer number. Press
 Enter to place them both in the include file.

 The new dialog box appears in the lower-left corner of the editor screen
 enclosed by a frame. The frame contains eight small squares called drag
 handles, which allow you to change the width and height of the selected item.
 This indicates that the dialog box is selected for editing.  If you are
 creating a new dialog box, the dialog is automatically selected; at all other
 times, before you edit the dialog box or a control, you must click on it to
 select it.

 To continue creating the new dialog box, follow these steps:

   1. Make the dialog box larger by clicking on one of its drag handles with
      the left mouse button and dragging until the box is the size you want it
      to be. This can be done in one operation by clicking on the upper-right
      corner of the frame and dragging diagonally upwards and to the right.

      Information about the item you are editing is displayed in the Selected
      Item Status box in the left half of the status area.  As you move the
      shadow box, the x-y-coordinates change.  These are the coordinates of the
      origin of the dialog box relative to the origin of the window.  The
      cx-cy-coordinates are the width and height of the dialog box.  The
      symbolic identifier is also shown.

   2. Select Styles from the Edit menu. The Dialog Box Styles pop-up window
      appears.

   3. Click on the text entry field in the status area, and then type the
      dialog box title (for instance, Sample dialog box) into the field.

   4. Press Enter and the title appears at the top of your dialog box.

 You can reposition the entire dialog box by moving the pointer inside the top
 area enclosed by the frame, holding the left mouse button down, and dragging
 the shadow box across the screen.  When the shadow box is in the position
 where you want the dialog box to appear, release the mouse button.  The dialog
 box appears in that position. Alternatively, you can move the dialog box using
 the keyboard arrow keys.  You can reposition the dialog box at any time during
 the edit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1. Using a Grid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Before you start adding controls to the dialog box, you might want to first
select the grid option to make laying out your dialog easier.

You can use a mouse to place controls in a dialog box and to move the controls
in line with each other.  However, you can more accurately position the
controls by using the keyboard arrow keys or mouse after grid values have been
set.

The Settings-change dialog lets you set the number of character spaces (in
dialog units) by which you can move dialog boxes and controls when using the
Dialog Editor.

To set the grid size, follow these steps:

   1. Select Settings from the Arrange menu. The Settings-change dialog is
      displayed. The initial grid setting for both x and y is 1 unit.

   2. Change the x-setting to 10 and the y-setting to 5.  Click on OK.

 The horizontal (x) and vertical (y) values are in dialog units. A horizontal
 dialog unit is 0.25 of the standard character size. A vertical dialog unit is
 0.125 of the standard character size.  For example, if you move a control to
 the left or the right (using the mouse or keyboard arrow keys) with x set at
 20, it moves in steps of twenty dialog units.

 When you subsequently position dialog boxes or controls, the objects move by
 the specified number of dialog units on an invisible grid. Large values make
 it easier to align controls, while small values allow you to position controls
 in the dialog box more precisely.

 Now that the grid is in place, you are ready to start adding controls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2. Ordering Control Groups ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option allows you to gather controls into groups and to change the order
in which the tab keys and arrow keys move the selection cursor around the
controls.

When you use group boxes to group controls, always create the group box before
the controls that are to go inside it.

It is good practice to put group markers around all separate groups of
controls, including putting a marker before the first control in the list.

The list box shows the order in which the selection cursor moves between the
controls when the user presses the arrow and tab keys. (The coordinate position
of a control when displayed in the dialog box does not affect the order.)
Initially, the controls are listed in the order in which they were created.

There are three functions involved in grouping controls:

   o  Setting Group Markers
   o  Setting Tab Markers
   o  Moving Control Order

 Setting Group Markers

 To set up groups in a dialog that has various types of controls, follow these
 steps:

   1. Select Order Groups from the Arrange menu.  The Groups - order dialog is
      displayed.

   2. Click on the first radio button in the list box.

   3. Click on the Group Marker push button.  A group marker is now displayed
      between the Text control and the first radio button in the list.

   4. Scroll down the list and click on the first push button in the list.
      Click on the Group Marker push button.  This has organized your controls
      into groups of text, radio buttons, check boxes, and push buttons.

 Setting Tab Markers

 After setting group markers, you will want to set tab-stops.  The controls
 marked with an asterisk already have tab-stops.

 To make the tab-stop at only the first control in each group, delete the
 tab-stops from the second and third radio button and check box, following
 these steps:

   1. Click on the second radio button in the list to mark it.

   2. Click on the Delete Tab push button.

   3. Repeat the above steps for the third radio button, and then perform the
      same operation for the second and third check box in the list.  When this
      is complete, press Enter.

 Moving Control Order

 You can move controls in the list and then see during testing how the changes
 affect the movement of the cursor. To change the position of a control in the
 list, follow these steps:

   1. Click on the name of the control to select it.

   2. Position the pointer in the list where you want the name to appear. The
      pointer changes shape to a short horizontal line when it is over a place
      where you can insert the name.

   3. To insert the control name, click the mouse button.

 After grouping controls, you might want to test or edit the dialog, or enter
 additional controls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3. Adding Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The control menu lists, in alphabetic order, all the controls that you can put
in a dialog box. To add controls, follow these steps:

   1. Select a control from the Control menu or click on an icon on the Control
      Palette at the right side of the window.

      The pointer becomes a small plus sign (+) in a square. The center marks
      the position where the lower-left corner of the frame for the control
      will be set.

   2. Click the mouse to position the control.

   3. A dialog might appear (depending on the type of control) in which you
      must enter data or check preferences to define the control. Complete this
      and close the dialog.

 For an example of adding controls in a typical dialog, see Adding Controls
 Example.

 You might want to test the dialog.

 For detailed descriptions of individual controls and how they work, see the
 individual controls in the on line help (while using the Dialog Editor) by
 following these steps:

   1. Select Help Index from the Help menu (or press F1 and select Help Index).

   2. Select Options or press Alt-O.

   3. Select Contents or press Ctrl-C.

   4. Select Control Menu for an alphabetic list of controls, or select Control
      Palette for the icons as they appear on the Control Palette.

   5. Select the control you want to read about.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4. Adding Controls Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The control menu lists, in alphabetic order, all the controls that you can put
in a dialog box. The sample dialog is Sample Dialog Template File. To add
controls for a sample dialog, follow these steps:

   1. Select Text from the Control menu or select a control by clicking on its
      icon on the Control Palette at the right side of the window.

      The pointer becomes a small plus sign (+) in a square.  The center marks
      the position where the center of the control will be.

   2. Position the pointer inside the dialog box near the upper-left corner and
      click the mouse.

   3. Type Student Level: in the Text entry field. Observe that the next
      sequential integer is supplied in the Symbol entry field.  Press Enter.

   4. Replace the symbol with ID_GRAD and press Enter.

      The Dialog editor assigns the next integer to the symbolic identifier you
      entered and places it in the include file. This is another technique for
      entering symbolic identifiers.

   5. To view or change the include file at any time, select Symbols from the
      Edit menu. The Symbols dialog appears.

      The symbolic and integer identifier for the dialog box and the text
      control are displayed in the list box. The dialog allows you to add,
      delete, and change the identifiers and to view the hexadecimal
      equivalents of the integers.

   6. Select the OK push button to remove the dialog and register any changes.
      Select Cancel if you have not made any changes.

   7. In your dialog box, the static control is not large enough for you to see
      all the text. To remedy this, click on the text, and a frame appears
      around it. Drag the right-hand edge of the frame to the right to enlarge
      the field.

      When you release the mouse button, you should be able to see all the tex.
      When a control has a frame around it, it is selected and you can use a
      shadow box to position it, as you did with the dialog box.

   8. To add another control, select Radio Button from the Control menu and
      position the cursor just beneath the Student Level text.  Press Enter.

   9. Type Elementary in the Button Text entry field and press Enter. Drag the
      right edge of the frame that surrounds the radio button until you can see
      all of the text.

  10. Select Radio Button again and type Intermediate in the Text entry field.
      Position this radio button below the first one.

  11. Select Radio Button again and type Advanced in the Text entry field.
      Position this radio button below the other two.

  12. Select Group Box from the Control menu. Position the cursor to the right
      of the column of radio buttons and press Enter.

  13. Type Media in the Text entry field and press Enter to title the group
      box.

  14. Click on the lower-right corner of the group box frame and drag it
      diagonally down and to the right to enlarge it.  The bottom of the group
      box frame should be lower than the last of the radio buttons, and the
      right-hand side of the group box should be almost at the far right of the
      dialog box.  This is to make room for a group of check boxes that will go
      inside the group box.

      When you use group boxes to group controls, you always create the group
      box before the controls that are to go inside it.

  15. Select Check Box from the Control menu. Position the cursor inside the
      group box in line with the first radio button in the list, and click the
      mouse.

  16. Type TextBooks in the Button Text entry field and press Enter. Enlarge
      the frame of the check box until all of the text is displayed.

  17. Select Check Box again and position the cursor below the first check box.
      Type Video in the Text entry field and click Enter. Enlarge the check box
      frame until all of the text is displayed.

  18. Select Check Box again and position the cursor below the previous two
      check boxes. Type Diskettes in the Text entry field.

      In the left-hand side of the dialog box, you should now have a column of
      radio buttons with a heading of Student Level, and on the right a group
      box with a heading of Media that contains three check boxes.

  19. Finally, add three push buttons to the dialog box.  Select Pushbutton
      from the Control menu. Position the cursor in the lower-left side of the
      dialog box and click the mouse.  Type OK in the Text entry field and
      press Enter.

  20. Position another push button to the right of the first one (in the lower
      middle of the dialog box) and type Cancel in the Text entry field.

  21. Select a third push button and position it to the right of the second.
      Type Help in the Text entry field.

 The dialog box and its controls are now complete.

 Try selecting each of the controls, and observe the information in the
 Selected Item Status. It holds information about each control that you edit.

 You might now want to test the dialog box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5. Selecting Color and Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Presentation Parameters dialog allows you to select the color and font for
individual controls or for an entire dialog box.

You can select all of the following:

   o  Foreground Color
   o  Background Color
   o  Foreground Color Highlight
   o  Background Color Highlight
   o  Disabled (greyed out) Foreground Color
   o  Disabled (greyed out) Background Color
   o  Font Size
   o  Font Name

 To set presentation parameters, follow these steps:

   1. Select a control or the dialog box.

   2. Select Presentation Parameters from the Edit menu.

   3. Type the number, from 1 to 255 parts of each color, in the appropriate
      fields.

   4. Type the font size and name, if you want to change the default, in the
      last two fields.

   5. Select OK or press Enter to close the dialog.

 You might now want to test the dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6. Arranging Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Arrange menu allows you to arrange and align controls in a logical and
easy-to-understand layout.

 Align             Aligns controls along an edge.

 Even spacing      Evenly spaces controls

 Same size         Sets controls to the same size.

 Push buttons      Arranges push buttons.

 Order groups      Displays the Groups-order dialog, so you can change the
                   order of controls and groups.

 Settings          Displays the Settings-change dialog, so you can change the
                   grid and spacing constants.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. Changing the Dialog Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the properties of a dialog box or a single control, use the following
functions of the Edit menu:

   o  Select New Dialog to create another dialog box in the same resource file.
      Your existing dialog box will stay in memory.

   o  Select Select Dialog to switch to another open dialog box.

   o  Select Symbols to define symbols.

 Eight of the editing functions require that you first select the control to be
 edited. The selected control will appear in the drag window, surrounded by
 eight dots, one in each corner and one at the midpoint of each side.

 The following functions require that a control must first be selected:

   o  Select Cut to cut a control you would like to move or delete.

   o  Select Copy to copy to the clipboard a control you would like to
      duplicate elsewhere in the same dialog or in another dialog.

   o  Select Paste to place a control you have marked with Cut or Copy.

   o  Select Clear to erase a control.

   o  Select Duplicate to create another control in this dialog box that is
      identical to the selected control.

   o  Select Styles to define the style of the selected control.

   o  Select Presentation parameters to select the colors and fonts.

   o  Select Size to text to adjust the size of an entry field to the text
      inside.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1. Using the Options Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

On the Options menu, a check mark next to each option shows whether it is
selected (on) or not (off).

To toggle your selection of options on and off, use the following functions of
the Options menu:

   o  Select Test mode to test the dialog.

   o  Select Hex mode to toggle between hexadecimal and decimal display of ID
      Values of symbols.

   o  Select Translate mode to toggle translate mode on and off.

   o  Select Enable 2.x styles to use controls and their styles which are
      specific to OS/2 2.x, but not prior releases.

   o  Select Show status area to toggle display of the status area on and off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.2. Testing the Dialog Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To test the dialog box, select Test Mode from the Options menu.  The dialog box
is displayed as it will appear to the user in a program.  In test mode, you can
select controls, and their appearance changes in the same way as they do in an
application.  To return to work mode, click on Test Mode again to de select it.

If you want to make changes, you can edit the dialog box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.3. Ending an Edit Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To end the edit session, select Close from the system pull-down menu.  You see
prompts for the file names of the files you want to save.

If you want to edit the same file the next time you use the editor, select Open
from the File menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. Dialog Templates ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialog Editor creates an ASCII text file that has the file-name extension
.DLG. The compiled form of this file, created using the Resource Compiler, has
the file-name extension .RES.

The .DLG file contains a series of statements, collectively termed a dialog
template, that define each dialog box and each control in each dialog box. The
statement for each dialog box contains the data required to create it, namely
its class, size, position, window text, and any other special information
required for the window.

Normally, the template consists of a dialog box window followed by the controls
contained within it, which are child windows.

The first statement in the template is the DLGINCLUDE statement, which
specifies the file name of the include file.

The next statement is the DLGTEMPLATE statement, which specifies the symbolic
identifier of the dialog box (MYDIALOG). The DLGTEMPLATE statement also
specifies any loading and memory options. The actual dialog template is
contained within the first BEGIN and last END statement. There is a CONTROL
statement for each of the controls in the dialog box. The CONTROL statement is
a general statement that is followed by parameters that further specify the
control, such as:

   o  Text, where appropriate.  For example, the text OK is defined for one of
      the push buttons.
   o  Application-defined symbolic or integer identifiers for each control.
      Your application uses the identifier to track the responses from
      controls.  For example, ID_NULL is the identifier of the text control.
   o  The types and positions of the various controls.  For example, the group
      box control is a control window of window class WC_STATIC. The Cancel and
      Help push buttons are of window class WC_BUTTON.
   o  The appearance and operation of the dialog box and its controls, which
      are specified in detail by combinations of style parameters. For example,
      the check boxes have a class style of BS_CHECKBOX, and radio buttons have
      a class style of BS_RADIOBUTTON.  You can also specify appropriate WS_*
      styles.

 If necessary, you can use a text editor to edit the .DLG file, for example, to
 fine-tune the dialog template produced by the dialog box editor.  You can even
 use a text editor to produce your own .DLG file. The Dialog Editor uses the
 general CONTROL statement with window classes and control styles to define
 controls.

 You can use the CONTROL statement in the same way to define your controls, or
 you can use any of several predefined control statements that give you the
 same result.  For example, the predefined control statement PUSHBUTTON gives
 you a WC_BUTTON class window with default styles of BS_PUSHBUTTON and
 WS_TABSTOP.

 The predefined controls are described in the following sections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.1. AUTOCHECKBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The AUTOCHECKBOX statement creates an automatic-check-box control. The control
is a small rectangle (check box) that contains a check when the user selects
it. The specified text is displayed to the right of the check box.  A check
appears in the square when the user first selects the control and disappears
the next time the user selects it. The AUTOCHECKBOX statement, which you can
use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the text, identifier,
coordinates, dimensions, and attributes of a control window.  The predefined
class for this control is WC_BUTTON. If you do not specify the style, the
default style is BS_AUTOCHECKBOX and WS_TABSTOP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.2. AUTORADIOBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The AUTORADIOBUTTON statement creates an automatic-radio-button control.  This
control is a small circle with the given text displayed to its right.  The
control highlights the circle and sends a message to its parent window when the
user selects the button.  The control also removes the selection from any other
automatic-radio-button controls in the same group.  When the user selects the
button again, the control removes the highlight before sending a message.  The
AUTORADIOBUTTON statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW
statement, defines the text, identifier, coordinates, dimensions, and
attributes of a control window.  The predefined class for this control is
WC_BUTTON.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is
BS_AUTORADIOBUTTON.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.3. CHECKBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CHECKBOX statement creates a check-box control.  The control is a small
rectangle (check box) that has the specified text displayed to the right.  The
control highlights the rectangle and sends a message to its parent window when
the user selects the control.  The CHECKBOX statement, which you can use only
in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the text, identifier, coordinates,
dimensions, and attributes of a control window.  The predefined class for this
control is WC_BUTTON.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is
BS_CHECKBOX and WS_TABSTOP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.4. COMBOBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The COMBOBOX statement creates a combination-box control.  This control
combines a list-box control with an entry-field control.  It allows you to
place the selected item from a list box into an entry field. The COMBOBOX
statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the
text, identifier, coordinates, dimensions, and attributes of a control window.
The predefined class for this control is WC_COMBOBOX. If you do not specify a
style, the default style is CBS_SIMPLE, WS_GROUP, WS_TABSTOP, and WS_VISIBLE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.5. CONTAINER Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CONTAINER statement creates a container control within a dialog window.
The container control is a visual component that holds objects.  The CONTAINER
statement defines the identifier, coordinates, dimensions, and attributes of a
container control.  The predefined class for this control is WC_CONTAINER.  If
you do not specify a style, the default style is WS_TABSTOP, WS_VISIBLE, and
CCS_SINGLESEL.

Example

This example creates a container control at position (30,30) within the dialog
window.  The container has a width of 70 character units and a height of 25
character units.  Its resource ID is 301.  The default style CCS_SINGLESEL has
been overridden by the style specification CCS_MULTIPLESEL.  The default styles
WS_TABSTOP and WS_GROUP are both in effect, though only the latter is
specified.

#define IDC_CONTAINER    301
#define IDD_CONTAINERDLG 504
DIALOG "Container", IDD_CONTAINERDLG, 23, 6, 120, 280, FS_NOBYTEALIGN |
        WS_VISIBLE, FCF_SYSMENU | FCF_TITLEBAR
  BEGIN
     CONTAINER   IDC_CONTAINER, 30, 30, 70, 200, CCS_MULTIPLESEL |
                       WS_GROUP
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.6. DEFPUSHBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DEFPUSHBUTTON statement creates a default push button control. The control
is a round-cornered rectangle containing the given text. The rectangle has a
bold outline to represent that it is the default response for the user.  The
control sends a message to its parent window when the user chooses the control.
The DEFPUSHBUTTON statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW
statement, lets you define the coordinates, dimensions, and attributes of the
default push button control.  The predefined class for this control is
WC_BUTTON.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is BS_PUSHBUTTON,
BS_DEFAULT, and WS_TABSTOP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.7. EDITTEXT or ENTRYFIELD Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The EDITTEXT or ENTRYFIELD statement creates an entry-field control.  This
control is a rectangle in which the user can type and edit text. The control
displays a pointer when the user selects the control.  The user can then use
the keyboard to enter text or edit the existing text.  Editing keys include the
Backspace and Delete keys.  By using the mouse or the direction-arrow keys, the
user can select the character or characters to delete or select the place to
insert new characters.

The EDITTEXT or ENTRYFIELD statement defines the text, identifier, coordinates,
dimensions, and attributes of a control window.  The predefined class for this
control is WC_ENTRYFIELD.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is
ES_AUTOSCROLL and WS_TABSTOP. The EDITTEXT control statement is identical to
the ENTRYFIELD control statement. Use the EDITTEXT or ENTRYFIELD statement only
in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.8. FRAME Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The FRAME statement defines a frame window.  The statement defines the title,
identifier, position, and dimensions of the frame window, as well as the window
style.  The FRAME statement is most often used in a WINDOWTEMPLATE statement,
and typically, only one FRAME statement is used.  The FRAME statement, in turn,
typically contains at least one WINDOW statement that defines the client window
belonging to the frame window.

The frame window has no default style.  You must use the framectl field to
define additional frame controls, such as a title bar and system menu, to be
created when the frame window is created.  If the text field is not empty, the
statement automatically adds a title-bar control to the frame window, whether
or not you specify the FCF_TITLEBAR style.  Frame controls are given default
styles and control identifiers based on their class.  For example, a title-bar
control receives the identifier FID_TITLEBAR.

The FRAME statement can actually contain any combination of CONTROL, DIALOG,
and WINDOW statements. Typically, a FRAME statement contains one WINDOW
statement.

Example

This example creates a standard frame window, with title bar, a system menu,
minimize and maximize boxes, and a vertical scroll bar.  The FRAME statement
contains a WINDOW statement defining the client window belonging to the frame
window.

WINDOWTEMPLATE 1
BEGIN
    FRAME "My Window", 1, 10, 10, 320, 130, 0,
            FCF_STANDARD | FCF_VERTSCROLL
    BEGIN
        WINDOW "", FID_CLIENT, 0, 0, 0, 0, "MyClientClass"
    END
END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.9. GROUPBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The GROUPBOX statement creates a group-box control.  The control is a rectangle
that groups other controls together.  A border is drawn around the groups, and
text is displayed in the upper-left corner. The GROUPBOX statement, which you
can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the text, identifier,
coordinates, dimensions, and attributes of a group-box control.  The predefined
class for this control is WC_STATIC.  If you do not specify a style, the
default style is SS_GROUPBOX and WS_TABSTOP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.10. ICON Statement (Control) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This form of the ICON statement creates an icon control.  This control is an
icon displayed in a dialog box.  The ICON statement, which you can use only in
a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the icon-resource identifier,
icon-control identifier, position, and attributes of a control window.  The
predefined class for this control is WC_STATIC.  If you do not specify a style,
the default style is SS_ICON.  For the ICON statement, the width and height
fields are ignored; the icon automatically sizes itself.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.11. LISTBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The LISTBOX statement creates commonly used controls for a dialog box or
window.  The control is a rectangle containing a list of user-selectable
strings, such as file names.

The LISTBOX statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement,
defines the identifier, coordinates, dimensions, and attributes of a control
window.  The predefined class for this control is WC_LISTBOX.  If you do not
specify a style, the default style is WS_TABSTOP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.12. MLE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MLE statement creates a multiple-line entry-field control.  The control is
a rectangle in which the user can type and edit multiple lines of text.  The
control displays a pointer when the user selects it.  The user can then use the
keyboard to enter text or edit the existing text.  Editing keys include the
Backspace and Delete keys. By using the mouse or the direction-arrow keys, the
user can select the character or characters to delete or select the place to
insert new characters.  The MLE statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG
or WINDOW statement, defines the text, identifier, coordinates, dimensions, and
attributes of a control window.  The predefined class for this control is
WC_MLE.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is MLS_BORDER,
WS_GROUP, and WS_TABSTOP. If the MLS_READONLY style is not specified, the user
can edit the text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.13. NOTEBOOK Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The NOTEBOOK statement creates a notebook control within the dialog window.
This control is used to organize information on individual pages so that it can
be located and displayed easily. The NOTEBOOK statement defines the identifier,
coordinates, dimensions, and attributes of a notebook control.  The predefined
class for this control is WC_NOTEBOOK.  If you do not specify a style, the
default style is WS_TABSTOP and WS_VISIBLE. The NOTEBOOK statement is used only
in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.

Example

This example creates a notebook control at position (20, 20) within the dialog
window.  The notebook has a width of 200 character units and a height of 32
character units.  Its resource ID is 201. The tabs style BKS_ROUNDEDTABS
specification overrides the notebook default style of square tabs. The default
styles WS_TABSTOP and WS_GROUP are both in effect, though only the latter is
specified.

#define    IDC_NOTEBOOK     201
#define    IDD_NOTEBOOKDLG  503
DIALOG "Notebook", IDD_NOTEBOOKDLG, 11, 11, 420, 420, FS_NOBYTEALIGN |
        WS_VISIBLE, FCF_SYSMENU | FCF_TITLEBAR
  BEGIN
    NOTEBOOK   IDC_NOTEBOOK, 20, 20, 200, 400, BKS_ROUNDEDTABS | WS_GROUP
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.14. PUSHBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The PUSHBUTTON statement creates a push button control.  The control is a
round-cornered rectangle containing the given text.  The control sends a
message to its parent whenever the user chooses the control. The PUSHBUTTON
statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the
text, identifier, coordinates, dimensions, and attributes of a control window.
The predefined class for this control is WC_BUTTON. If you do not specify a
style, the default style is BS_PUSHBUTTON and WS_TABSTOP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.15. RADIOBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The RADIOBUTTON statement creates a radio-button control.  The control is a
small circle that has the given text displayed to its right.  The control
highlights the circle and sends a message to its parent window when the user
selects the button.  The control removes the highlight and sends a message when
the button is next selected.  The RADIOBUTTON statement, which you can use only
in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the text, identifier, coordinates,
dimensions, and attributes of a control window.  The predefined class for this
control is WC_BUTTON.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is
BS_RADIOBUTTON.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.16. SLIDER Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The SLIDER statement creates a slider control within the dialog window.  This
control lets the user set, display, or modify a value by moving a slider arm
along a linear slider shaft. The SLIDER statement defines the identifier,
coordinates, dimensions, and attributes of a slider control.  The predefined
class for this control is WC_SLIDER.  If you do not specify a style, the
default style is WS_TABSTOP and WS_VISIBLE. The SLIDER statement is used only
in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.17. SPINBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The SPINBUTTON statement creates a spin button control within the dialog
window.  This control gives the user quick access to a finite set of data.  The
SPINBUTTON statement defines the identifier, coordinates, dimensions, and
attributes of a spin button control.  The predefined class for this control is
WC_SPINBUTTON. If you do not specify a style, the default style is WS_TABSTOP,
WS_VISIBLE, and SPBS_MASTER. The SPINBUTTON statement is used only in a DIALOG
or WINDOW statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.18. Static Text Statements: LTEXT, CTEXT and RTEXT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each of these statements creates a static text control.  The control is a
simple rectangle displaying the given text, which is either aligned to one edge
or centered in the rectangle.  The text is formatted before it is displayed.
Words that would extend past the end of a line are automatically wrapped to the
beginning of the next line.  These three statements, which you can use only in
a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, define the text, identifier, coordinates,
dimensions, and attributes of a static text control.  The predefined class for
this control is WC_STATIC.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is
SS_TEXT, WS_GROUP, and the appropriate alignment flag (DT_LEFT, DT_CENTER, or
DT_RIGHT respectively).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.19. VALUESET Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The VALUESET statement creates a value-set control within the dialog window.
This control lets a user select one choice from a group of mutually exclusive
choices.  The VALUESET statement defines the identifier, coordinates,
dimensions, and attributes of a value-set control.  The predefined class for
this control is WC_VALUESET.  If you do not specify a style, the default style
is WS_TABSTOP and WS_VISIBLE. The VALUESET statement is used only in a DIALOG
or WINDOW statement.

Example

This example creates a value-set control at position (40, 40) within the dialog
window.  The value set control has a width of 220 character and a height of 20
character units.  Its resource ID is 302.  The style specification VS_ICON
creates a control to show items in icon form.  The default styles WS_TABSTOP
and WS_VISIBLE are both in effect, though only WS_TABSTOP is specified.

#define    IDC_VALUESET     302
#define    IDD_VALUESETDLG  501
DIALOG "Value set", IDD_VALUESETDLG, 11, 11, 260, 240, FS_NOBYTEALIGN |
        WS_VISIBLE, FCF_SYSMENU | FCF_TITLEBAR
  BEGIN
    VALUESET  IDC_VALUESET, 40, 40, 220, 160, VS_ICON | WS_TABSTOP
  END

A dialog template can be in either of the following:

   o  A resource.res file (generated from the .DLG file by the Resource
      Compiler)
   o  A block of memory that has the DLGTEMPLATE data structure, in which case
      you use WinCreateDlg to create the dialog box from the template.

 The dialog template uses device-independent dialog units for the coordinate
 system that define the layout of controls in the dialog box.

 A dialog unit is expressed in terms of the default standard character size,
 which can vary from device to device.  You do not need to put code in your
 application to reformat the dialog box when displaying it on different
 devices. (Dialogs might need editing if a different system font is loaded.)  A
 horizontal dialog unit is 0.25 of the standard character size. A vertical
 dialog unit is 0.125 of the standard character size. Dialog units are
 expressed as offsets from the origin (lower-left corner) of the dialog box.

 A dialog template is a general structure.  It could be termed a window
 template, because you can use it to define any window in an application.  If
 you prefer, use the statement WINDOWTEMPLATE instead of DLGTEMPLATE, because
 it is functionally identical. This could reduce the initialization phase of
 the application to registering the application window classes and calling
 WinLoadDlg to load the template.

 If you use the Dialog Editor to define a standard window, you will have to
 edit the resulting .DLG file to ensure that you have a client window and the
 required parent-child relationships.  You will also have to use WinLoadMenu in
 your application, to create a menu bar for the window, because you cannot
 create menus using the Dialog Editor.

 The .RES file is an object-format compiled version of the .DLG file, created
 when the Dialog Editor compiles the dialogs. The Dialog Editor uses the .RES
 file as input on any subsequent edit of the same dialog.  This means that, if
 you use a text editor to fine-tune a .DLG file, and you want subsequently to
 re-edit the dialog using the Dialog Editor, you must first use the Resource
 Compiler to generate a new .RES file from the .DLG file.

 Your application can use either the .RES file output by the Dialog Editor or a
 .RES file created from the .DLG file and the other resources. If your
 application uses the .DLG file, it must be included by the resource script
 file of your application.

 The rcinclude statement includes the .DLG file created by the Dialog Editor;
 for example:

  rcinclude dbe.dlg /* Includes .DLG file */

 The corresponding .H file created by the Dialog Editor must also be included
 in the .RC file.

 Using OS/2-defined control windows, OS/2 draws and operates the controls
 specified in the resource file for your application. Controls are windows and
 can be used within any other window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.20. Sample Dialog Template File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following dialog template is used for the dialog described in Adding
Controls Example.

            DLGINCLUDE 1 "DBE.H"


            DLGTEMPLATE mydialog LOADONCALL MOVEABLE DISCARDABLE

            BEGIN

                      DIALOG "Sample Dialog Box", mydialog, 11, 8, 170, 105,
                          FS_NOBYTEALIGN | FS_DLGBORDER | WS_VISIBLE |
                          WS_SAVEBITS, FCF_TITLEBAR

                      BEGIN

                                CONTROL "Student Level:", id_null, -1, 94, 63, 9, WC_STATIC,
                                    SS_TEXT | DT_LEFT | DT_TOP | WS_GROUP | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "Elementary", 258, 7, 82, 62, 11, WC_BUTTON,
                                    BS_RADIOBUTTON | WS_GROUP | WS_TABSTOP | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "Intermediate", 259, 7, 67, 73, 9, WC_BUTTON,
                                    BS_RADIOBUTTON | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "Advanced", 260, 7, 51, 52, 13, WC_BUTTON,
                                    BS_RADIOBUTTON | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "Media", 261, 87, 48, 75, 54, WC_STATIC,
                                    SS_GROUPBOX | WS_GROUP | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "Textbooks", 262, 97, 83, 60, 10, WC_BUTTON,
                                    BS_CHECKBOX | WS_TABSTOP | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "Video", 263, 97, 68, 46, 10, WC_BUTTON,
                                    BS_CHECKBOX | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "CBT", 264, 97, 53, 32, 10, WC_BUTTON,
                                    BS_CHECKBOX | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "OK", 265, 7, 20, 38, 12, WC_BUTTON,
                                    BS_PUSHBUTTON | WS_GROUP | WS_TABSTOP | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "Cancel", 266, 61, 20, 38, 12, WC_BUTTON,
                                    BS_PUSHBUTTON | WS_TABSTOP | WS_VISIBLE

                                CONTROL "Help", 267, 117, 20, 38, 12, WC_BUTTON,
                                    BS_PUSHBUTTON | WS_TABSTOP | WS_VISIBLE

                      END

            END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Executable File Header Utility (EXEHDR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Executable File Header Utility (EXEHDR) displays and modifies the contents
of an executable-file header.  EXEHDR generates an Output listing showing the
contents of the file header and information about each object or segment in the
file.  Options are provided that let you change values in the file header.

Uses of EXEHDR include:

   o  Determining whether a file is an application or a dynamic link library
   o  Viewing and changing the attributes set by the module definition file
   o  Viewing the number and size of code and data segments.

 You can use EXEHDR with DOS or OS/2 applications and dynamic-link libraries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXEHDR [options] filename

 <options>
      Options used to modify Output or change the file header.

 <filename>
      One or more names of applications or dynamic-link library files.

      Regardless of options, EXEHDR always creates an Output listing of the
      file header.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.1. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display EXEHDR help, type EXEHDR /? at the command prompt.  The appropriate
copyright statement appears along with a brief list of EXEHDR options.

Usage: EXEHDR [options] filename...
Valid options are:
  /?
  /HEAP:(0H - ffffH)
  /HELP
  /MAX:(0H - ffffH)
  /MIN:(0H - ffffH)
  /NEWFILES
  /NOLOGO
  /PMTYPE:(PM | VIO | NOVIO |
                 WINDOWAPI | WINDOWCOMPAT |
                 NOTWINDOWCOMPAT)
  /RESETERROR
  /STACK:(0H - ffffH)
  /VERBOSE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Usage Notes:

   o  Option characters are not case sensitive: /R and /r are equivalent.
   o  Options can be shortened to the fewest characters that uniquely identify
      them.  The characters in brackets can be omitted: /N and /NOLOGO are
      equivalent.
   o  Although use of the minimum one-letter abbreviations is allowed, if a
      future release has an additional option starting with the same letter,
      the one-letter option will no longer be usable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1. Formats Affected by Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The EXEHDR options that can change executable files are MIN, MAX, STACK,
PMTYPE, HEAP, RESETERROR, and NEWFILES.

Executable headers are used by the operating system to determine
characteristics of the executable file, such as stack size, entry point, number
of objects (or segments), and so on. EXEHDR recognizes three different kinds of
executable headers:  DOS (generated by DOS linker), OS/2 16-bit (generated by
LINK), and OS/2 32-bit (generated by LINK386).

An X in the following table indicates which option changes which executable
header:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéOption         ΓöéDOS            ΓöéOS/2 16-bit    ΓöéOS/2 32-bit    Γöé
Γöé               Γöé               Γöé(LINK)         Γöé(LINK386)      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéHEAP           Γöé               ΓöéX              ΓöéX              Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMAX            ΓöéX              Γöé               Γöé               Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMIN            ΓöéX              Γöé               Γöé               Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéNEWFILES       Γöé               ΓöéX              Γöé               Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPMTYPE         Γöé               ΓöéX              ΓöéX              Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRESETERROR     Γöé               ΓöéX              ΓöéX              Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSTACK          ΓöéX              ΓöéX              Γöé               Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

For compatibility purposes, executable files generated by either of the OS/2
link utilities include both a DOS header and an OS/2 header. For example, if
you use /STACK on an executable generated by OS/2 LINK (16-bit), the DOS header
and the OS/2 header will be changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.1. /HEA[P] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Heap Allocation (/HEAP)

Syntax:  /HEA[P]:nnnn

This option sets the size of the local heap and is applicable to OS/2
applications only. The field <nnnn> contains the local heap size in bytes.

You can specify <nnnn> in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal radix using standard C
language notation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.2. /HEL[P] and /? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Display Help (/HELP or /?)

Syntax:  /HEL[P]   OR   /?

This option displays a brief summary of EXEHDR syntax.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.3. /MA[X] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Maximum Allocation (/MAX)

Syntax:  /MA[X]:nnnn

This option sets the maximum allocation of memory for the program. The field
<nnnn> contains the maximum number of 16-byte paragraphs required to load and
run the program. This value must be equal to or greater than the minimum
allocation.

Compare to /MI.

The Maximum Allocation option is equivalent to the LINK386 /CP option.

Refer to Set Max Allocation Space (/CP) (in LINK386 Help)

You can specify <nnnn> in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal radix using standard C
language notation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.4. /MI[N] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Minimum Allocation (/MIN)

Syntax:  /MI[N]:nnnn

This option sets the minimum allocation of memory for the program. The field
<nnnn> contains the minimum number of 16-byte paragraphs required to load and
run the program. This value must be equal to or less than the maximum
allocation.

Compare to /MA.

You can specify <nnnn> in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal radix using standard C
language notation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.5. /NE[WFILES] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

New Files (/NEWFILES)

Syntax:  /NE[WFILES]

This option enables long file name support for OS/2 16-bit LINK files. OS/2
32-bit LINK386 files have long file name support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.6. /NO[LOGO] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Suppress Sign-On Banner (/NOLOGO)

Syntax:  /NO[LOGO]

This option suppresses the sign-on banner displayed by EXEHDR when it starts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.7. /P[MTYPE] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Application Type (/PMTYPE)

Syntax:  /P[MTYPE]:type

This option specifies the type of application.  It pertains only to OS/2
applications.  The /PMTYPE option in EXEHDR is equivalent to either the NAME
Statement in the module-definition file or the Name Application Type (/PM) in
LINK386.

A keyword in <type> is equivalent to a keyword in a NAME statement, as shown in
the following list:

 Field Keyword       Equiv. Keyword

 PM                  WINDOWAPI

 VIO                 WINDOWCOMPAT

 NOVIO               NOTWINDOWCOMPAT

 The NAME statement keyword is also accepted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.8. /R[ESETERROR] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Reset LINK386 Error (/RESETERROR)

Syntax:  /R[ESETERROR]

This option clears an error flag stored in OS/2 applications. The error flag is
set by LINK386 when the link has unresolved external references or duplicate
symbol definitions (any LINK386 error messages starting with L2xxx).

OS/2 does not load the application if the error flag is set. This option allows
you to attempt to run a program with LINK386 errors and is useful during
application development.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.9. /S[TACK] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Stack Allocation (/STACK)

Syntax:  /S[TACK]:nnnn

This option sets the size of the stack.  The field <nnnn> contains the stack
size in bytes.  This option is equivalent to the Control Stack Size (/ST) (in
LINK386 Help).

You can specify <nnnn> in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal radix using standard C
language notation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.10. /V[ERBOSE] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Display in Verbose Mode (/VERBOSE)

Syntax:  /V[ERBOSE]

This option displays the executable-file header in verbose mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. Output ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXEHDR lists the current contents of the file header and information about each
object (or segment) in the file. To redirect this output to a printer or disk
file, use the operating system redirection operator.

The output is in two parts: a Header Listing giving the contents of the file
header; and an Object or Segment Listing giving attributes of all objects (or
segments) in the file.  If the /VERBOSE option is specified, additional output
is generated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.1. Header Listing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The header listing is comprised of the following fields:

 <Module> Name of Application

      This field lists the name of the application as specified in the NAME
      statement of the module-definition file.

      If no module definition was used to create the executable file, this
      field displays the name assumed by default.

      If a module definition was used to create the file, but the LIBRARY
      statement appeared instead of the NAME statement (thus specifying a
      dynamic-link library), the name of the library is given and EXEHDR uses
      the word "Library" instead of "Module" to identify the field.

 <Description> Description of Application

      This field gives the contents, if any, of the DESCRIPTION statement of
      the module-definition file used to create the file being examined.

 <Data> Type of Automatic Data Object

      This field indicates the type of automatic data segment in a program:
      SHARED, NONSHARED, or NONE.  This type can be specified in a
      module-definition file.  The defaults are NONSHARED for applications and
      SHARED for dynamic-link libraries.

 <Initial CS:IP> Program Starting Address

      This field gives the program starting address (if an application is being
      examined) or address of the initialization routine (if a dynamic-link
      library is being examined).

 <Initial SS:SP> Initial Stack Pointer

      This field gives the value of the initial stack pointer.

 <Extra Stack Allocation> Additional stack allocation

      This field gives the value of the extra stack location.

 <DGROUP> Automatic-Data-Object Number


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.2. Object or Segment Listing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The object listing is comprised of the following fields:

 no.         Object index number, starting with 1, in decimal

 type        Identification of the object as a code or data object

             A code object is comprised of segments with class name ending in
             CODE. All other objects are data objects.

 address     Location, within the file, of the contents of the object (in
             hexadecimal)

 file        Size of the object (in bytes), as contained in the file (in
             hexadecimal)

 mem         Size of the object (in bytes), as it is stored in memory (in
             hexadecimal)

             If the value of this field is greater than the value of <file>,
             the operating system pads the additional space with zero values at
             load time.

 flags       Object attributes

             If the /VERBOSE option is not used, only nondefault attributes are
             listed.  Attributes are given in the form specified in the
             module-definition file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.3. Output Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following output is generated by EXEHDR for the executable file
LINK386.EXE:

Module:                    LINK386
Description:               Operating System/2 32-bit LX Linker
Data:                      NONSHARED
Initial CS:IP:            seg   2 offset 6c78
Initial SS:SP:            seg   4 offset 0000
Extra stack allocation:    4000 bytes
DGROUP:                    seg   4

no. type address  file  mem   flags
  1 CODE 00006000 0f7d6 0f7d7
  2 CODE 00015a00 08e40 08e40
  3 DATA 0001ea00 02865 02865
  4 DATA 00021400 02337 08bd0


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.4. Verbose Output ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you specify the /VERBOSE option, EXEHDR generates additional output:

   o  DOS-specific header information. All OS/2 executable files have a DOS
      header, whether bound or not.  If the program is not bound, the DOS
      portion typically consists of a stub that simply terminates the program.

   o  OS/2-specific header information. The object-table display in verbose
      mode is described below.

   o  File addresses and lengths of the various tables in the executable file.
      For each table, the following is generated:

        -  Name of the table
        -  Address of the table within the file
        -  Length of the table in hexadecimal radix
        -  Length of the table in decimal radix

   o  Object table with complete attributes, not just the nondefault
      attributes. The /VERBOSE option displays two additional attributes:

        -  The RELOCS attribute is displayed for each object that has address
           relocations. Relocations occur in each object that references
           objects in other objects or makes dynamic-link references.
        -  The ITERATED attribute is displayed for each object that has
           iterated data. Iterated data consist of a special code that packs
           repeated bytes.

   o  Run-time relocations and fixups.

   o  All exported entry points.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Font Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the OS/2 Font Editor to design and save your own fonts for use in
applications.

A font is a set of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks, and other
symbols that share a common typeface design and line weight. An application
loads a font from a dynamic-link library file (.DLL file).

The Font Editor allows you to edit an enlarged version of each character in an
editing window, using the mouse to switch the enlarged representation of pels
to black or white.

You can change a series of pels by dragging the mouse pointer through them
while holding down the mouse button. An enlarged scale version of the character
is shown in a viewing window to the right of the edit window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1. Using the Font Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To run the Font Editor, select Font Editor from the PM Development Tools
folder.

Select one of the options in the File menu to open a new or existing font. The
letter A appears in both the editing and viewing windows. The rest of the font
appears in the character selection scroll box at the bottom of the Font Editor
window.

To edit any other character in the font, select it from the character selection
scroll box.  The character appears in the editing and viewing windows.

Font Editing Functions

      Functions for defining fonts are found on the Header menu.

      Functions for editing character width are found on the Width and Shift
      menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.1. Defining Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Header menu to define the typestyle that you want to create:

   o  Select Naming to specify the identification details such as the type-face
      name.

   o  Select General to specify spacing (fixed or proportional), type face
      style, line width, and type weight.

   o  Select Sizes to specify the font character dimensions.

   o  Select Relations to specify the position of characters.

   o  Select Definition to change character spacing in a proportional font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.2. Editing Character Width ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Width and Shift menus allow you to change the width of individual
characters.

The Width Menu

Use the Width menu to alter the width of a single character. This menu is
enabled only when you are editing a proportional space font. You can make a
character wider or narrower by adding or deleting columns of pels from the
right, the left, or both sides. You may also use the Set Character Increment
option to set the width of a character. On-line help panels describe how to
perform these functions.

The Shift Menu

Use the Shift menu to insert a one-pel-wide row or column into (or delete from)
the character that you are editing. When you select shift, the pointer becomes
a flat horizontal or vertical bar when inside the edit window.  This enables
you to position it exactly where you want the operation to take place.

To cancel a shift you have selected before execution, select Cancel Choice.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.3. Font Resource Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Font Editor creates a file with a .FNT extension. The .FNT file is not
referred to in the same resource file as other resources.

Instead, it has its own resource file that contains a single-line statement
that has a similar format to the ICON, POINTER, and BITMAP statements, for
example:

FONT  101      myfont.fnt     /* Font */

The FONT keyword identifies the resource type.

The resource type is followed by an integer identifier that is used by the
application to identify the resource. The integer is used as a parameter to the
WinCreateStdWindow call. You cannot use a symbolic name for a font.

The integer identifier can be followed by loading and memory options. Again,
the example lets them default.

The last part of the statement is the file name of the resource created by the
Font Editor. A full path name must be given if it is not in the current
directory.

Producing a font file uses a process similar to binding resources to an .EXE
file. You bind one or more .FNT files to a dummy .DLL, to produce a file
containing the font or fonts. The final file should have the extension .FON.

The .FON file created by the process is installed on the system and becomes a
public font, a font that can be used by any application in the system.

A font not installed on the system is called a private font. Before your
application can use the font, your application must use GpiLoadFonts to load
the .FON file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Forwarded Entry Point (FWDSTAMP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FWDSTAMP adds entry points, called forwarders, to a dynamic link library file
(.DLL). Forwarders point to API functions or other exported code or data. They
contain an import reference so that the final target address of the forwarded
entry is contained in a different module. A forwarder might be called an
imported export.

When a file has a fix-up to a forwarded entry point, the loader resolves that
fix-up to the address of the entry point that the forwarder imports, by
traversing the chain of forwarders until the end of the chain (a nonforwarded
export) is reached.  All forwarders are implicitly exported.

The imported entry point that a forwarder refers to may itself be another
forwarder. The loader will process a chain of forwarders until a nonforwarder
entry point is encountered.

There is no run-time cost to forwarders; however, there is a slight load-time
cost as the loader resolves forwarder chains with their final addresses.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1. Using Forwarders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You use forwarders to combine several DLLs into one without having to relink
old applications. For example, if MOUCALLS and VIOCALLS were combined into a
single DLL called NEWLIB.DLL, then MOUCALLS and VIOCALLS could be replaced with
special DLLs containing forwarders to NEWLIB.DLL.

Important Notes

   o  FWDSTAMP parses only the IMPORTS and EXPORTS section of the module
      definition file.  FWDSTAMP does not verify the syntax of the other
      sections.

   o  When exported names already exist in the input file, their attributes are
      kept, such as resident or nonresident names table, and ordinal numbers.
      Any new conflicting attributes are ignored.

   o  If there is no exported name, FWDSTAMP adds the one defined by the
      EXPORTS statement in the module definition file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1.1. Starting FWDSTAMP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can start FWDSTAMP and specify all input from the command line.  An example
of the syntax follows:

   FWDSTAMP [options] infile deffile outfile

 [options]   Specifies one of the following:

      /?          Displays FWDSTAMP help panel.

      /V          Increases the level of information FWDSTAMP should output.

 infile      Specifies the name of the dynamic link library file that LINK386
             created.  Use the file-name extension of DLL.

 deffile     Specifies the name of the module definition file (.DEF) that
             contains the forwarders. (See Example).

 outfile     Specifies the name of the .DLL file that will contain the added
             forwarders.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1.2. Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Forwarders are specified in the module definition file so that an exported
name, which is also imported, is a forwarder. For example:

        IMPORTS
            VIOMODEWAIT=NEWLIB.123
        EXPORTS
            VIOMODEWAIT @ 25

In the example, a forwarder entry point for VIOMODEWAIT is created and contains
an import reference to NEWLIB.123.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Icon Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Icon Editor lets you create your own art (icons, pointers, and bit maps)
and save them for use by applications.

Icons, pointers, and bit maps produced by the Icon Editor are graphic symbols
comprised of pels (also known as pixels) in any of the following display
states:

   o  Black
   o  White
   o  Color
   o  Screen (background color)
   o  Inverse screen (inverse of background color)

 An application can use an icon to represent a minimized standard window.  For
 example, an application that lists telephone numbers could use a telephone
 icon when minimized.  An application can also use icons as warning symbols in
 message boxes (for example, an exclamation mark or an upraised hand).

 An application can associate a pointer with the mouse or similar pointing
 device, so that the user can move the pointer around the screen, to select
 controls or text.  A pointer could also be used in an interactive graphics
 application to draw graphics on the screen. For example, a free-hand graphics
 drawing application could use a pencil shape to represent the pointer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1. Using the Icon Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To run the Icon Editor, select the Development Tools folder and then select
Icon Editor.

The Icon Editor display consists of three parts: the information panel, the
palette window, and the editing window.

The information panel at the top of the Icon Editor window displays the
following information:

   o  A picture of a two-button mouse, showing the colors currently selected
      for each button

   o  An actual-size image of the current figure that you are editing

   o  The status area, showing the following:

        -  Size (defined as 32 x 32 for icons and pointers; user-defined for
           bit maps)
        -  Pen location
        -  Pen size (from 1 x 1 to 9 x 9)
        -  Hotspot (for icons and pointers, but not bit maps)
        -  Figure type (icon, pointer, or bit map)
        -  Form name

 The palette window, in the lower right corner, displays the colors that are
 available for use during editing. The colors currently selected are marked
 with frames.

 The editing window is the largest part of your working area.  Use the mouse or
 keyboard to move the pointer, clicking or dragging the pointer to paint the
 enlarged representation of pels with the selected color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1.1. Creating a Figure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit menu includes the functions used to select an icon, pointer, or bit
map for editing, and to save it after you are through.

Selecting your icon, pointer, or bit map

   1. To create a new icon, pointer, or bit map, select New from the File menu.
      The New Figure pop-up window appears, prompting you for further
      information.

      Select the figure type:  Icon, Pointer, or Bit map. For a bit map you
      must specify the width and height in pels. Select Enter.

      You can also create new art by modifying or editing an existing art of
      the same type.

   2. To edit existing art, select Open from the File menu. You will be
      prompted for a name.

      Note:  Unless you have turned off Safe Prompting (which is described
      under Setting Preferences) on the Options menu, you will be prompted to
      save if you select Open or New while there is unsaved art on your screen.

   3. If you started Iconedit from a command prompt and specified multiple
      files, you can use the Next option on the File menu to select the next
      file.

      The Next option will be greyed out if you did not start from the command
      line and specify multiple files.

 Saving your icon, pointer, or bit map

 To save your art, select either of the following:

   o  Select Save to save it under its current file name. If this is new art,
      you will be prompted for a name.

   o  Select Save As to save the art under a different name. You will be
      prompted for a new name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1.2. Editing Art ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit your art, use the functions of the Edit menu.

Select Undo to restore the art to the way it was before the most recent editing
operation.

Four of the editing functions require that you first mark the area to be
edited, using Select or Select All.

If you choose Select, the cursor changes to a plus (+) inside a square. Hold
the left mouse button down to anchor one corner, and then drag the mouse.
Release the button to anchor the opposite corner of the rectangular area you
want to edit.

If you choose Select All, the entire figure is selected.

Selected Edit Menu Functions

The following functions all require that an area must first be selected:

   o  Select Fill to fill the selected area with the current palette color.
      For additional information, see Filling Areas With Color.

   o  Select Cut to cut an area you would like to move or delete.

   o  Select Copy to copy an area you would like to duplicate elsewhere in the
      same file or in another file.

   o  Select Paste to place an area you have marked with Cut or Copy.  Drag the
      outlined area that you have marked to the place you would like to paste
      it.

   o  Select Clear to erase all drawing within an area you have selected and
      leave transparent pels. If you have used Select All, this will clear your
      entire icon, pointer, or bit map.

   o  Select Stretch Paste to paste the clipboard contents into your art,
      stretching and positioning to fit.

   o  Select Flip Horizontal to flip the art on its horizontal axis, reversing
      bottom and top.

   o  Select Flip Vertical to flip the art on its vertical axis, reversing left
      and right.  You can create a symmetrical drawing by copying one side of
      the art to the other side, and then flipping one of them.

   o  Select Circle to inscribe a circle or ellipse within the selected area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1.3. Using Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The choices on the Options menu enable you to test your art and vary your
editing environment. To change an option, from the Options menu select:

 Test
      To test view the pointer or icon you are editing. The pointer or icon
      will be displayed, actual size, as the pointer until you toggle back by
      again selecting Test from the Options menu.

 Grid
      To superimpose a grid over the editing window. This can be useful when
      you want to draw a symmetrical figure. Each cell of the grid represents
      one pel in the figure.

 X background
      To make the transparent pels (where the background is visible) apparent
      when editing an icon or pointer.  All screen or inverse screen colors
      will be shown with an X.  This option does not apply to bit maps because
      they have no transparent pels.

 Draw Straight
      To temporarily restrict your drawing to drawing straight vertical and
      horizontal lines.  Even if you deviate from the horizontal row, a
      horizontal line is produced when the mouse pointer is dragged across the
      editing window.  Dragging the mouse up or down produces straight vertical
      lines.

 Changing Pen Shape
      See Changing Pen Shape and Size

 Changing Pen Size
      See Changing Pen Shape and Size

 Setting Preferences
      See Setting Preferences

 Defining a Hotspot
      See Defining a Hotspot


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1.3.1. Changing Pen Shape and Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the shape and size of the pen by using choices on the Options
menu.

Changing Pen Shape

Before you select Pen Shape, you must first select the shape using the Select
function on the Edit Menu. See Editing Art for information about Select. Then
select Set Pen Shape on the Options menu.

Changing Pen Size

Select Pen size on the Options menu to specify how many pels the pointer paints
at a time. You can select any of nine square pen sizes:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
Γöé 1x1       Γöé 4x4       Γöé 7x7       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé 2x2       Γöé 5x5       Γöé 8x8       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé 3x3       Γöé 6x6       Γöé 9x9       Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Shortcut: Select a pen size by pressing Ctrl and the size, such as Ctrl+6 for a
6 x6 pen size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1.3.2. Setting Preferences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change your preferences, select Preferences from the Options menu.  Then
select any of the following:

 Safe Prompting
      To be warned before destructive operations such as file overwrites.

 Suppress Warnings
      To suppress display of informational messages.

 Save State on Exit
      To save settings for your next session.

 Display Status Area
      To toggle on and off the picture of the mouse and art from the status
      area.

 Reset Options and Modes
      To deselect the following items:

      Select
      Hotspot
      Color Fill
      Find Color The palette will not be reset.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1.3.3. Defining a Hotspot ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Hotspot is the pel where mouse input for an icon or pointer is directed.
The default hotspot location is 16 x 16, the center of the icon or pointer.
Bit maps do not have hotspots.

Select Hotspot from the Options menu to designate this pel. The cursor changes
shape, and the screen coordinates of the current hotspot are displayed in the
information window. When you click on a new hotspot, the screen coordinates of
the new hotspot are displayed.

Select Hotspot again to return to editing.

When an application uses WinQueryPointerPos to query the screen position of a
pointer, the OS/2 operating system returns the coordinates of the pointer hot
spot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1.3.4. Selecting Colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Palette to select a new drawing color, using the left or right mouse
button.

The currently selected color for the right mouse button is framed on the
palette in red; the color for the left mouse button is framed in green. The
currently selected colors for both mouse buttons are also displayed at the left
side of the status area.

Changing Palettes or Palette Colors

To change palettes or palette colors, select the Palette menu.  On the Palette
menu, you can:

   o  Select New to create a new palette.  The default palette will appear for
      you to edit.

   o  Select Open to open an existing palette.

   o  Select Save to save your current palette. If it is a new palette, you
      will be prompted for a name.

   o  Select Save As to save the palette under a different name. You will be
      prompted for a new name.

   o  Select Edit Color to edit a color in your palette.

   o  Select Swap colors to swap the colors of the left and right mouse
      buttons.  A submenu will appear, asking whether you want to preserve
      these colors in your art.  Unless you choose Preserve Figure, the colors
      in your art will be changed accordingly.

   o  Select Set default palette to save the existing palette as your default
      palette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2. Editing Palette Colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the colors that appear on your palette. To edit palette colors,
follow these steps:

   1. Select the color to be edited with the mouse. A frame appears around it
      on the palette.

   2. Select Edit color from the Palette menu.

      Shortcuts:

        o  Double-click on the color to be edited.
        o  To select a color that you have already used in your art, use Find
           color on the Tools menu.

          The Edit color window will appear.

   3. You can change the way you define palette colors by checking Dynamic
      editing and Important and choosing between RGB and HSV terms.

        o  Dynamic editing, when checked, will make your art change dynamically
           as you edit individual colors, so that you can see how the changes
           will affect your art.

        o  Important, when checked, will require that the color be accurately
           rendered, without dithering (approximating the color).

        o  Every color can be described numerically in either RGB or HSV terms.

                RGB     As proportions of primary colors red, blue, and green

                HSV     In terms of hue, saturation, and value

              To toggle between RGB and HSV, select the appropriate radio
              button.

   4. Use the scroll bars to change RGB or HSV values, or change these numbers
      from the keyboard.

   5. Select OK to save the edited color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2.1. Filling Areas With Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are two different ways to fill an area with color:

   o  To fill an irregularly-shaped area with the current palette color, select
      Color fill from the Tools menu.

      After you click on a specific pel, all adjoining areas that are the same
      color as that pel will be colored with the selected color.

   o  To fill a previously-selected area with the current palette color, select
      Fill from the Edit menu. You must first select an area. See Editing Art
      for information about Select and Select All.

 Note:  To select a color that you have already used in your art, use Find
        color on the Tools menu. A question-mark-arrow cursor will appear.

 Click on a specific pel of that color, and that color is selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2.2. Creating Icons for Specific Displays ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Although the Icon Editor edits and saves a device-independent form of the icon,
the Device menu enables you to create versions of the icon for specific display
devices.  The Device menu displays a choice of three functions:  create a new
device form, select an existing form, and delete a form.

An independent form is automatically created when you create a new icon or
pointer and all other forms are derived from it.  If you select any of the
other device forms listed in the menu, a new form is created for the specified
device.  The Custom option enables you to create an icon or pointer for any
other device.

Select List to view a list of all existing forms, including custom and standard
forms.  Any item on this list can be selected and edited or deleted.  However,
you must have at least one device-independent form.  Select Add in the list
dialog to add a new device form.

Several icon bit maps can be saved in a single icon resource; when the icon is
saved, all versions are saved with it in a format that includes a device
resolution tag for each version.  When the icon is loaded from a resource file,
the display device resolution is matched against the device for which each
device-dependent icon was intended. If a match is found, that icon is used.  If
no match is found, the application uses the device-independent icon, which
always exists.

Figure files can contain any of the following forms to support multiple
devices:

   o  Independent
   o  CGA (2 colors)
   o  EGA (16 colors)
   o  VGA (16 colors)
   o  XGA/8514 (256 colors)
   o  XGA/8514 (16 colors)
   o  XGA/8514 Small Color Form (16 colors)
   o  XGA/8514 Small BW Form
   o  Custom

 Device-dependent icons are icons that are designed for a particular display
 resolution.

 An application can display icons or bit maps in dialog boxes or windows.

 The file name extension depends on the type of resource you are creating.  The
 Icon Editor produces a file with any of the following extensions:

      .ICO for icons
      .PTR for pointers
      .BMP for bit maps

 The .ICO, .PTR, or .BMP files must be referred to in the resource script file
 for your application.  The external files containing icons, pointers, and bit
 maps are all referenced in the resource script file by single-line statements
 that have a similar format.  For example:

  ICON    ID_MAINWND myprog.ico   /* Icon    */

  POINTER ID_PTR     mypoint.ptr  /* Pointer */

  BITMAP  ID_BMP     mybtmp.bmp   /* bit map  */

 ICON, POINTER, and BITMAP keywords identify the resource type.

 The resource type is followed by a symbolic name or integer identifier that is
 used by your application to identify the resource.  For example, with ICON,
 the ID_MAINWND identifier can be used by the application in the control data
 parameter of the WinCreateWindow call (or as a parameter to the
 WinCreateStdWindow call) that creates the frame of the main window of your
 application. The OS/2 operating system then associates the icon with the main
 window.

 The symbolic name or identifier can be followed by any loading and memory
 options. The options are not used in the example, as it lets the options
 default.

 The last part of the statement is the file name and file type of the resource
 created by the Icon Editor.  A fully qualified path name must be given if the
 file is not in the current directory.  An icon that it used for a minimized
 application main window should have the same file name as the executable file
 of the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.3. Using a Command Line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you start the Icon Editor from a command line, rather than from an icon, you
have an additional option available. You can load more than one file at a time
by specifying the files on the command line. For instance, the following
command would load the two specified icons, a bit map, and a pointer:

ICONEDIT Ruth.ico gurp.ico alex.bmp pamela.ptr

If you specify multiple files when you start the Icon Editor from the command
line, you can use the Next option on the File Menu to select the next file.
This option is available only if you specify multiple files from the command
line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Link for Object and Library Files (LINK386) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LINK386 is used to combine object files and standard library files into a
single file: an executable file, a dynamic-link library, or a device driver.
The output file from LINK386 is not constrained to specific memory addresses.
Thus, the operating system can load and execute this file at any convenient
address.

LINK386 Input

LINK386 uses the following files as input:

   o  One or more object files that are linked with any optional library files
      to form the executable file. Object files usually have a .OBJ extension.

      LINK386 accepts object files compiled or assembled for 8088, 80286,
      80386, 80486, or PENTIUM* microprocessors. Object files must be in the
      Object Module Format (OMF), which is based on the Intel* 8086 OMF, and
      Tool Interface Standards Portable Formats Specification.

   o  One or more library files.  The library files contain object modules that
      are linked to the object files to form the executable file. Library files
      usually have a .LIB extension.

      Library files are used to resolve external references in your object
      files.

   o  A module definition file.  The module definition file provides
      information to LINK386 about the executable file or dynamic link library
      file it is creating.  The module definition file usually has a .DEF
      extension.

 LINK386 Output

 LINK386 can produce dynamic-link libraries (.DLL) and device drivers (.SYS),
 in addition to executable files (.EXE). For additional information, see Output
 Files.

 LINK386 displays all of its output messages on the standard output device.

 LINK386 Features

 LINK386 creates the executable file and map file in the current directory
 unless you enter an explicit path.

 LINK386 looks in several locations for object, library, and module-definition
 files. See Where LINK386 Looks for Files.

 File names are not case sensitive; for example, abc.exe and ABC.EXE refer to
 the same file.

 If you enter a file name without an extension, LINK386 adds a Default Filename
 Extension that depends on the type of file expected.

 If you leave a field blank (but define the field with a comma), LINK386 uses a
 default for the field.  If you end the LINK386 command with a semicolon (;),
 LINK386 uses Filename Defaults for all remaining fields.

 If you do not give all file names or do not end the command line with a
 semicolon, LINK386 prompts you for the omitted files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1. Starting LINK386 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Some commands and applications call LINK386 for you, or you can run LINK386 by
typing LINK386 at the operating-system prompt. Supply input to LINK386 by any
of three methods:

   o  Enter the input directly on the command line.

   o  Respond to prompts generated by LINK386.

   o  Put your input in a response file, and enter the file name on the command
      line.

 You can press Ctrl+C at any time to interrupt LINK386 and return to the
 operating system.

 To display LINK386 help, type LINK386 /? at the prompt. A copyright statement
 appears along with a list of valid LINK386 options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.1. Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

      LINK386 [options] objfiles [,exefile, mapfile, libraries, deffile]

      OR

      LINK386 @responsefile

 SYNTAX DEFINITIONS

 The LINK386 command line includes the following fields:

 <options>
      Options modifying actions of LINK386. Options can appear anywhere on the
      command line except immediately after the commas used to separate fields.
      See Options and Using LINK386 Options.

 <Object Files>
      Object files to be linked. Separate multiple file names by plus (+) or
      space characters. At least one name must be entered. Library files can
      also be entered. See Entering Library Files as Object Files.

 <exefile>
      Output of file.  LINK386 produces either an executable file, a
      dynamic-link library, or a device driver.

 <mapfile>
      Map file created that lists modules in <exefile>. Use the /M option to
      include public symbols in this file. Enter NUL if you do not want a map
      file. See List Public Symbols (/M).

 <libraries>
      Standard or import (not dynamic-link) libraries to be used in resolving
      external references.  Separate multiple file names by plus (+) or space
      characters. Some libraries are searched by default. You can also specify
      a path to a directory -- LINK386 will search for libraries in a path
      specified on the <libraries> line before searching directories given by
      the LIB environment variable. See Linking with an Import Library, Default
      Libraries and Specifying Library Directories.

 <deffile>
      Module definition file.

 SYNTAX EXAMPLES

 The following command links the object files FUN.OBJ, TEXT.OBJ, TABLE.OBJ, and
 CARE.OBJ. LINK386 searches for unresolved external references in the library
 file XLIB.LIB and in the default libraries. By default, the executable file is
 named FUN.EXE. LINK386 also produces a map file, FUNLIST.MAP.

    LINK386 FUN+TEXT+TABLE+CARE, ,FUNLIST, XLIB.LIB;

 The following command produces a map file named FUN.MAP because a comma
 appears as a placeholder for <mapfile>.

    LINK386 FUN,,;

 The next pair of command lines do not produce a map file because commas do not
 appear as placeholders for <mapfile>.

  LINK386 FUN,;
  LINK386 FUN;

 The following command links the files MAIN.OBJ, GETDATA.OBJ, and PRINTIT.OBJ
 into an executable file named MAIN.EXE. A map file named MAIN.MAP is also
 produced.

    LINK386 MAIN+GETDATA+PRINTIT, , MAIN;

 The following command links GETDATA.OBJ and PRINTIT.OBJ into an OS/2
 dynamic-link library.  MODDEF.DEF must contain a LIBRARY statement to produce
 the dynamic-link library.

  LINK386 GETDATA+PRINTIT,GETDATA.DLL, , MODDEF


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.2. Object Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LINK386 accepts object files compiled or assembled for the 8088, 80286,
80386,80486 or PENTIUM microprocessor. LINK386 also accepts standard library
files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.3. Output Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LINK386 Can Produce Three Types of Output Files

   o  Executable (.EXE) files that run under OS/2 protected mode

      LINK386 produces an executable file whenever you specify a
      module-definition file containing a NAME Statement. The module definition
      file should not have a LIBRARY Statement, VIRTUAL DEVICE Statement, or
      PHYSICAL DEVICE Statement; otherwise, a dynamic-link library or device
      driver is produced, as described below.

   o  Dynamic-link library (.DLL) files

      A dynamic-link library is produced whenever you specify a
      module-definition file containing a LIBRARY statement.

   o  Device driver (.SYS) files

      A virtual or physical device driver is produced whenever you specify a
      module-definition file containing the VIRTUAL DEVICE or PHYSICAL DEVICE
      statements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.4. Prompts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LINK386 prompts you if any fields have not been entered on the Syntax or in a
response file. For each prompt, simply enter the same input that you would
enter on the command line and press Enter.

 Object Modules [.OBJ]:
      <objfiles>

 Run File [basename.EXE]:
      <exefile>

 List File [NUL.MAP]:
      <mapfile>

 Libraries [.LIB]:
      <libraries>

 Definitions File [NUL.DEF]:
      <deffile>

 Special Features

   o  To extend input to a new line, type a plus sign (+) as the last character
      on the current line. When the same prompt appears on a new line, you can
      continue. Do not, however, split a file name across lines.

   o  To select the default response to a prompt, press Enter. The next prompt
      appears.

   o  To select default responses to the current prompt and all remaining
      prompts, enter a semicolon (;). Note that at least one object file must
      be entered.

   o  You can specify options anywhere on any response line, except before a
      comma at the end of a line of characters. If you want to specify more
      than one option, either group them at the end of a response, or specify
      them at the end of several responses. Each option must begin with a slash
      (/).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.5. Response Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A response file is a text file used to provide input to LINK386. To use
response file input for LINK386, type

  LINK386 @responsefile

The @ symbol tells LINK386 that responsefile is the name of a response file. If
the file is not in the working directory, you must specify the path.

The field <responsefile> specifies the name of a file containing the same input
that would be entered on the command line or entered in response to LINK386
prompts.  In this file, each response should appear on a separate line or be
separated from other responses by a comma.

To operate LINK386 using a response file, you must first create a file that
contains the responses you want LINK386 to process. You can give the file any
name, and create it with any text editor.

Special Features:

   o  You can begin using a response file at any point on the LINK386 Syntax or
      at any LINK386 prompt. The response file should contain responses to all
      remaining fields or prompts.

   o  If the file does not contain responses for all the prompts, LINK386
      displays the appropriate prompt and waits for you to supply a response.
      End the response file with a semicolon.

   o  You can use special characters in the response file the same way you
      would use them in responses entered at the keyboard. For example, you can
      extend input to a new line by using the plus sign (+) and choose default
      responses for all remaining prompts by using a semicolon (;).

   o  LINK386 displays prompts and the entries from the response file on the
      screen. If the entry in the response file is not acceptable, LINK386
      pauses and waits for you to enter an acceptable response. The "Run in
      Batch Mode (/BAT)" disables the prompt.

   o  Options can appear anywhere in the response file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.5.1. Response File Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FUN TEXT TABLE CARE
/DEBUG /MAP
FUNLIST
GRAF.LIB

If the text file above were named FUN.LNK, the following command would use this
file as a response file:

LINK386 @FUN.LNK

This would cause LINK386 to do the following:

   o  Link the four object modules FUN, TEXT, TABLE, and CARE into an
      executable file named FUN.EXE

   o  Generate the map file FUNLIST.MAP

   o  Generate Debugging information

   o  Include public symbols and addresses in the map file

   o  Link any needed routines from the library file GRAF.LIB

 The response file in the following example instructs LINK386 to generate an
 executable file called FUN.EXE, and four object modules, FUN, SUN, RUN, and
 GAMES.

 If you specify the file name, FUNLIST, LINK386 will generate a map file named
 FUNLIST.MAP.  Adding the /MAP option will cause LINK386 to include the public
 symbols of the application in the map file.

  fun+sun+run+game /map
  fun.exe
  funlist
  ;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.6. Default Libraries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Most compilers embed the names of needed libraries (called default libraries)
in object files.  LINK386 searches these libraries. Because of this, you need
to explicitly enter library names only in the following cases:

   o  You want to use additional libraries.

   o  You are using a library not in the current directory and not in a
      directory specified by the LIB environment variable. See Where LINK386
      Looks for Files.

   o  You want to use a library other than the one specified in the object
      file.

 Explicitly entered libraries are always searched before default libraries.  If
 an external reference is resolved by more than one library, the order of
 libraries on the command line determines which library is used.

 To ignore default libraries use the Ignore Default Libraries (/NOD). But be
 careful - most compilers expect their object files to be linked with default
 libraries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.7. Entering Library Files as Object Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can enter library files in the <objfiles> field.  Be sure to include the
.LIB file name extension; otherwise, LINK386 assumes a .OBJ extension.

With libraries entered in the <objfiles> field, LINK386 adds every module in
the library to your output file.  With libraries entered in the <libraries>
field, LINK386 adds only those required to resolve external references.

The effect of entering a library this way is the same as if you had entered all
of the library's module names into the <objfiles>field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.7.1. Specifying Library Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LINK386 searches additional locations for libraries using the drive name or
path specification in the <libraries> field on the command line.

You can specify up to 32 additional paths.  If you give more than 32 paths,
LINK386 ignores the additional paths without displaying an error message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.7.2. Where LINK386 Looks for Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When searching for an object, library, or module definition file, LINK386 looks
in the following locations in this order:

   1. The directory specified for the file if a path specification is included.
      Default Libraries do not include path specifications.

   2. The current directory.

   3. Any directories entered on the command line.

   4. Any directories given by the LIB environment variable.

 If LINK386 cannot locate a file, it prompts you to enter the location. The
 "Run in Batch Mode (/BAT)" disables these prompts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.7.3. Library Search Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LINK386
Object Modules [.OBJ]: FUN TEXT TABLE CARE
Run File [FUN.EXE]:
List File [NUL.MAP]:
Libraries [.LIB]: C:\TESTLIB\ NEWLIBV3
Definitions File [NUL.DEF]:

This example links four object modules to create an executable file named
FUN.EXE.  LINK386 searches NEWLIBV3.LIB before searching the default libraries
to resolve references.

To locate NEWLIBV3.LIB and the default libraries, LINK386 searches the
following locations in this order:

   1. The current directory

   2. The C:\TESTLIB\ directory

   3. The locations given by the LIB environment variable


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.7.4. Filename Defaults ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you do not enter a file name, LINK386 assumes a default:

 <options>
      No options

 <objfiles>
      None (This field is required.)

 <exefile>
      The base name of the first file in <objfiles> with the .EXE extension
      added

 <mapfile>
      The base name in <exefile> with the .MAP extension added

 <libraries>
      No libraries

 <deffile>
      No module definition file


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.7.5. Default Filename Extension ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you do not enter an extension, LINK386 uses a default extension, depending
on the type of file.

 Object                   .OBJ
 Executable               .EXE
 Map                      .MAP
 Standard Library         .LIB
 Dynamic-Link Library     .DLL
 Module Definition        .DEF

 Overriding Default Extension

 Any time you explicitly enter an extension, it overrides the default
 extension.  To specify a file name without an extension, just enter a period
 (.) after the file name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following is a summary of LINK386 options:

 /?                                 Display Help
 /A[LIGNMENT]                       Align
 /BAS[E]                            Base
 /BAT[CH]                           Run in Batch Mode
 /C[ODEVIEW]                        Prepare for Debugging
 /DE[BUG]                           Prepare for Debugging
 /DO[SSEG]                          Order Segments
 /E[XEPACK]                         Exepack (You can add :1 or :2.)
 /EXEPACK                           Exepack
 /EXEPACK:1                         Exepack
 /E:2                               Exepack
 /E:1                               Exepack
 /EXE:2                             Exepack
 /EXEP                              Exepack
 /F[ARCALLTRANSLATION]              Optimize Far Calls
 /H[ELP]                            Display Help
 /I[NFORMATION]                     Display Process Information
 /L[INENUMBERS]                     Include Line Numbers
 /M[AP]                             List Public Symbols
 /NOD[EFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH]          Ignore Default Libraries
 /NOE[XTDICTIONARY]                 Ignore Extended Dictionary
 /NOF[ARCALLTRANSLATION]            Disable Far Optimization
 /NOI[GNORECASE]                    Preserve Case Sensitivity
 /NOL[OGO]                          Disable Sign-On Banner
 /NON[ULLSDOSSEG]                   Order Segments without NULLs
 /NOO[UTPUTONERROR]                 Does not produce <exefile> if an error
                                    occurs during linking.
 /NOS[ECTORALIGNCODE]               Disable Automatic Sector Alignment code.
 /NOP[ACKCODE]                      Disable Code-Segment Packing
 /PACKC[PACKCODE]                   Combine Contiguous Code
 /PACKD[ATA]                        Combine Contiguous Data
 /PAU[SE]                           Pause during Linking
 /PM[TYPE]                          Name Application Type
 /RU[NFROMVDM]                      Allow Execution From DOS Command Line
 /SE[GMENTS]                        Set Max Number of Segments
 /ST[ACK]                           Control Stack Size
 /W[ARNFIXUP]                       Warn Fixup

 Options Not Supported Under LINK386

      /O[VERLAYINTERRUPT]
      /CP[ARMAXALLOC]
      /PADC[ODE]
      /DS[ALLOCATE]
      /PADD[ATA]
      /Q[UICKLIB]
      /HI[GH]
      /T[INY]
      /INC[REMENTAL]
      /NOG[ROUPALIGN]

 Specifying LINK386 Options

 You can specify options anywhere on the response line, except before a comma
 at the end of a line of characters.  If you want to specify more than one
 option, either group them at the end of a response, or specify them at the end
 of several responses.  Each option must begin with a forward slash (/).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.1. Using LINK386 Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

   1. Options always begin with the slash character (/).

   2. Options are not case sensitive.  For example, /de and /DE are equivalent.

   3. You can specify options in either the short or long form.  The short form
      is the shortest sequence of characters that uniquely identifies the
      option.  The individual description of each option lists both forms with
      the optional part enclosed in brackets.  For example, /BAT[CH] indicates
      that either /BAT or /BATCH can be used.

   4. Some linker options take numeric arguments.  You can enter numbers in
      decimal, octal, or hexadecimal radix using standard C-language syntax.

   5. You can also specify options in the LINK386 environment variable.

   6. Although use of the minimum one-letter abbreviations is allowed, if a
      future release has an additional option starting with the same letter,
      the one-letter option will no longer be usable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.2. Recommendations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

It is recommended that the ALIGN:2, BASE, FARCALLTRANSLATION, RUNFROMVDM, and
EXEPACK:2 options be used when linking all executables.  This will compress
them in size and improve their performance.

If BASE is used with .EXE files, the /BASE:0x10000 option must be used.  Any
other value will produce a warning.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.3. Entering Numeric Arguments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Some LINK386 options and module statements take numeric arguments.  LINK386
uses C-language syntax allowing you to specify numbers in any of the following
forms:

   o  Any number not prefixed with 0 or 0x is a decimal number. For example,
      1234 is a decimal number.

   o  Any number prefixed with 0 (but not 0x) is an octal number. For example,
      01234 is an octal number.

   o  Any number prefixed with 0x is a hexadecimal number. For example, 0x1234
      is a hexadecimal number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.4. Environment Variable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the LINK386 environment variable to cause certain options to be
used each time you link.  LINK386 checks the environment variable for options
if the variable exists.

LINK386 expects to find options listed in the variable exactly as you would
type them on the command line.  It does not accept other kinds of arguments;
file names in the environment variable cause the following error message:

unrecognized option

Each time you link, you can specify other options in addition to the ones
specified in the LINK386 environment variable. If you type an option both on
the Syntax and in the environment variable, the effect is the same as if the
option were given once.

Note:  A command line option overrides the effect of any environment-variable
option that it conflicts with.  For example, the command line option /SE:512
cancels the effect of the environment-variable option /SE:256.

The only way to prevent an option in the environment variable from being used
is to reset the environment variable itself.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5. Environment Variable Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

<SET LINK386=/NOI /SE:256 /DEBUG
<LINK386 TEST;
<LINK386 /NOD /DEBUG PROG;

In the example above, the file TEST.OBJ is linked with the options /NOI,
/SE:256, and /DEBUG. The file PROG.OBJ is then linked with the option /NOD - in
addition to /NOI, /SE:256, and /DEBUG.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.1. Alignment (/A) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /A[LIGNMENT]:n

This option directs LINK386 to set the alignment factor in the executable file
to the number given, which must be a power of 2, from 2 to 32768. The default
alignment is 512 bytes. Trailing zeroes are truncated to reduce the amount of
data stored in a file.

Each page starts at a location that is a multiple of n bytes from the beginning
of the file.  For example, /A:16 would start pages at multiples of 16 bytes.

Link386 produces pages that are a maximum of 4096 bytes in length. Alignment
factors greater than 4096 will waste disk space.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.2. BASE (/BASE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: BASE:n

Where n is a value rounded up to the nearest multiple of 64K Indicates that
each object of the module has a preferred load address starting with object 1
at this address, object 2 at the next available multiple of 64K, and so on.
Internal relocation records are then applied using this addressing scheme.

If the module's objects can be loaded beginning at this preferred address, then
no load-time internal relocation records need be applied.

If the module's objects cannot be loaded beginning at this preferred address,
then the internal relocation records that have been retained in the file data
will be applied.

.EXE files may specify a base address, but it must be 64K.  If it isn't, a
warning will be issued and a base address of 64K will be used anyway. This
option provides the same support as the BASE module definition file statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.3. Run in Batch Mode (/BAT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /BAT[CH]

By default, LINK386 prompts you for a new path name whenever it cannot find an
object file or library it was directed to use.

This option disables such prompting.  Instead, LINK386 generates an error or
warning message, as appropriate, and leaves the external reference unresolved.
The /BAT option also disables the display of the sign-on banner and the display
of input from response files.

This option is primarily used when LINK386 is called from a batch file or
Description Files.

Note:  This option does not affect prompts for Command Line Input.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.4. Prepare for Debugging (/C) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /C[ODEVIEW]

This option works exactly like the Prepare for Debugging (/DE) option.

The /C option is used to prepare for debugging with any debugger. With this
option, LINK386 imbeds symbolic data and line number information in the
executable output file.

You can run this executable file outside Debug; the debugging information in
the file is ignored.  However, to reduce executable file size, use this option
only for debugging.  Then you can link a separate version without the /C option
after the program is debugged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.5. Prepare for Debugging (/DE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /DE[BUG]

The /DE option is used to prepare for debugging with any debugger.  With this
option, LINK386 embeds symbolic data and line number information in the
executable output file.

You can run this executable file outside Debug; the debugging information in
the file is ignored.  However, to reduce executable file size, use this option
only for debugging.  Then you can link a separate version without the /DE
option after the program is debugged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.6. Order Segments (/DO) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /DO[SSEG]

This option is automatically enabled by a special object module record in many
language libraries.  If you are linking to one of these libraries, you need not
specify this option.

The /DO option is also enabled by assembly modules that use the Macro Assembler
directive .DOSSEG.

This option forces segments to be ordered as follows (first to last):

   1. All code segments

   2. Far data segments

   3. Near data (DGROUP) segments, in the following order:

        a. Any segments of class BEGDATA (this class name is reserved)
        b. Any segments not of class BEGDATA, BSS, or STACK
        c. Segments of class BSS
        d. Segments of class STACK

 In addition, the /DO option causes LINK386 to do the following:

   o  Initialize two special variables:

            _edata = DGROUP : BSS
            _end = DGROUP : STACK

      The variables _edata and _end have special meanings for certain
      compilers; avoid using these names in your programs.  Assembly-language
      programs can refer to these variables, but should not change them.

   o  Insert 16 null bytes at the beginning of the _TEXT segment (if this
      segment is defined).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.7. Exepack (/E) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /E[XEPACK] or /E[EXEPACK]:1 or /E[XEPACK]:2.

EXEPACK causes pages of code and data in the file to be compressed. The OS/2
Application Loader will automatically decompress these pages when the program
is run.

/EXEPACK:1 will use the compression algorithm that is compatible with OS/2 2.0,
2.1, and 2.11.

/EXEPACK:2 will use a compression algorithm that is incompatible with OS/2 2.0,
2.1, and 2.11.

/EXEPACK:2 will produce smaller executables that typically load faster.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.8. Optimize Far Calls (/F) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /F[ARCALLTRANSLATION]

This option causes LINK386 to optimize far-call instructions made from one
segment to a target address in the same segment. LINK386 replaces calling
sequences such as CALL FAR function with the following:

PUSH     CS
CALL     NEAR function
NOP

The new calling sequence is significantly faster when running in protected
mode.  Also, a load-time relocation is eliminated, which decreases program file
size and speeds program loading.

In general, the greatest benefit occurs if you use the "Combine Contiguous
Code(/PACKC)" in addition to the /F option.

The /F option has no effect on programs that make only near calls.

Note:  There is a small risk involved with using the /F option. LINK386 may
mistakenly interpret a byte of immediate data in a code segment as a far call
if it has to have the far-call opcode (0x9A).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.9. Display Help (/H or /?) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /H[ELP]   OR    /?

These options display a list of valid LINK386 options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.10. Display Process Information (/I) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /I[NFORMATION]

This option causes LINK386 to display information about the linking process,
including the phase of linking and the names of the object files being linked.
Use this option to determine the locations of the object files being linked and
the order in which they are linked.

The output from this option is sent to standard output.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.11. Include Line Numbers (/L) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /L[INENUMBERS]

This option includes source file line numbers and associated addresses in the
map file.  In addition, you must give LINK386 an object file (or files) with
line number information.  You can use the /Zd option with most compilers to
include line numbers in the object file.  If you give LINK386 an object file
without line number information, the /L option has no effect. The option for
CSET/++ is /ti.

The /L option forces LINK386 to create a map file even if you did not
explicitly tell LINK386 to create a map file.  By default, the file is given
the same base name as the executable file, plus the extension .MAP.  You can
override the default name by explicitly specifying a map file name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.12. List Public Symbols (/M) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /M[AP][:full]

This option lists in the map file all public (global) symbols defined in the
object files.  With this option, the map file contains a list of all the
symbols sorted by name, and a list of all the symbols sorted by address.  If
you don't use this option, the map file contains only a list of segments.

With this option, LINK386 creates a map file by default. If you explicitly
enter a map file name of NUL, then no map file is created, and this option has
no effect.

The Map option can be specified as /M:full to produce a comprehensive map
showing the composition of each segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.13. Ignore Default Libraries (/NOD) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /NOD[EFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH][:filename]

This option tells LINK386 to ignore Default Libraries when resolving external
references.  If you specify an object file in <filename>, LINK386 ignores only
the default libraries in <filename>.

In general, high-level-language programs do not work correctly without standard
libraries.  Thus, if you use the /NOD option, you should explicitly specify the
name of a standard library in the <libraries> field of the command line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.14. Ignore Extended Dictionary (/NOE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /NOE[XTDICTIONARY]

This option prevents LINK386 from searching the extended dictionary, an
internal list of symbol locations included with libraries generated with the
old LIB utility's /NOE option.

Normally, LINK386 uses the extended dictionary to speed up library searches;
thus, using /NOE slows LINK386.  This option should be used when a library
symbol is redefined.  You need to use this option when LINK386 issues error
L2044.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.15. Disable Far Optimization (/NOF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /NOF[ARCALLTRANSLATION]

Far-call optimization is off by default.  If the LINK386 environment variable
or another command (such as ICC) has turned it on, you can use /NOF to turn it
off again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.16. Preserve Case Sensitivity (/NOI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /NOI[GNORECASE]

This option turns case sensitivity on; that is, LINK386 treats ABC, abc, and
Abc as unique names.  By default, case sensitivity is off.

This option can be used when you link programs written in case-sensitive
languages such as C.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.17. Disable Sign-On Banner (/NOL) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /NOL[OGO]

This option disables the sign-on banner displayed when LINK386 starts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.18. Order Segments without NULLs (/NON) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /NON[ULLSDOSSEG]

This option arranges segments in a special order.  The /NON option is
equivalent to the Order Segments (/DO) except that /NON does NOT insert 16 null
bytes at the beginning of the _TEXT segment (if this segment is defined).

The /NON option overrides the /DO option when both are used. Therefore, you can
use /NON to override the /DO comment record commonly found in standard
libraries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.19. No Output on Error (/NOO) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /NOO[UTPUTONERROR]

This option will keep Link386 from creating the executable if an error is
encountered.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.20. Disable Code-Segment Combining (/NOP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /NOP[ACKCODE]

This option turns code segment combining off. By default, code segment
combining is on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.21. Disable Sector Alignment of Code (/NOS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /NOS[ECTORALIGNCODE]

Link386 will align passes of code on sector (512 bytes) boundaries.  This helps
reduce the time to load the passes. The /NOSECTORALIGNCODE option is provided
to turn off this feature.  Pages of code would then be aligned based on the
/ALIGN value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.22. Combine Contiguous Code (/PACKC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /PACKC[ODE]:number

This option groups neighboring code segments.  Neighboring code segments are
assigned the same segment address, and offsets to each routine are adjusted
upward as required.  This option is on by default and is used only when you
wish to override an environment variable that has turned code combining off.
See Environment Variable and Disable Code-Segment Combining (/NOP)

The <number> field specifies the maximum size of a code segment grouped by
/PACKC.  If you do not use the /PACKC option or if you omit <number>, maximum
size defaults to 65530. LINK386 stops adding segments to a group as soon as it
cannot add another segment without exceeding <number>. At this point, LINK386
forms a new segment. See Entering Numeric Arguments.

Code combining generally produces slightly faster and more compact code.  Use
the Optimize Far Calls (/F) option to provide the maximum opportunity for
combining.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.23. Combining Contiguous Data (/PACKD) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /PACKD[ATA] [:number]

This option groups neighboring data segments.  It functions like the Combine
Contiguous Code (/PACKC) option, except that it combines data segments.

The <number> field specifies the maximum size of a data segment grouped by
/PACKD; if you omit <number>, the maximum size defaults to 65,536.  LINK386
stops adding segments to a group as soon as it cannot add another segment
without exceeding <number>.  At this point, LINK386 forms a new group. See
Entering Numeric Arguments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.24. Pause during Linking (/PAU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /PAU[SE]

This option makes LINK386 pause before writing the output file to disk.  The
pause allows you to swap disks.

With this option, LINK386 displays the following message before it creates the
output file:

About to generate .EXE file
Change diskette in drive letter and press Enter

LINK386 writes the output file when you press Enter.

Be sure not to remove a disk containing the map file. If the disk you need to
swap contains either of these files, press CTRL+C to terminate the LINK386
session, rearrange your files, and link again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.25. Name Application Type (/PM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /PM[TYPE]:type

This option specifies the type of application being generated. Using the /PM
option is equivalent to including a NAME statement in the module definition
file.

A keyword in <type> is equivalent to a keyword in a NAME statement as shown in
the following list:

 PM                  WINDOWAPI
 VIO                 WINDOWCOMPAT
 NOVIO               NOTWINDOWCOMPAT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.26. Execute from DOS Command Line (/RU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /RU[NFROMVDM]:

This option allows the program to be executed from a DOS command line, if
possible.

This option causes LINK386 to insert an alternate DOS stub into the program.
The DOS stub is executed if a protect mode program is executed from a DOS
command line. The default DOS stub simply prints an error message and returns
to the DOS command line. The alternate DOS stub will attempt to start the
program in protect mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.27. Set Maximum Number of Segments (/SE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /SE[GMENTS]:number

This option sets the number of logical segments a program can have. You can set
<number> to any value in the range 1 to 3,072. See Entering Numeric Arguments.

For each logical segment, LINK386 must allocate space to keep track of segment
information.  By using a relatively low segment limit as a default (128),
LINK386 is able to link faster and allocate less storage space.

When you set the segment limit higher than 128, LINK386 allocates more space
for segment information.  This option allows you to raise the segment limit for
programs with a large number of segments.

For programs with fewer than 128 segments, you can keep the storage
requirements of LINK386 at the lowest level possible by setting the segment
<number> field to reflect the actual number of segments in the program.  If the
number of segments allocated is too high for the amount of memory LINK386 has
available to it, you see the error message segment limit too high.

To specify a number of segments that fits in the amount of memory available,
set the segment lower and relink.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.28. Control Stack Size (/ST) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /ST[ACK] :number

This option controls the stack size (in bytes) of your program. You can specify
any positive value for <number>. See Entering Numeric Arguments.

If your program generates a stack-overflow message, you can increase the size
of the stack.  In contrast, if your program uses the stack very little, you may
save some space by decreasing the stack size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.5.29. Warning of Fix-ups (/W) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  /W[ARNFIXUP]

This option directs LINK386 to issue a warning for each segment-relative fix-up
of location-type offset when the segment is contained within a group, but not
at the beginning.  LINK386 includes the displacement of the segment from the
group in determining the final value of the fix-up.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.6. /INF and /M Output Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following is a sample of LINK386 output when Display Process Information
(/I) and List Public Symbols (/M) options are specified:

  **** PASS ONE ****
  TEST.OBJ(test.for)
  **** LIBRARY SEARCH ****
  LLIBFOR7.LIB(wr)
  LLIBFOR7.LIB(fmtout)
  LLIBFOR7.LIB(ldout)
  Γöé Γöé Γöé
  **** ASSIGN ADDRESSES ****
  1 segment "TEST_TEXT" length 122H bytes
  2 segment "_DATA" length 912H bytes
  3 segment "CONST" length 12H bytes
  Γöé Γöé Γöé
  **** PASS TWO ****
  TEST.OBJ(test.for)
  LLIBFOR7.LIB(wr)
  LLIBFOR7.LIB(fmtout)
  LLIBFOR7.LIB(ldout)
  Γöé Γöé Γöé
  **** WRITING EXECUTABLE ****


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.7. OS/2 Considerations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In most respects, linking a program for OS/2 is similar to linking a program
for DOS. The principal difference is that most programs created for DOS run as
stand-alone applications, whereas programs for OS/2 generally call one or more
dynamic-link libraries. See What Is a Dynamic-Link Library? and Advantages of
Dynamic Linking.

Import and Export Definitions

Each dynamic-link library (.DLL file) defines export definitions that tell OS/2
what functions the library has. Functions not exported can only be called from
within the library. Each export definition specifies a function name.

Conversely, each executable program (.EXE file) defines import definitions that
tell OS/2 which dynamic-link functions the program needs and where they can be
found. Otherwise, OS/2 would not know which dynamic-link libraries to load when
the program is run. Each import definition specifies a function name and the
.DLL file where the function resides.

Methods of OS/2 Linking

There are two methods of OS/2 Linking:

   o  Linking without an Import Library
   o  Linking with an Import Library

 Linking with an import library requires more steps but has certain advantages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.7.1. What Is a Dynamic-Link Library? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A dynamic-link library contains executable code for common functions, just as
an ordinary library does.  Yet code for functions in dynamic-link libraries is
not copied into the executable (.EXE) file.  Instead, the library itself is
loaded into memory at run time, along with the .EXE file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.7.2. Advantages of Dynamic Linking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Dynamic-link libraries serve much the same purpose that standard libraries do,
but they also have the following advantages:

   o  Applications link more quickly. With dynamic linking, the executable code
      for a dynamic-link function is not copied into the .EXE file of the
      application. Instead, only an import definition is copied.

   o  Applications require less disk space. With dynamic linking, several
      different program applications can access the same dynamic-link function
      stored in one place.  Without dynamic linking, the code for the function
      would be repeated in every .EXE file.

   o  Libraries and applications are independent. Dynamic-link libraries can be
      updated any number of times without relinking the applications that use
      them.  If you are a user of third-party libraries, this is particularly
      convenient.  You receive the updated .DLL file from the third-party
      developers, and you only need to copy the new library onto your disk.  At
      run time, your applications automatically call the updated library
      functions.

   o  Code and data segments can be shared. Code and data segments loaded from
      a dynamic-link library can be shared.  Without dynamic linking, such
      sharing is not possible because each file has its own copy of all the
      code and data it uses.  By sharing segments with dynamic linking, you can
      use memory more efficiently.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.7.3. Linking without an Import Library ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The figure below illustrates a simple case in which you create an application
that uses a single dynamic-link library (.DLL) file.


ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ    ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
Γöé .OBJ and Γöé  Γöé.DEF fileΓöé    Γöé.DEF fileΓöé  Γöé .OBJ and Γöé
Γöé.LIB filesΓöé  Γöé(LIBRARY)Γöé    Γöé(imports)Γöé  Γöé.LIB filesΓöé
Γöé          Γöé  Γöé(exports)Γöé    Γöé         Γöé  Γöé          Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
     Γöé             Γöé              Γöé             Γöé
     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ              ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
            Γöé                            Γöé

       (1) LINK386                  (2) LINK386

            Γöé                            Γöé
       ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ                ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
       Γöé.DLL fileΓöé                Γöé .EXE file   Γöé
       Γöé(library)Γöé                Γöé(application)Γöé
       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ                ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

As depicted above, linking occurs in two steps:

   1. Object files (and standard libraries if any) are linked with a module
      definition (.DEF) file to create a .DLL file. A .DEF file is used that
      defines all functions exported by the .DLL file.

   2. Object files (and standard libraries, if any) are linked with a .DEF file
      to create an application (.EXE) file. A different .DEF file is used for
      this step; it defines all dynamic-link functions imported (used) by the
      application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.7.4. Linking with an Import Library ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The figure below illustrates a simple case in which you create an application
that uses a single dynamic-link library (.DLL) file.


ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ   ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ       ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ   ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
Γöé .OBJ and Γöé   Γöé.DEF fileΓöé       Γöé.LIB fileΓöé   Γöé .OBJ and Γöé
Γöé.LIB filesΓöé   Γöé(LIBRARY)Γöé       Γöé(imports)Γöé   Γöé.LIB filesΓöé
Γöé          Γöé   Γöé(exports)Γöé       Γöé         Γöé   Γöé          Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
     Γöé            Γöé   Γöé             Γöé   Γöé           Γöé
     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ   Γöé                ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
            Γöé         ΓööΓöÇ(2) IMPLIBΓöÇΓöÿ         Γöé

      (1) LINK386                       (3) LINK386

            Γöé                                 Γöé
       ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ                     ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
       Γöé.DLL fileΓöé                     Γöé .EXE file   Γöé
       Γöé(library)Γöé                     Γöé(application)Γöé
       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ                     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

As depicted above, linking occurs in three steps:

   1. Object files (and dynamic-link libraries) are linked with a module
      definition (.DEF) file to create a .DLL file. A .DEF file is used that
      defines all functions exported by the .DLL file.

   2. The IMPLIB program is used to generate an import library (.LIB) file.
      IMPLIB takes as input the same module definition file used in the first
      step.  For each export definition in the .DEF file, IMPLIB generates a
      corresponding import definition.  (IMPLIB can also use the .DLL file
      generated in step 1 if you use the _export keyword in C declarations to
      export functions.)

   3. The .LIB file generated by IMPLIB is used as input to LINK386, which
      creates an application (.EXE) file.  This .LIB file provides LINK386 with
      information about imported dynamic-link functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.8. Module Definition Files Basics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

What Is a Module Definition File?

A module definition file describes the names, attributes, exports, imports, and
other characteristics of an application or library. You must use module
definition files to create most applications for OS/2. You must use module
definition files to create all OS/2 dynamic-link libraries and device drivers.

Module Statements

A module definition file contains one or more Module Statements These
statements:

   o  Define various attributes of the executable file
   o  Define attributes of code and data segments
   o  Identify functions that are imported or exported


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.8.1. Module Definition File Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following module definition file gives module definitions for a
dynamic-link library.  It includes one source level comment and five
statements.

  ; Sample module-definition file

  LIBRARY

  DESCRIPTION
   'Sample .DEF file for a dynamic-link library'

  CODE      PRELOAD

  STACKSIZE 1024

  EXPORTS
   Init    @1
   Begin   @2
   Finish  @3
   Load    @4
   Print   @5


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.8.2. Module Statement Rules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

   o  If you use a NAME, LIBRARY, VIRTUAL DEVICE, or PHYSICAL DEVICE statement,
      it must precede all other statements in the module definition file.

   o  You can include source level comments in the module definition file by
      beginning a line with a semicolon (;). Such lines are ignored.

   o  All module definition keywords (such as NAME, LIBRARY, and OLD) must be
      entered in uppercase letters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.9. Module Statements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LINK386 has the following module definition file statements:

 BASE                  Base
 CODE                  Gives default attributes for code segments
 DATA                  Gives default attributes for data segments
 DESCRIPTION           Describes the module
 EXETYPE               Identifies operating system
 EXPORTS               Defines exported functions
 IMPORTS               Defines imported functions
 HEAPSIZE              Specifies local heap size
 LIBRARY               Names dynamic-link library
 NAME                  Names application
 OLD                   Preserves import information
 PHYSICAL DEVICE       Names physical device driver
 PROTMODE              Specifies DOS protected mode
 SEGMENTS              Gives attributes for specific segments
 STACKSIZE             Specifies local stack size
 STUB                  Adds DOS executable file to module
 VIRTUAL DEVICE        Names virtual device driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.10. BASE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: BASE=n

Where n is a value rounded up to the nearest multiple of 64K Indicates that
each object of the module has a preferred load address starting with object 1
at this address, object 2 at the next available multiple of 64K, and so on.
Internal relocation records are then applied using this addressing scheme.

If the module's objects can be loaded beginning at this preferred address, then
no load-time internal relocation records need be applied.

If the module's objects cannot be loaded beginning at this preferred address,
then the internal relocation records that have been retained in the file data
will be applied.

EXE files may specify a base address, but it must be 64K.  If it isn't, a
warning will be issued and a base address of 64K will be used anyway.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.11. CODE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: CODE [attribute...]

This statement defines the default attributes for code segments within the
application or library. One or more attributes can appear following the CODE
statement:

 PRELOAD or LOADONCALL Sets when code segment is loaded

           Note:  OS/2 2.x ignores the preload attribute.

 EXECUTEONLY or EXECUTEREAD Sets read/execute status

 IOPL or NOIOPL Sets I/O privilege

 CONFORMING or NONCONFORMING Determines segment conformance

 Attribute Rules:

   o  Only one attribute from each pair appears. If you specify neither
      attribute from a pair, LINK386 supplies the default, listed second in
      each pair above.

   o  Attributes can appear in any order.

 Example

 The following example sets defaults for module code segments so they have I/O
 hardware privilege and are not loaded until accessed.

  CODE LOADONCALL IOPL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.11.1. Load Code Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine when a code segment is loaded:

 PRELOAD        The segment is loaded automatically when the program starts.

                Note:  OS/2 2.x ignores the preload attribute.

 LOADONCALL     The segment is not loaded until accessed (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.11.2. Read/Execute Code Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine whether a code segment can be read as well as
executed:

 EXECUTEONLY    The segment can only be executed.

 EXECUTEREAD    The segment can be both executed and read (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.11.3. I/O Privilege Code Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

I/O privilege code attributes determine whether a segment has I/O privilege
(that is, whether it can access the hardware directly):

 IOPL
      The code segment has I/O privilege.

 NOIOPL
      The code segment does not have I/O privilege (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.11.4. Conforming Code Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes specify whether a code segment is a conforming segment:

 CONFORMING     The segment is conforming.

 NONCONFORMING  The segment is nonconforming (default).

 The concept of a conforming segment has to do with privilege level (the range
 of instructions that the process can execute) and is relevant only when you
 are writing device drivers and system level code. A conforming segment can be
 called from either Ring 2 or Ring 3, and the segment executes at the privilege
 level of the caller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.12. DATA Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: DATA [attribute...]

This statement defines the default attributes for data segments within the
application or library. One or more attributes can appear following the DATA
statement:

 PRELOAD or LOADONCALL
      Sets when data segment is loaded

      Note:  OS/2 2.x ignores the preload attribute.

 READONLY or READWRITE
      Sets read/write access

 NONE, SINGLE, or MULTIPLE
      Sets sharing attributes

 IOPL or NOIOPL
      Sets I/O privilege

 SHARED or NONSHARED
      Determines whether segment is shared

 Attribute Rules

   o  Only one attribute out of each group appears; if you specify none of the
      attributes in a group, the last attribute listed above for that group is
      generally the default.  (The defaults for NONE/SINGLE/MULTIPLE and
      SHARED/NONSHARED vary depending on whether you are describing a
      dynamic-link library or application.)

   o  Attributes can appear in any order.

 Example

 The following example defines the application data segment so that it is
 loaded only when it is accessed and cannot be shared by more than one copy of
 the program.  By default, the data segment can be read and written, the
 automatic data segment is copied for each instance of the module, and the data
 segment has no I/O privilege.

  DATA LOADONCALL NONSHARED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.12.1. Load Data Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine when a data segment is loaded:

 PRELOAD        The segment is loaded automatically when the program starts.

                Note:  OS/2 2.x ignores the preload attribute.

 LOADONCALL     The segment is not loaded until accessed (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.12.2. Read/Write Data Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine the access rights to a data segment:

 READONLY       The segment can only be read.

 READWRITE      The segment can be both read and written to (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.12.3. Sharing Data Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine how the automatic data segment can be shared:

 NONE      No automatic data segment is created.

 SINGLE    A single automatic data segment is shared by all instances of the
           module.  In this case, the module is said to have solo data.  This
           keyword is the default for dynamic-link libraries.

 MULTIPLE  The automatic data segment is copied for each instance of the
           module.  In this case, the module is said to have instance data.
           This keyword is the default for applications.

 The automatic data segment is the physical segment represented by the group
 name DGROUP.  This segment group makes up the physical segment that contains
 the local stack and heap of the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.12.4. LINK386 -I/O Privilege Data Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine whether data segments have I/O privilege (that is,
whether they can access the hardware directly):

 IOPL      The data segments have I/O privilege.

 NOIOPL    The data segments do not have I/O privilege (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.12.5. Shareable Data Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine whether all instances of the program can share a
READWRITE data segment:

 SHARED         One copy of the data segment is loaded and shared among all
                processes accessing the module (default for dynamic-link
                libraries).

 NONSHARED      The segment cannot be shared, and must be loaded separately for
                each process (default for applications).

 Under OS/2, this field is ignored if READONLY is specified, since READONLY
 data segments are always shared.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.13. SEGMENTS Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

SEGMENTS
         segmentdefinitions

This statement defines the attributes of one or more segments in the
application or library on a segment-by-segment basis. The attributes specified
by this statement override defaults set in CODE and DATA statements.

The SEGMENTS keyword marks the beginning of the segment definitions. This
keyword can be followed by one or more segment definitions, each on a separate
line (limited by the number set by the LINK386 /SE option, or 128 if the option
is not used). See Set Maximum Number of Segments (/SE).

Segment-Definition Syntax

['] segmentname ['] [CLASS 'classname'][attribute...]

Each segment definition begins with <segmentname>, optionally enclosed in
single quotation marks ('). The quotation marks are required if <segmentname>
conflicts with a module definition keyword, such as CODE or DATA.

The CLASS keyword specifies the class of the segment.  Single quotation marks
(') are required for <classname>. If you do not use the CLASS argument, LINK386
assumes that the class is CODE.

One or more attributes can follow. The default attribute is listed last.

 PRELOAD or LOADONCALL
      Determines when segment is loaded

      Note:  OS/2 s.x ignores the preload attribute.

 READONLY or READWRITE
      Sets read/write access

 EXECUTEONLY or EXECUTEREAD
      Sets read/execute status

 IOPL or NOIOPL
      Sets I/O privilege

 CONFORMING or NONCONFORMING
      Determines conformance

 MIXED1632
      Specify Mixed 16 and 32-Bit Segments

 ALIAS
      Specify that segment is aliased

 SHARED or NONSHARED
      Specify that segment is shared

 Attribute Rules

   o  Only one attribute from each pair appears. If you specify neither
      attribute from a pair, LINK386 supplies the default (listed second in
      each pair above).

   o  Attributes can appear in any order.

 Example

  SEGMENTS
    cseg1 CLASS 'mycode' IOPL
    cseg2 EXECUTEONLY PRELOAD CONFORMING
    dseg CLASS 'data' LOADONCALL READONLY

 This example specifies segments named cseg1, cseg2, and dseg. The first
 segment is assigned class mycode and the second is assigned CODE by default.
 Each segment is given different attributes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.13.1. Load Segments Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine when a segment is loaded:

 PRELOAD        The segment is loaded automatically when the program starts.

                Note:  OS/2 2.x ignores the preload attribute.

 LOADONCALL     The segment is not loaded until accessed (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.13.2. Read/Write Segments Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine the access rights to a data segment:

 READONLY       The segment can only be read.

 READWRITE      The segment can be both read and written to (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.13.3. Read/Execute Segments Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine whether a code segment can be read as well as
executed:

 EXECUTEONLY    The segment can only be executed.

 EXECUTEREAD    The segment can be both executed and read (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.13.4. I/O Privilege Segments Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine whether a segment has I/O privilege (that is,
whether it can access the hardware directly):

 IOPL      The segment has I/O privilege.

 NOIOPL    The segment does not have I/O privilege (default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.13.5. Conforming Segments Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes specify whether a code segment is a conforming segment:

 CONFORMING     The segment is conforming.

 NONCONFORMING  The segment is nonconforming (default).

 The concept of a conforming segment has to do with privilege level (the range
 of instructions that the process can execute). Conforming attributes are
 relevant only when you are writing device driver and system-level code.  A
 conforming segment can be called from either Ring 2 or Ring 3, and the segment
 executes at the privilege level of the caller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.13.6. Specify Mixed 16 and 32-Bit Segments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sometimes it is necessary to mix 16-bit code with 32-bit code. When you must
create groups that allow such mixing, LINK386 requires that you declare the
segments in that group as MIXED1632.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.13.7. Specify that Segment is Aliased ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Segments flagged with the ALIAS keyword can be addressed using the 16-bit
segmented method (_far16), or the 32-bit linear method.  The loader must
prepare an additional segment selector for each segment designated with the
ALIAS keyword.  This new segment selector allows for 16-bit addressing.

Example:

SEGMENTS _CODE  ALIAS

The statement above specifies that the segment _CODE can be called using 16-bit
far calls and 32-bit near calls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.13.8. Specify that Segment is Shared ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These attributes determine if the segment can be shared by other processes.

 SHARED         One copy of the data segment is loaded and shared among all
                processes accessing the module (default for dynamic-link
                libraries).

 NONSHARED      The segment cannot be shared, and must be loaded separately for
                each process (default for applications).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.14. DESCRIPTION Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: DESCRIPTION 'text'

This statement inserts the specified text into the application or library. The
DESCRIPTION statement is useful for embedding source control or copyright
information into an application or library.

The <text> field is a one line string enclosed in single quotation marks.

Example

The following example inserts the text Template Program into the application or
library being defined.

DESCRIPTION 'Template Program'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.15. EXETYPE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: EXETYPE [OS2 | WINDOWS | UNKNOWN]

This statement specifies under which operating system the application (or
dynamic-link library) is to run. This statement is optional and provides an
additional degree of protection against the program being run in an incorrect
operating system.

The EXETYPE keyword can be followed by a descriptor of the operating system:

 OS2             OS/2 applications and dynamic-link libraries (default)
 WINDOWS         Windows** applications
 UNKNOWN         Other applications

 The effect of EXETYPE is to set bits in the header that identify
 operating-system type.  Operating-system loaders can check these bits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.16. EXPORTS Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

EXPORTS
      exportdefinitions

This statement defines the names and attributes of the functions exported to
other modules and of the functions that run with I/O privilege.

Note:  The term export refers to the process of making a function available to
other run-time modules.  By default, functions are hidden from other modules at
run time.

Normally, the EXPORTS statement is meaningful only for functions within
dynamic-link libraries and for functions that execute with I/O privilege.

The EXPORTS keyword marks the beginning of the export definitions. Each
definition is entered on a separate line.  You need to give an export
definition for each dynamic-link routine you want to make available to other
modules.

Export-Definition Syntax

entryname [=internalname] [@ord[RESIDENTNAME]] [pwords]

 <entryname>
      The function name as it is known to other modules.

 <internalname>
      The actual name of the export function as it appears within the module
      itself; by default, this name is the same as <entryname>.

 <ord>
      The function's ordinal position within the module definition table.  If
      this field is used, the function's entry point can be invoked by name or
      by ordinal.  Use of ordinal positions is faster and may save space.

 RESIDENTNAME
      Indicates that the function's name be kept resident in memory at all
      times. This keyword is applicable only if <ord> is used. If <ord> is not
      used, OS/2 automatically keeps the names of all exported functions
      resident in memory by default.

 <pwords>
      The total size of the function's parameters, as measured in words (bytes
      divided by two). This field is required only if the function executes
      with I/O privilege. When a function with I/O privilege is called, OS/2
      consults <pwords> to determine how many words to copy from the caller's
      stack to the I/O-privileged function's stack.

 Example

  EXPORTS
    SampleRead = read2bin @8
    StringIn = str1       @4 RESIDENTNAME
    CharTest  6

 This example defines three export functions:

   o  SampleRead
   o  StringIn
   o  CharTest

 The first two functions can be accessed either by their exported names or by
 an ordinal number. Note that in the module's own source code, these functions
 are actually defined as read2bin and str1, respectively. The last function
 runs with I/O privilege and therefore is given with the total size of the
 parameters - six words.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.17. IMPORTS Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

IMPORTS
  importdefinitions

This statement defines the names of the functions imported for the application
or library.

Note:  The term import refers to the process of declaring that a symbol is
defined in another run-time module (a dynamic-link library).

Typically, LINK386 uses an import library to resolve external references to
dynamic-link symbols. However, the IMPORTS statement provides an alternative
for resolving these references within a module.

The IMPORTS keyword marks the beginning of the import definitions. This keyword
is followed by one or more import definitions, each on a separate line. Each
import definition corresponds to a particular function.

Import-Definition Syntax

[internalname=]modulename.entry

 <internalname>
      The name that the importing module uses to call the function.  Thus,
      <internalname> appears in the source code of the importing module,
      although the function can have a different name in the module where it is
      defined.  By default, internalname is the same as <entry>.

 <modulename>
      The name of the application or library that contains the function.

 <entry>
      The function to be imported; can be a name or an ordinal value.  (Ordinal
      values are set in an EXPORTS statement.) If an ordinal value is given,
      then <internalname> is required.

 Note:  A given function has a name for each of three different contexts.  The
 function has a name used by the exporting module (where it is defined), a name
 used as an entry point between modules, and a name as it is used by the
 importing module (where it is called).  If neither module uses the optional
 <internalname> field, the function has the same name in all three contexts.
 If either of the modules uses the <internalname> field, the function may have
 more than one distinct name.

 Syntax:

  IMPORTS
    Sample.SampleRead
    SampleA.SampleWrite
    ReadChar = Read.1

 This example defines three functions to be imported:

   o  SampleRead
   o  SampleWrite
   o  A function that has been assigned an ordinal value of 1

 The functions are found in the modules Sample, SampleA, and Read,
 respectively. The function from the Read module is referred to as ReadChar in
 the importing module.  The original name of the function, as it is defined in
 the Read module, may or may not be known.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.18. HEAPSIZE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: HEAPSIZE bytes | MAXVAL

This statement defines the size of the application's local heap in bytes. This
value affects the size of the automatic data segment.

The field <bytes> contains any positive integer.  You can enter <bytes> in
decimal, octal, or hexadecimal radix. See Entering Numeric Arguments.

Instead of entering a number for <bytes>, you can enter the keyword MAXVAL.
This sets the heap size such that the default data segment DGROUP is exactly
64K.  MAXVAL is useful in bound applications in which you want to force a 64K
requirement for DGROUP.

Example

HEAPSIZE 4000

This example sets the local heap to 4,000 bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.19. LIBRARY Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: LIBRARY [libraryname][initialization]  [termination]

This statement identifies the executable file as a dynamic-link library and
optionally defines the name and library module initialization required.

If <libraryname> is given, it becomes the name of the library as it is known by
OS/2. This name can be any valid file name. If <libraryname> is not given, the
name of the executable file - with the extension removed - becomes the name of
the library.

If <initialization> is given, it defines the library initialization required
and can be one of the values below. If omitted, <initialization> defaults to
INITGLOBAL.

 INITGLOBAL
      The library initialization routine is called only when the library module
      is initially loaded into memory.

      Using this keyword without a termination flag implies TERMGLOBAL for DLLs
      with 32-bit entry points.

 INITINSTANCE
      The library initialization routine is called each time a new process
      gains access to the library.

      Using this keyword without a termination flag implies TERMINSTANCE for
      DLLs with 32-bit entry points.

 If <termination> is given, it defines the library termination required and can
 be one of the values below. If omitted, <initialization> defaults to
 TERMGLOBAL. The termination flag can only apply to DLLs with 32-bit entry
 points.

 TERMGLOBAL
      The library termination routine is called only when the library module is
      unloaded from memory.

      Using this keyword without an initialization flag implies INITGLOBAL.

 TERMINSTANCE
      The library termination routine is called each time a process
      relinquishes access to the library.

      Using this keyword without an initialization flag implies INITINSTANCE.

 If the LIBRARY statement is included in a module definition file, the NAME
 statement cannot appear. If no LIBRARY statement appears, the module
 definition file describes an application.

 The following example assigns the name calendar to the dynamic-link library
 and specifies that library initialization be performed each time a new process
 gains access.

    LIBRARY calendar INITINSTANCE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.20. NAME Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: NAME [appname][apptype]

This statement identifies the executable file as an application and optionally
defines the name and type.

If <appname> is given, it becomes the name of the application as it is known by
OS/2. This name can be any valid file name. If <appname> is not given, the name
of the executable file - with the extension removed - becomes the name of the
application.

If <apptype> is given, it defines the type of application:

 WINDOWAPI
      Presentation Manager* application. The application uses the API provided
      by the Presentation Manager and must be executed in the Presentation
      Manager environment.

 WINDOWCOMPAT
      Application compatible with Presentation Manager. The application can run
      inside the Presentation Manager, or it can run in a separate screen
      group. An application can be of this type if it uses the proper subset of
      OS/2 video, keyboard, and mouse functions supported in the Presentation
      Manager applications.

 NOTWINDOWCOMPAT
      Application that is not compatible with the Presentation Manager and must
      operate in a separate screen group from the Presentation Manager.

 If the NAME statement appears, the LIBRARY, VIRTUAL DEVICE and PHYSICAL DEVICE
 statements cannot appear. If none of these statements appear, the module
 definition file is assumed to describe an application.

 Example

 The following example assigns the name calendar to the application being
 defined.

  NAME calendar WINDOWCOMPAT

 This application is Presentation Manager-compatible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.21. OLD Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: OLD 'filename'

This statement directs LINK386 to search another dynamic-link module for export
ordinals.  Exported names in the current module that match exported names in
the OLD module are assigned ordinal values from that module unless one of the
following conditions is in effect:

   o  The name in the OLD module has no ordinal value assigned.

   o  An ordinal value is explicitly assigned in the current module.

 This statement is useful for preserving export ordinal values throughout
 successive versions of a dynamic-link module.  The OLD statement has no effect
 on application modules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.22. PHYSICAL DEVICE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: PHYSICAL DEVICE [drivername]

This statement identifies the executable file as a physical device driver.

If <drivername> is given, it becomes the name of the driver as it is known by
OS/2. This name can be any valid file name. If <drivername> is not given, the
name of the executable file - with the extension removed - becomes the name of
the driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.23. PROTMODE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: PROTMODE

This statement specifies that the module runs only in protected mode and not in
Windows or dual mode. This statement is always optional and permits a protected
mode only application to omit some information from the executable file header.

If this statement is not included in the module definition file, LINK386
assumes the application can be run in either real or protected mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.24. STACKSIZE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: STACKSIZE number

This statement performs the same function as the LINK386 /ST option; if both
are used, the STACKSIZE statement overrides the /ST option.  See Control Stack
Size (/ST).

The field <number> contains a positive integer.  You can specify <number> in
decimal, octal, or hexadecimal radix. See Entering Numeric Arguments.

Example

STACKSIZE 4096

This example allocates 4,096 bytes of local-stack space.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.25. STUB Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: STUB 'filename'

This statement adds a DOS executable file to the beginning of the application
or library being created. The stub is invoked whenever the module is executed
under DOS. Typically, the stub displays a message and terminates execution. By
default, LINK386 adds its own standard stub for this purpose.

The field <filename> specifies the DOS executable file to be added. LINK386
looks for <filename> in the current directory and in the directories specified
by the PATH environment variable.

Example

STUB 'STOPIT.EXE'

This example appends the DOS executable file STOPIT.EXE to the beginning of the
module. STOPIT.EXE is executed when the module is run under DOS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.26. VIRTUAL DEVICE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: VIRTUAL DEVICE [drivername]

This statement identifies the executable file as a virtual device driver.

If <drivername> is given, it becomes the name of the driver as it is known by
OS/2. This name can be any valid file name. If <drivername> is not given, the
name of the executable file - with the extension removed - becomes the name of
the driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Make Message File (MKMSGF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MKMSGF program reads the input message file that you specify and creates an
output message file that DosGetMessage uses to display messages.

There are two ways that the output message file can be used:

   o  Selected messages can be bound to the message segment of an executable
      file using the MSGBIND program.

   o  Messages can be accessed directly from the output message file.

 See How Message Retrieval Works for additional information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.1. Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MKMSGF infile outfile [options]

   OR

MKMSGF @controlfile

The infile field specifies the input file that contains message definitions.
The input-file name can be any valid OS/2 file name, optionally preceded by a
drive letter and a path.

The outfile field specifies the output file created by MKMSGF. The output-file
name can be any valid OS/2 file name, optionally preceded by a drive letter and
a path.

To differentiate between the two files, the following convention is
recommended, using the same file name.

   o  The infile file should have a .TXT extension.
   o  The outfile file should have a .MSG extension.

 Note:  The output file cannot have the same file name and extension as the
        input file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.1.1. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are two ways to display MKMSGF help.

Short Syntax Help

To display a short version of MKMSGF syntax help, type MKMSGF at the prompt,
with no parameters. The following will be displayed:

MKMSGF infile[.ext] outfile[.ext] [/V]
[/D <DBCS range or country>] [/P <code page>]
[/L <language id,sub id>]

Long Help

To display a longer version of MKMSGF help, including defaults, country codes,
and language IDs, type MKMSGF /? at the prompt. The following will be
displayed:

Use MKMSGF as follows:

MKMSGF <inputfile> <outputfile> [/V]
        [/D <DBCS range or country>]
        [/P <code page>]
        [/L <language family id,sub id>]

where the default values are:
   code page  -  none
   DBCS range -  none
A valid DBCS range is: n10,n11,n20,n21,...,nn0,nn1
A single number is taken as a DBCS country code.

The valid OS/2 language/sublanguage ID values are:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéCode  ΓöéFamily  ΓöéSub  ΓöéLanguage               ΓöéPrincipal country Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ARA  Γöé   1    Γöé  2  ΓöéArabic                 ΓöéArab Countries    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé BGR  Γöé   2    Γöé  1  ΓöéBulgarian              ΓöéBulgaria          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé CAT  Γöé   3    Γöé  1  ΓöéCatalan                ΓöéSpain             Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé CHT  Γöé   4    Γöé  1  ΓöéTraditional Chinese    ΓöéR.O.C.            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé CHS  Γöé   4    Γöé  2  ΓöéSimplified Chinese     ΓöéP.R.C.            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé CSY  Γöé   5    Γöé  1  ΓöéCzech                  ΓöéCzechoslovakia    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé DAN  Γöé   6    Γöé  1  ΓöéDanish                 ΓöéDenmark           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé DEU  Γöé   7    Γöé  1  ΓöéGerman                 ΓöéGermany           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé DES  Γöé   7    Γöé  2  ΓöéSwiss German           ΓöéSwitzerland       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé EEL  Γöé   8    Γöé  1  ΓöéGreek                  ΓöéGreece            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ENU  Γöé   9    Γöé  1  ΓöéUS English             ΓöéUnited States     Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ENG  Γöé   9    Γöé  2  ΓöéUK English             ΓöéUnited Kingdom    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ESP  Γöé  10    Γöé  1  ΓöéCastilian Spanish      ΓöéSpain             Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ESM  Γöé  10    Γöé  2  ΓöéMexican Spanish        ΓöéMexico            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé FIN  Γöé  11    Γöé  1  ΓöéFinnish                ΓöéFinland           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé FRA  Γöé  12    Γöé  1  ΓöéFrench                 ΓöéFrance            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé FRB  Γöé  12    Γöé  2  ΓöéBelgian French         ΓöéBelgium           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé FRC  Γöé  12    Γöé  3  ΓöéCanadian French        ΓöéCanada            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé FRS  Γöé  12    Γöé  4  ΓöéSwiss French           ΓöéSwitzerland       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé HEB  Γöé  13    Γöé  1  ΓöéHebrew                 ΓöéIsrael            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé HUN  Γöé  14    Γöé  1  ΓöéHungarian              ΓöéHungary           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ISL  Γöé  15    Γöé  1  ΓöéIcelandic              ΓöéIceland           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ITA  Γöé  16    Γöé  1  ΓöéItalian                ΓöéItaly             Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ITS  Γöé  16    Γöé  2  ΓöéSwiss Italian          ΓöéSwitzerland       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé JPN  Γöé  17    Γöé  1  ΓöéJapanese               ΓöéJapan             Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé KOR  Γöé  18    Γöé  1  ΓöéKorean                 ΓöéKorea             Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé NLD  Γöé  19    Γöé  1  ΓöéDutch                  ΓöéNetherlands       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé NLB  Γöé  19    Γöé  2  ΓöéBelgian Dutch          ΓöéBelgium           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé NOR  Γöé  20    Γöé  1  ΓöéNorwegian - Bokmal     ΓöéNorway            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé NON  Γöé  20    Γöé  2  ΓöéNorwegian - Nynorsk    ΓöéNorway            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé PLK  Γöé  21    Γöé  1  ΓöéPolish                 ΓöéPoland            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé PTB  Γöé  22    Γöé  1  ΓöéBrazilian Portuguese   ΓöéBrazil            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé PTG  Γöé  22    Γöé  2  ΓöéPortuguese             ΓöéPortugal          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé RMS  Γöé  23    Γöé  1  ΓöéRhaeto-Romanic         ΓöéSwitzerland       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ROM  Γöé  24    Γöé  1  ΓöéRomanian               ΓöéRomania           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé RUS  Γöé  25    Γöé  1  ΓöéRussian                ΓöéU.S.S.R.          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé SHL  Γöé  26    Γöé  1  ΓöéCroato-Serbian (Lat    ΓöéYugoslavia        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé SHC  Γöé  26    Γöé  2  ΓöéSerbo-Croatian (Cyr    ΓöéYugoslavia        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé SKY  Γöé  27    Γöé  1  ΓöéSlovakian              ΓöéCzechoslovakia    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé SQI  Γöé  28    Γöé  1  ΓöéAlbanian               ΓöéAlbania           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé SVE  Γöé  29    Γöé  1  ΓöéSwedish                ΓöéSweden            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé THA  Γöé  30    Γöé  1  ΓöéThai                   ΓöéThailand          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé TRK  Γöé  31    Γöé  1  ΓöéTurkish                ΓöéTurkey            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé URD  Γöé  32    Γöé  1  ΓöéUrdu                   ΓöéPakistan          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé BAH  Γöé  33    Γöé  1  ΓöéBahasa                 ΓöéIndonesia         Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.1.2. Input Message File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The input message file is a standard ASCII file that contains three types of
lines:

   o  Comment lines
   o  Component identifier line
   o  Component message lines

 Comment Lines

 Comment lines are allowed anywhere in the input message file, except between
 the component identifier and the first message. Comment lines must begin with
 a semicolon (;) in the first column.

 In the Input Message File Example, the comment lines are

  ; This is a sample of an input
  ; message file for component DOS
  ; starting with three comment lines.

 Component Identifier Line

 The component-identifier line contains a three-character name identifier that
 precedes all MKMSGF message numbers.

 In the example, the component identifier is DOS.

 Component-Message Lines

 Each component-message line consists of a message header and an ASCII text
 message.

 The message header is comprised of the following parts:

   o  A three-character component identifier
   o  A four-digit message number
   o  A single character specifying message type (E, H, I, P, W, ?)
   o  A colon (:)
   o  Followed by a blank space.

 The following message types are used:

 Type   Meaning
 E      Error
 H      Help
 I      Information
 P      Prompt
 W      Warning
 ?      no message assigned to this number

 The message header must begin in the first column of the line. Only one header
 can precede the text of a message, although a message can span multiple lines.

 Message numbers can start at any number, but messages must be numbered
 sequentially.  If you do not use a message number, you must insert an empty
 entry in its place in the text file. An empty entry consists of the message
 number, with ? as the message type, and no text.

 The character % has a special meaning when used within the text of a message:

 %0 is placed at the end of a prompt (type P) to prevent DosGetMessage from
 executing a carriage return and line feed.  This allows the user to be
 prompted for input on the same line as the message text.

 %1 - %9 are used to identify variable string insertion within the text of a
 message.  These variables correspond to the Itable and IvCount parameters in
 the DosGetMessage call.

 Component-Message Example

 For example, DOS0100E: is DOS error message 100. For additional examples, see
 the Input Message File Example.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.1.3. Output File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The output file contains the indexed message file that DosGetMessage will use.
The output-file name can be any valid OS/2 file name, optionally preceded by a
drive letter and a path.  The output file cannot have the same name as the
input file.

To differentiate between the two files, the following convention is
recommended, using the same file name.

   o  The infile file should have a .TXT extension.
   o  The outfile file should have a .MSG extension.

 Help-message file names begin with the component identifier, followed by
 H.MSG. For example, the help file associated with the component identifier DOS
 would be DOSH.MSG.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.2. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Text-based messages in different code pages can be created using MKMSGF to
display errors, help information, prompt, or provide general information to the
application user.

MKMSGF uses the following parameter formats to build message files:

      MKMSGF infile outfile /Pcodepage

      MKMSGF infile outfile /Ddbcsrange or country id

      MKMSGF infile outfile /LlangID,VerId

      MKMSGF infile outfile /V

      MKMSGF infile outfile /?

      MKMSGF @controlfile

   o  Infile is the ASCII-text source file.

      Example:

            MSG
            MSG0001I: (mm%4dd%4yy) %2%4%1%4%3
            MSG0002I: (dd%4mm%4yy) %1%4%2%4%3
            MSG0003I: Current date is: %0

      %0 is a special argument that displays a prompt for user input.

      %1 - %9 are the arguments the user can use to insert text in a message.

   o  Outfile is the binary output message file.

   o  @controlfile is the message definition file.

 Options

 /P        Code-page ID for the input message file. See /P Option

 /D        DbcsRange or country ID for the input message file. See /D Option

 /L        Language family ID (one word) and language version ID (one word).
           See /L Option

 /V        Verbose display of message file control variables as the message
           file is being created. See /Verbose Option Output Example

 /?        Help display of command syntax for MKMSGF.

 Note:  Any combination of /P, /D, /L, and /V switches can be used for either
        the command line or @controlfile execution method.

 The / switch prefix and the - prefix can be used interchangeably when defining
 switches to MKMSGF.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.2.1. /Verbose Option Output Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Following is a sample of MKMSGF output, using the Verbose option (/V). This
output was produced using the following command:

mkmsgf myapp.txt myapp.msg /v

  strIn     = myapp.txt
  strOut    = myapp.msg
  StrIncDir = (null)
  CodePages = 437
  Language family id = 0 and sub id = 0
  Language family id and sub id = unspecified
  flags     = none
  CP_type   = SBCS
"myapp.txt": length = 382 bytes.
29 messages scanned.  Writing output file...
Size of table entry: word


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.2.2. /P Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Code-page option (/P) specifies the code-page ID for that input message
file.

Up to 16 /P combinations can be saved with the message file.

/P cannot be used to identify DBCS data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.2.3. /D Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DBCS option (/D) specifies the DBCS Range or country ID for that input
message file.

Valid DBCS country ID will cause the initialization of valid DBCS ranges to be
set up for this file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.2.4. /L Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Language option (/L) specifies the language family ID (one word) and
language version ID (one word).

Valid combination of language family and language version will be set for this
file.

A valid language family with invalid or undefined language version id will
cause a default value of 1 to be set for language version.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3. Control Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The control file (@controlfile) is used to create multiple-code-page message
files. The at sign (@) is not part of the file name, but rather, a delimiter
required before a control-file name.

The control file has the following format:

Example:

root.in root.out /Pcodepage /Ddbcsrang/ctryid /LlangID,VerId
sub.001 sub1.out /Pcodepage /Ddbcsrang/ctryid /LlangID,VerId
                 .
                 .
sub.00n subn.out /Pcodepage /Ddbcsrang/ctryid /LlangID,VerId

The help option (/?) is invalid due to the purpose of the definition file.

Note:  Any combination of /P /D /L and /V switches can be used for either the
       command line or msg_definition_file execution method.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3.1. Input Message File Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Following is an example of an input message file:

; This is a sample of an input
; message file for component MAB
; starting with three comment lines.
MAB
MAB0100E: File not found
MAB0101?:
MAB0102H: Usage: del [drive:][path] filename
MAB0103?:
MAB0104I: %1 files copied
MAB0105W: Warning! All data will be destroyed!
MAB0106?:
MAB0107?:
MAB0108P: Do you wish to apply these patches (Y or N)? %0
MAB0109E: Divide overflow


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. MAP File to SYM File Creator (MAPSYM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MAPSYM program creates .SYM files from .MAP files.  .SYM files are used by
the kernel debugger for symbolic debugging.

Note:  You must run MAPSYM from the directory in which the file to be converted
is located.

To create a .SYM file, follow these steps:

   1. Make sure you are in the correct directory.

   2. At the prompt type the following:

            mapsym filename

      Note that the .MAP extension is not required.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.1. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display MAPSYM help, type MAPSYM at the prompt, with no arguments. The
appropriate copyright statement appears, along with the following:

usage: mapsym [-aln] mapfile


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following options may be used with MAPSYM:

 /A   Omits Alphabetical sorting of symbols.

 /N   Includes source code line Numbers in *.SYM file.

 /L   Produces verbose Listing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. View and Set Program Type For Executable File (MARKEXE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MARKEXE program enables you to view and set the program type for an
executable file. The program type identifies the OS/2 sessions in which a
program can run.

Use MARKEXE with the OS/2 Linear Executable Linker (LINK386) or the OS/2
Segmented Executable Linker (LINK) to change or set the program type of
programs you have created.

You can set DLL initialization and termination and also enable long file name
support. When using LINK386, you can set DLL initialization and termination;
long file name support is already set. When using LINK, you can set DLL
initialization and long file name support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.1. Command-Line Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MARKEXE uses the following syntax:

MARKEXE [/?] [FORCE] [NO] [options] filename...

Filename is a file name or a list of file names. Global file-name characters
(*.EXE) also can be used. For descriptions of the above terms, see Syntax
Definitions. If no option is given, DISPLAY is assumed.

Typing MARKEXE /? at the command line displays the appropriate copyright
statement along with a list of options.

  DISPLAY         - display status of flags
  DLLINIT         - per-process initialization
  DLLTERM         - per-process termination
  WINDOWAPI       - window api (PM application)
  WINDOWCOMPAT    - window compatible application
  NOTWINDOWCOMPAT - not window compatible application
  UNSPECIFIED     - unspecified application type
  LFNS            - long file name support


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.1.1. Syntax Definitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MARKEXE has the following keywords, options, and program types. You can also
specify any number of files to be viewed or marked.

KEYWORDS

 FORCE               Marks the executable file with OS/2 as the target
                     operating system even though the file was marked for
                     another operating system. Using FORCE might produce
                     internally inconsistent executable files.

 NO                  Sets the command to the opposite condition. This keyword
                     does not apply to the DISPLAY, UNSPECIFIED, or WINDOWAPI
                     options.

 OPTIONS

 DISPLAY             Displays the application type in a message; does not make
                     any changes.

 DLLINIT             Sets per process initialization for the dynamic link
                     library. (Use with LINK386 only.)

 DLLTERM             Sets per process termination for the dynamic link library.
                     (Use with LINK only.)

 LFNS                Enables support of long file names.  (Use with LINK only.)

 PROGRAM TYPES

 MARKEXE does not modify the file if the executable file's program type is the
 same as the requested type.  It displays a message instead.

 WINDOWAPI           The application is a Presentation Manager application and
                     can run in the Presentation Manager session only.

 WINDOWCOMPAT        The application can run in a Presentation Manager window
                     or in an full-screen session.

 NOTWINDOWCOMPAT     The application must run in an OS/2 full-screen session.

 UNSPECIFIED         The application type is not known. By default, the OS/2
                     operating system will force the program to run in a
                     full-screen session.

 Note:  Specifying an incorrect program type might cause undesirable results
        when you try to run that program. For example, do not change a
        WINDOWCOMPAT program to WINDOWAPI.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.1.2. Viewing Program Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the program type of an executable file without changing the file,
specify only a file name, omitting an option.

   MARKEXE filename.exe

Example

To view the program type of MYPROG.EXE, type the following:

   MARKEXE myprog.exe

MARKEXE displays the type in a message that looks like this:

   myprog.exe: OS/2 1.x, WINDOWCOMPAT, LFNS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.1.3. Setting Program Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the program type of an executable file, specify one of the program
types. More than one executable file can be set to the same program type on a
single command line.

   MARKEXE type filename.exe another.exe

Examples

To set WINDOWCOMPAT as the program type of MYPROG.EXE, type:

   MARKEXE WINDOWCOMPAT myprog.exe

To set WINDOWAPI as the program type of several executable files, type:

   MARKEXE WINDOWAPI marion.exe alex.exe


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Message Segment Binder (MSGBIND) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MSGBIND program binds a message segment to an executable program. It does
this by reading an input file that specifies the executable files to modify.
For each executable file, MSGBIND specifies which message files to scan, and
for each message file, it specifies which messages to include in the executable
file. Although the resulting executable file will be larger, access to messages
will be faster.

In the OS/2 operating system, message segment/objects are packed with other
application code. If the size of the code segment/object and the bound messages
exceeds 64KB, the following statement in the program definition file (.DEF)
isolates the application code from the message statement/object:

 16 Bit Applications
      SEGMENT

 32 Bit Applications
      SEGMENT '_MSGSEG32' CLASS 'CODE'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1. Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MSGBIND command line has the following form:

MSGBIND infile

The infile field specifies the input file that identifies the executable files,
output message files, and message numbers that will be bound.  The input-file
name can be any valid OS/2 file name and can include an optional file name
extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1.1. Input File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The input file contains the following three types of lines:

   o  > Executable file

   o  < Message file

   o  Message numbers.

 Executable file

 The File in which messages are to be bound is preceded by a greater-than
 symbol (>). The name of the file can be any valid OS/2 file name.

 Two or more different executable files can be modified by the specifications
 found in one input file. MSGBIND continues to use this file until it
 encounters another greater-than symbol.

 Message file

 The message file to be read from is preceded by a less-than sign (<). You
 create this file by using the MKMSGF program. The name can be any valid OS/2
 file name. All message numbers that follow it are located in the specified
 message file and are copied to the current output executable file. MSGBIND
 reads the message-number list until it encounters one of the following: the
 end of the input file, a new output specification, or a new input message
 file.

 Message Numbers

 The messages in the message file are listed below the message-file name.  Only
 those message numbers that you specify will be added. You can also specify an
 asterisk (*) to indicate that all messages within the message file will be
 added. Message numbers must consist of a three-letter component identifier
 followed by a four-digit message number.

 See Input Message File for a more detailed description of message numbers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1.2. Multiple Code-Page Message Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Multiple code-page message files can also be bound to an executable file, which
enables a user to bind to an application messages for different countries.

The following example shows how three messages in two different languages can
be bound to an executable file:

MSGBIND infile

where infile consists of the following:

 >PROG1.EXE
 <TEXTUS.MSG
 MSG0001
 MSG0002
 MSG0003
 <TEXTIT.MSG
 MSG0001
 MSG0002
 MSG0003

where:

   o  PROG1.EXE is the executable file to be modified.

   o  TEXTUS.MSG is the file, created using MKMSGF, which contains messages in
      US English.

   o  TEXTIT.MSG is the file, created using MKMSGF, which contains the same
      messages translated into Italian.

   o  MSGnnnn defines the messages to be bound to the application:

           MSG       Message component ID
           0001      Message number


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1.3. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display MSGBIND help, type MSGBIND at the prompt, with no parameters. The
following will be displayed:

usage: MSGBIND scriptfile


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.2. How Message Retrieval Works ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When an application requests the message retriever for text associated with a
message number, a test is made to determine if there is a bound message segment
with this executable file.  If true, each bound message segment is searched for
a match with the current session's code-page number.

If a match is made, then the message number is searched for.  If it is found,
the message will be returned to the caller. Otherwise, the search of remaining
bound message segments will continue.

If no match results from a search of all message segments, the message file on
the disk is searched. DosGetMessage will access the message file under any of
the following conditions:

   o  The message file is in the current directory.
   o  The message file is in the path specified in the DPATH environment
      variable (protect mode).
   o  The message file is in the path specified in the APPEND environment
      variable (real mode).
   o  The fully-qualified file name is specified in DosGetMessage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.2.1. Sample Input File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

>c:\cmd.exe
<c:\os20\dosutil.msg
DOS0100
DOS0123
DOS0245
>c:\format.exe
<c:\os20\dosutil.msg
DOS0001
DOS0006
<c:\format.msg
FMT0001
FMT0002
<c:\myown.msg
*

The first line of a MSGBIND input file specifies that the executable file to
modify is CMD.EXE.  The messages DOS0100, DOS0123, and DOS0245 are read from
the file DOSUTIL.MSG and added to the CMD.EXE file.  The MSGBIND program then
encounters an executable-file option for the FORMAT.EXE file.  The messages
DOS0001 and DOS0006 are read from DOSUTIL.MSG and added to FORMAT.EXE.  Next,
the messages FMT0001 and FMT0002 are read from the file FORMAT.MSG and added to
FORMAT.EXE.  Finally, because an asterisk is specified, all the messages are
read from the file MYOWN.MSG and added to FORMAT.EXE.

The files DOSUTIL.MSG and FORMAT.MSG in this example are two
output-message-file names from the MKMSGF program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Object Utility Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Utility/2 provides a facility for registering Workplace Shell classes,
creating instances of Workplace Shell classes, and modifying instances of
Workplace Shell classes.

The following attributes can be set or modified for instances of Workplace
Shell objects:

   o  Template

   o  Copy

   o  Delete

   o  Rename

   o  Print

   o  Link

   o  Move

   o  Drag

 The attributes modify the behavior of the objects to allow or not allow the
 above actions. For example, the Template attribute allows you to create a
 template. Some objects do not allow specific behaviors even if the attribute
 is selected.

 A Workplace Shell Class must be registered with the Workplace Shell before it
 will be recognized by Object Utility/2. After the object class is registered,
 an instance of that class can be created. The Object Utility/2 automates these
 procedures of object class registration and instantiation.  This tool can
 create an instance of an object from a class that has already been
 instantiated or can modify an existing instance.

 Registration of a class is performed by opening the main view of Object
 Utility/2.  The class name and DLL name must be provided.  The class is not
 registered if it has been registered previously.

 To modify an existing instance, the icon representing the class is dragged to
 and dropped on top of Object Utility/2. You can enter the object ID and class
 name after opening the main view.

 After the item to be installed is dropped, a dialog box is displayed to obtain
 registration and instantiation information.

 To destroy an object created by this tool, the object can be dragged and
 dropped onto the shredder object on the Workplace Shell desktop (if the no
 drag and no delete options are not selected and the object allows deletion). A
 mechanism to deregister an object class is not provided with this tool.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.1. Class Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Class name is a list of all the registered classes that have DLLs available on
your system.  OS/2 allows classes to be registered without the DLLs available,
but Object Utility/2 does not.  You can select a class from the list or enter
one manually.  This field is required when registering a new class, modifying
an existing instance that was not dropped on Object Utility/2, or creating a
new instance.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.2. DLL Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DLL name must be a fully qualified path and file name if the DLL is not
located in a DLL search path. This field is required if you are registering a
class.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.3. Object ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Object ID must be enclosed in angle brackets(<>). This field is required
when you modify an existing object that was not dropped on Object Utility/2.
You are warned if you try to create an instance that is not a template, without
an Object ID.  You may create the new instance without an object ID. The Object
ID must be unique, if specified, when creating an instance. Templates cannot
have an object ID.  Instances with an object ID cannot be made into a template.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.4. Title Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Title field is required when creating a new object. You can alter the title
of an existing object by providing a different title in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.5. Location Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can select an existing location from the location list or enter a location
manually. The location must be an object ID that represents a folder (enclosed
in angle brackets) or a fully qualified path name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.6. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Create Instance Creates an instance of the class.

 Template  Creates a template of the class in the Templates folder.

 No Copy   Removes Copy from the pop-up menu.

 No delete Removes Delete from the pop-up menu.

 No Rename Removes Rename from the pop-up menu.

 No Print  Removes Print from the pop-up menu.

 No Link   Removes Link from the pop-up menu.

 No Move   Removes Move from the pop-up menu.

 No drag   Prevents dragging of the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Program Maintenance Utility (NMAKE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Program Maintenance Utility (NMAKE) automates the process of updating
project files.  NMAKE compares the modification dates for one set of files (the
target files) with those of another set of files (the dependent files).  If any
dependent files have changed more recently than the target files, NMAKE
executes a series of commands to bring the targets up-to-date.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1. Why Use NMAKE? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The most common use of NMAKE is to automate the process of updating a project
after you make a change to a source file.  Large projects tend to have many
source files.  Often, only a few of your source files need to be compiled when
you make a change.  You set up a special text file called a "description" file
(or "makefile") that tells NMAKE:

   o  Which files depend on others
   o  Which commands, such as compile and link commands, need to be carried out
      to bring your program up-to-date

 This use of NMAKE is only one example of its power.  By building suitable
 description files, you can use NMAKE to

   o  Make backups
   o  Configure data files
   o  Run programs when data files are modified


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2. Running NMAKE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Run NMAKE by typing NMAKE on the operating-system command line.  Supply input
to NMAKE by either of two methods:

   o  Enter the input directly on the command line.
   o  Put your input into a command file (a text file, also called a response
      file) and enter the file name on the command line.

 Press CTRL+C at any time during an NMAKE run to return to the operating
 system.

 Note:  Under the OS/2 operating system, do not use the ampersand character (&)
        to combine the NMAKE command with the CD, CHDIR, or SET command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2.1. Using the Command Line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When using NMAKE at the command line, keep the following in mind:

   o  All fields are optional.
   o  NMAKE always looks first in the current directory for a description file
      called MAKEFILE. If MAKEFILE does not exist, NMAKE uses the <filename>
      given with the /F (specify description file) option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2.1.1. Command-Line Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NMAKE [options] [macrodefinitions] [targets] [/F filname]

 <options>
      Specifies options that modify NMAKE's actions.

 <macrodefinitions>
      Lists macro definitions for NMAKE to use.  Macro definitions that contain
      spaces must be enclosed by double quotation marks.

 <targets>
      Specifies the names of one or more target files to build. If you do not
      list any targets, NMAKE builds the first target in the description file.

 /F <filename>
      Gives the name of the description file where you specify file
      dependencies and which commands to execute when a file is out-of-date.

 The following example:

  NMAKE /S "program = flash" SORT.EXE SEARCH.EXE

   o  Invokes NMAKE with the /S option
   o  Defines a macro, assigning the string "flash" to the macro "program"
   o  Specifies two targets: SORT.EXE and SEARCH.EXE

 By default, NMAKE uses the file named MAKEFILE as the description file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2.1.2. Command-Line Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display NMAKE help, type NMAKE /? at the prompt.  The appropriate copyright
statement appears, along with the following:

Usage:
    NMAKE @commandfile
    NMAKE /help
    NMAKE [/nologo] [/acdeinpqrst?] [/f makefile] [/x stderrfile]

    [macrodefs][targets]

Where the options stand for
 /a    force All targets to be built
 /c    Cryptic mode; suppress sign-on banner & warning messages
 /d    Display modification dates
 /e    Environment variables override macros in the makefile
 /i    Ignore exit codes of commands invoked
 /n    No execute mode; display commands only
 /p    Print macro definitions & target descriptions
 /q    Query if target is up to date; for use in batch files
 /r    inference Rules from 'tools.ini' to be ignored
 /s    Silent execution of commands
 /t    Touch targets with current date & time
 /?    Help message
 /help  Help message
 /nologo do not display sign-on banner


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2.2. Using NMAKE Command Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A command file is a response file used to extend command-line input to NMAKE.

You can split input to NMAKE between the command line and a command file. Use
the name of a command file (preceded by @) where you normally type the input
information on the command line.

Why Use a Command File?

Use a command file for

   o  Complex and long commands you type frequently
   o  Strings of command-line arguments, such as macro definitions, that exceed
      the limit for command-line length

      Note:  A command file is not the same as a description file. For
             information about description files, see Description Files


 Command File Syntax

 To provide input to NMAKE with a command file, type

  NMAKE @commandfile

 In the <commandfile> field, enter the name of a file containing the same
 information as is normally entered on the command line.

 NMAKE treats line breaks that occur between arguments as spaces. Macro
 definitions can span multiple lines if you end each line except the last with
 a backslash (\).  Macro definitions that contain spaces must be enclosed by
 quotation marks, just as if they were entered directly on the command line.

 Example

 The following is a command file called UPDATE:

  /S "program \
  = flash" SORT.EXE SEARCH.EXE

 You can use this command file by typing the following command:

  NMAKE @UPDATE

 This runs NMAKE using:

   o  The /S option
   o  The macro definition "program = flash"
   o  The targets specified as SORT.EXE and SEARCH.EXE
   o  The description file MAKEFILE by default

 Note that the backslash allows the macro definition to span two lines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following describes the options you can use with NMAKE.

Keep the following in mind when using options:

   o  Option characters are not case sensitive; /I and /i are equivalent.
   o  You can use either a slash or dash before the option characters; -a and
      /a are equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.1. Produce Error File (/X) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /X stderrfile

This option produces a standard error file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.2. Build All Targets (/A) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /A

This option builds all specified targets even if they are not out-of-date with
respect to their dependent files.

See Description Files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.3. Suppress Messages (/C) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /C

This option suppresses display of the NMAKE sign-on banner, nonfatal error
messages, and warning messages.  To suppress the sign-on banner without
suppressing other messages, use the /NOLOGO option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.4. Display Modification Dates (/D) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /D

This option displays the modification date of each file when the dates of
target and dependent files are checked.

See Description Files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.5. Override Environment Variables (/E) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /E

This option disables inherited macro redefinition.

NMAKE inherits all current environment variables as macros, which can be
redefined in a description file. The /E option disables any redefinition - the
inherited macro always has the value of the environment variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.6. Specify Description File (/F) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /F filename

This option specifies <filename> as the name of the description file to use.
If a dash (-) is entered instead of a file name, NMAKE reads a description file
from the standard input device, typically the keyboard.

If a filename is not specified, it defaults to MAKEFILE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.7. Display Help (/HELP or /?) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:   /HELP    OR   /?

This option displays a brief summary of NMAKE syntax.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.8. Ignore Exit Codes (/I) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /I

This option ignores exit codes (also called error level or return codes)
returned by programs such as compilers or linkers called by NMAKE.  If this
option is not specified, NMAKE ends when any program returns a nonzero exit
code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.9. Display Commands (/N) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /N

This option causes NMAKE commands to be displayed but not executed.  Use the /N
option to:

   o  Check which targets are out-of-date with respect to their dependents

   o  Debug description files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.10. Suppress Sign-On Banner (/NOLOGO) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /NOLOGO

This option suppresses the sign-on banner display when NMAKE is started.  If
you want to suppress nonfatal error messages and warnings as well, use the
suppress messages (/C) option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.11. Print Macro and Target Definitions (/P) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /P

This option writes out all macro definitions and target definitions. Output is
sent to the standard output device (typically the display).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.12. Return Exit Code (/Q) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /Q

This option causes NMAKE to return either of the following:

   o  A 0 exit code if all targets built during-an-NMAKE run are up-to-date
   o  A nonzero exit code if they are not up-to-date
 Use this option to run NMAKE from within a batch file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.13. Ignore TOOLS.INI File (/R) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /R

This option ignores the following:

   o  All inference rules and macros contained in the TOOLS.INI file
   o  All predefined inference rules and macros


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.14. Suppress Command Display (/S) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /S

This option suppresses the display of commands as they are executed by NMAKE.
It does not suppress the display of messages generated by the commands
themselves.

The /N command (Display Commands) takes precedence over the /S option.  If you
use /N and /S together, commands are displayed but not executed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.15. Change Target Modification Dates (/T) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: /T

This option changes or "touches" the modification dates for out-of-date target
files to the current date. No commands are executed, and the target file is
left unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.4. Description Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NMAKE uses a description file to determine what to do.  In its simplest form, a
description file tells NMAKE which files depend on others and which commands
need to be executed if a file changes.

A description file looks like this:


targets...: dependents...Γöé
     command             Γöé ΓöÇΓöÇdescription block
        :                Γöé

targets... : dependents...
     command


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.4.1. Description Blocks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A dependent relationship between files is defined in a description block.  A
"description block" indicates the relationship among various parts of the
program.  It contains commands to bring all components up to date.  The
description file can contain up to 1048 description blocks.

Description File                       Description Block
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ     ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ      ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
Γöé Description  Γöé     Γöé                Γöé                           Γöé
Γöé   Block 1    Γöé     Γöé                Γöétargets... : dependents... Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ                Γöé command                   Γöé
Γöé Descr Blk 2  Γöé                      Γöé command                   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ                Γöé command                   Γöé
Γöé      :       Γöé     Γöé                Γöé    :                      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ     Γöé                Γöé                           Γöé
Γöé Descr Blk n  Γöé     Γöé                Γöé                           Γöé
Γöé              Γöé     Γöé                Γöé                           Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.4.2. Special Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following are special features of description blocks:

   o  Description files can contain macro definitions and use macros in
      description blocks. Macros allow easy substitution of one text string for
      another.

   o  Description files can contain inference rules.  Inference rules allow
      NMAKE to infer which commands to execute based on the file-name
      extensions used for targets and dependents.

   o  You can specify directories for NMAKE to search for dependent files by
      using the following syntax:

            targets : {directory1;directory2...}dependents

      NMAKE searches the current directory first, then <directory1>,
      <directory2>, and so on.

   o  A command can be placed on the same line as the target and dependent
      files by using a semicolon (;) as depicted below:

            targets... : dependents... ; command

   o  A long command can span several lines if each line ends with a backslash
      ( \ ):

            command \
              continuation of command

   o  The execution of a command can be modified if you precede the command
      with special characters.

   o  If you do not specify a command in a description block, NMAKE looks for
      an inference rule to build the target.

   o  DOS and OS/2 wild card characters (* and ?) can be used in description
      blocks.  For example, the following description block compiles all source
      files with the .C extension:

            ASTRO.EXE : *.C
              ICC $**

   o  NMAKE will expand the *.C specification into the complete list of C files
      in the current directory.  $** is a complete list of dependents specified
      for the current target.

   o  NMAKE uses several punctuation characters in its syntax. To use one of
      these characters as a literal character, place an escape character ( ^ )
      in front of it. For a list of punctuation characters, see Escape
      Characters.

   o  Normally a target file can appear in only one description block.  A
      special syntax allows you to use a target in several description blocks.

   o  A special syntax allows you to determine the drive, path, base name, and
      extension of the first dependent file in a description block.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.4.3. Targets in Several Description Blocks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using a file as a target in more than one description block causes NMAKE to
end.  You can overcome this limitation by using two colons (::) as the
target/dependent separator instead of one colon.

The following description block is permissible:

X :: A
  command
X :: B
  command

The following causes NMAKE to end:

X : A
  command
X : B
  command

It is permissible to use single colons if the target/dependent lines are
grouped above the same commands. The following is permissible:

X : A
X : B
  command
Double Colon (::) Target/Dependent Separator Example

TARGET.LIB :: A.ASM B.ASM C.ASM
  ML A.ASM B.ASM C.ASM
  LIB TARGET -+A.OBJ -+B.OBJ -+C.OBJ;

TARGET.LIB :: D.C E.C
  ICC /C D.C E.C
  LIB TARGET -+D.OBJ -+E.OBJ;

These two description blocks both update the library named TARGET.LIB.  If any
of the assembly-language files have changed more recently than the library
file, NMAKE executes the commands in the first block to assemble the source
files and update the library.  Similarly, if any of the C-language files have
changed, NMAKE executes the second group of commands to compile the C files and
update the library.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5. Macros ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Macros provide a convenient way to replace one string with another in the
description file.  The text is automatically replaced each time NMAKE is run.
This feature makes it easy to change text throughout the description file
without having to edit every line that uses the text.  Two common uses of
macros are:

Two Common Uses of Macros

   o  To create a standard description file for several projects. The macro
      represents the file names in commands.  These file names are defined when
      you run NMAKE.  When you switch to a different project, changing the
      macro changes the file names NMAKE uses throughout the description file.

   o  To control the options that NMAKE passes to the compiler, assembler, or
      linker.  When using a macro to specify the options, you can quickly
      change the options throughout the description file in one easy step.

 A macro can be defined :

      In a Description File
      On the Command Line
      In TOOLS.INI
      Through inheritance from Environment Variables


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5.1. Macros Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

program = FLASH
c = LINK
options =

$(program).EXE : $(program).OBJ
  $c $(options) $(program).OBJ;

The example above defines three macros.  The description block executes the
following commands:

FLASH.EXE : FLASH.OBJ
  LINK  FLASH.OBJ;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5.2. Special Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Macros have the following special features:

   o  When using a macro, you can substitute text in the macro itself.

   o  Several macros have been predefined for special purposes.

   o  If a macro is defined more than once, precedence rules govern which
      definition is used.

   o  You can also put macros into your TOOLS.INI file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5.3. Macros in a Description File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Before using a macro, you need to define it, either on the NMAKE command line
or in your description file.  Description file macro definitions look like
this:

macroname = macrostring

Macro names can be any combination of alphanumeric characters and the
underscore character ( _ ), and they are case-sensitive. A macro string can be
any string of characters.

The first character of the macro name must be the first character on the line.
NMAKE ignores any spaces before or after the equal sign ( = ).

The macro string can be a null string and can contain embedded spaces. Do not
enclose the macro string in quotation marks; quotation marks are used only when
you define macros on the command line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5.4. Macros on the Command Line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Before using a macro, you need to define it, either on the NMAKE command line
or in your description file.  Command-line macro definitions look like this:

macroname=macrostring

No spaces can surround the equal sign.  If you embed spaces, NMAKE might
misinterpret your macro.  If your macro string contains embedded spaces,
enclose it in double quotation marks ( " ) like this:

macroname="macro string"

or simply enclose the entire macro definition in double quotation marks ( " )
like this:

"macroname = macro string"

Macro names can be any combination of alphanumeric characters and the
underscore character ( _ ), and they are case-sensitive. A macro string can be
any string of characters or a null string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5.5. Inherited Macros ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NMAKE inherits all current environment variables as macros. For example, if you
have a PATH environment variable defined as PATH = C:\TOOLS\BIN, the string
C:\TOOLS\BIN is substituted when you use PATH in the description file.

You can redefine inherited macros by including a line such as the example above
in a description file.  While NMAKE is executing, the macro takes on the
redefined definition.  When NMAKE terminates, however, the environment variable
resumes its original value.

The Override Environment Variables (/E) option disables inherited macro
redefinition. If you use this option, NMAKE ignores any attempt to redefine an
inherited macro.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5.6. Defined Macros ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

After you have defined a macro, you can use it anywhere in your description
file with the following syntax:

$(macroname)

The parentheses are not required if the macro name is only one character long.
To use a dollar sign ( $ ) without using a macro, enter two dollar signs ( $$
), or use the caret ( ^ ) before the dollar sign as an escape character.

When NMAKE runs, it replaces all occurrences of $(macroname) with the defined
macro string. If the macro is undefined, nothing is substituted. After a macro
is defined, you can cancel it only with the !UNDEF directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5.7. Macro Substitutions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Just as you use macros to substitute text within a description file, you use
the following syntax to substitute text within a macro:

$(macroname: string1 = string2)

Every occurrence of <string1> is replaced by <string2> in <macroname>.  Spaces
between the colon and <string1> are considered part of <string1>.  If <string2>
is a null string, all occurrences of <string1> are deleted from the macro.  The
colon ( : ) must immediately follow <macroname>.

Note:  The replacement of <string1> with <string2> in the macro is not a
       permanent change.  If you use the macro again without a substitution,
       you get the original unchanged macro.

 Example

  SOURCES = ONE.C TWO.C THREE.C
  PROGRAM.EXE : $(SOURCES:.C=.OBJ)
    LINK $**;

 The example above defines a macro called SOURCES, which contains the names of
 three C source files.  With this macro, the target/dependent line substitutes
 the .OBJ extension for the .C extension.  Thus, NMAKE executes the following
 command:

  LINK ONE.OBJ TWO.OBJ THREE.OBJ;

 Note:  $** is a special macro that translates to all dependent files for a
        given target.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6. Special Macros ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NMAKE predefines several macros.  The first six macros below return one or more
file specifications for the files in the target/dependent line of a description
block.  Except where noted, the file specification includes the path of the
file, the base file name, and the file-name extension.

 Macro          Value

 $@             The specification of the target file.

 $*             The base name (without extension) of the target file. Path
                information is also returned if the path was specified as part
                of the target file name. This macro cannot be used in a
                dependent list.

 $**            The specifications of the dependent files.

 $?             The specifications for only those dependent files that are
                out-of-date with respect to the targets.

 $<             The specification of a single dependent file that is
                out-of-date with respect to the targets. This macro is used
                only in inference rules.

 $$@            The file specification of the target that NMAKE is currently
                evaluating.  This is a dynamic dependency parameter, used only
                in dependent lists.

 $(CC)          The string ICC, which is the command to run the C Set ++
                Compiler.  You can redefine this macro to use a different
                command.

 $(AS)          The string MASM, which is the command to run the Macro
                Assembler (MASM).  You can redefine this macro to use a
                different command.

 $(MAKE)        The command name used to run NMAKE.  This macro is used to
                invoke NMAKE recursively.  If you redefine this macro, NMAKE
                issues a warning message.

                Note:  NMAKE executes the command line in which $(MAKE)
                       appears, even if the display commands (/N) option is on.

 $(MAKEFLAGS)   The NMAKE options currently in effect.  You cannot redefine
                this macro.

 Note:  The special macros $** and $$@ are the only exceptions to the rule that
        macro names longer than one character must be enclosed in parentheses.

 You can append characters to any of the first six macros in this list to
 modify the meaning of the macro. However, you cannot use macro substitutions
 in these macros.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6.1. Special Macros Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRIG.LIB : SIN.OBJ COS.OBJ ARCTAN.OBJ
  !LIB TRIG.LIB -+$?;

In the example above, the macro $? represents the names of all dependent files
that are out-of-date with respect to the target file.  The exclamation point (
! ) preceding the LIB command causes NMAKE to execute the LIB command once for
each dependent file in the list.  As a result of this description, the LIB
command is executed up to three times, each time replacing a module with a
newer version.

DIR=C:\INCLUDE
$(DIR)\GLOBALS.H : GLOBALS.H
 COPY GLOBALS.H $@
$(DIR)\TYPES.H : TYPES.H
 COPY TYPES.H $@
$(DIR)\MACROS.H : MACROS.H
 COPY MACROS.H $@

The example above shows how to update a group of include files. Each of the
files GLOBALS.H, TYPES.H, and MACROS.H in the directory C:\INCLUDE depends on
its counterpart in the current directory.  If one of the include files is
out-of-date, NMAKE replaces it with the file of the same name from the current
directory.

The following description file, which uses the special macro $$@, is
equivalent:

DIR=C:\INCLUDE
$(DIR)\GLOBALS.H $(DIR)\TYPES.H $(DIR)\MACROS.H : $$(@F)
!COPY $? $@

The special macro $$(@F) signifies the file name (without the path) of the
current target.

When NMAKE evaluates the description block, it evaluates the three targets, one
at a time, with respect to their dependents.  Thus, NMAKE first checks whether
C:\INCLUDE\GLOBALS.H is out-of-date compared with GLOBALS.H in the current
directory.  If so, it executes the command to copy the dependent file GLOBALS.H
to the target.  NMAKE repeats the procedure for the other two targets.

Note that on the command line, the macro $? refers to the dependent for this
target.  The macro $@ specifies the full file specification of the target file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6.2. File-Specification Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A full file specification gives the base name of the file, the file-name
extension, and the path.  The path provides the disk-drive identifier and the
sequence of directories needed to locate the file on the disk.

For example, the file specification

C:\SOURCE\PROG\SORT.OBJ

has the following parts:

Path Name            C:\SOURCE\PROG
Base File Name       SORT
File-Name Extension  .OBJ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6.3. Characters That Modify Special Macros ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following six macros all resolve to a file specification (or possibly
several file specifications for $** and $?):

     $*     $@     $**     $<     $?     $$@

You can append characters to any of these macros to modify the file name
returned by the macro.  Depending on which character you use, parts of the full
file specification are returned:

                               Appended Character
     File Part Returned      D        F       B       R

     File Path               Yes      No      No      Yes
     Base File Name          No       Yes     Yes     Yes
     File Name Extension     No       Yes     No      No


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6.4. Modified Special Macros Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the macro $@ has the value

C:\SOURCE\PROG\SORT.OBJ

then the following values are returned for the modified macro:

 Macro     Value

 $(@D)     C:\SOURCE\PROG

 $(@F)     SORT.OBJ

 $(@B)     SORT

 $(@R)     C:\SOURCE\PROG\SORT

 Note:  Modified macros are always longer than a single character - they must
        be enclosed by parentheses when used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6.5. Macro Precedence Rules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When the same macro is defined in more than one place, the definition with the
highest priority is used:

  Priority
                                      Definition

  1 (Highest)
                                      Command line

  2
                                      Description file

  3
                                      Environment variables

  4
                                      TOOLS.INI file

  5 (Lowest)
                                      Predefined macros (such as CC and AS)

 If you invoke NMAKE with the Overriding Macro Definitions (/E) option, macros
 defined by environment variables take precedence over those defined in a
 description file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.7. Inference Rules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Inference rules are templates from which NMAKE infers what to do with a
description block when no commands are given.  Only those extensions defined in
a .SUFFIXES list can have inference rules.  The extensions .C, .OBJ, .ASM, and
.EXE are automatically included in .SUFFIXES.

When NMAKE encounters a description block with no commands, it looks for an
inference rule that specifies how to create the target from the dependent
files, given the two file extensions. Similarly, if a dependent file does not
exist, NMAKE looks for an inference rule that specifies how to create the
dependent from another file with the same base name.

NMAKE applies an inference rule only if the base name of the file it is trying
to create matches the base name of a file that already exists.

In effect, inference rules are useful only when there is a one-to-one
correspondence between the files with the "from" extension and the files with
the "to" extension.  You cannot, for example, define an inference rule that
inserts a number of modules into a library.

The use of inference rules eliminates the need to put the same commands in
several description blocks.  For example, you can use inference rules to
specify a single ICC command that changes any C source file (with a .C
extension) to an object file (with a .OBJ extension).

You define an inference rule by including text of the following form in your
description file or in your TOOLS.INI file - see "Special Features".

.fromext.toext:
commands
:

The elements of the inference rule are:

 <fromext>
      The file-name extension for dependent files to build a target
 <toext>
      The file-name extension for target files to be built
 <commands>
      The commands to build the <toext> target from the <fromext> dependent.

 For example, an inference rule to convert C source files (with the .C
 extension) to C object files (with the .OBJ extension) is

  .C.OBJ:
   ICC $<

 Note:  The special macro $< represents the name of a dependent out-of-date
        relative to the target.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.7.1. Special Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

   o  You can specify a path where NMAKE should look for target and dependent
      files used in inference rules.

   o  Inference rules are predefined for compiling and linking C programs, and
      for assembling programs.

   o  NMAKE looks for inference rules in the TOOLS.INI file if it cannot find a
      rule in a description file.

   o  Only those extensions defined in a .SUFFIXES list can have inference
      rules.  The extensions .C, .OBJ, .ASM, and .EXE are automatically
      included in .SUFFIXES.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.8. Inference Rules Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

.OBJ.EXE:
  LINK $<;

EXAMPLE1.EXE: EXAMPLE1.OBJ

EXAMPLE2.EXE: EXAMPLE2.OBJ
  LINK /CO EXAMPLE2,,,LIBV3.LIB

The first line above defines an inference rule that causes the LINK command to
create an executable file whenever a change is made in the corresponding object
file.  The file name in the inference rule is specified with the special macro
$< so that the rule applies to any .OBJ file with an out-of-date executable
file.

When NMAKE does not find any commands in the first description block, it checks
for a rule that might apply and finds the rule defined on the first two lines
of the description file.  NMAKE applies the rule, replacing $< with
EXAMPLE1.OBJ when it executes the command, so that the LINK command becomes

LINK EXAMPLE1.OBJ;

NMAKE does not search for an inference rule when examining the second
description block, because a command is explicitly given.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.8.1. Inference-Rule Path Specifications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When defining an inference rule, you can indicate to NMAKE where to look for
target and dependent files.  Use the following syntax:

{frompath}.fromext{topath}.toext
 commands
 :

NMAKE looks in the directory specified by <frompath> for files with the
<fromext> extension.  It executes the commands to build files with the <toext>
extension in the directory specified by <topath>.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.8.2. Predefined Inference Rules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NMAKE predefines three inference rules:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéInference Rule      ΓöéDefault             ΓöéCommand Action      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé.C.OBJ              Γöé$(CC) $(CFLAGS) /C  ΓöéICC /C $*.C         Γöé
Γöé                    Γöé$*.C                Γöé                    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé.C.EXE              Γöé$(CC) $(CFLAGS) $*.CΓöéICC $*.C            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé.ASM.OBJ            Γöé$(AS) $(AFLAGS) $*; ΓöéMASM $*;            Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
NOTE

   1. The first two rules automatically compile and link C programs.

   2. The last rule automatically assembles programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9. Directives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using directives, you can construct description files similar to batch files.
NMAKE provides directives that:

   o  Conditionally execute commands

   o  Display error messages

   o  Include the contents of other files

   o  Turn some NMAKE options on or off

 Each directive begins with an exclamation point ( ! ) in the first column of
 the description file.  Spaces can be placed between the exclamation point and
 the directive keyword.

 The list below describes the directives:

 !IF <expression>
      Executes the statements between the !IF keyword and the next !ELSE or
      !ENDIF directive if <expression> evaluates to a nonzero value.

      The <expression> used with the !IF directive can consist of integer
      constants, string constants, or exit codes returned by programs.  Integer
      constants can use the C unary operators for numerical negation ( - ),
      one's complement ( ~ ), and logical negation ( ! ).  You can also use any
      of the C binary operators listed below:

      Operator       Description

      +              Addition

      -              Subtraction

      *              Multiplication

      /              Division

      %              Modulus

      &              Bitwise AND

      |              Bitwise OR

      ^^             Bitwise XOR

      &&             Logical AND

      ||             Logical OR

      <<             Left shift

      >>             Right shift

      ==             Equality

      !=             Inequality

      <              Less than

      >              Greater than

      <=             Less than or equal to

      >=             Greater than or equal to

      Note:

      You can use parentheses to group expressions.

      Values are assumed to be decimal values unless specified with a leading 0
      (octal) or leading 0x (hexadecimal).

      Strings are enclosed by quotation marks ( " ).  You can use the equality
      ( ==) and inequality ( != ) operators to compare two strings.

      You can invoke a program in an expression by enclosing the program name
      in square brackets ( [ ] ).  The exit code returned by the program is
      used in the expression.

 !ELSE
      Executes the statements between the !ELSE and !ENDIF directives if the
      statements preceding the !ELSE directive were not executed.

 !ENDIF
      Marks the end of the !IF, !IFDEF, or !IFNDEF block of statements.

 !IFDEF <macroname>
      Executes the statements between the !IFDEF keyword and the next !ELSE or
      !ENDIF directive if <macroname> is defined in the description file.  If a
      macro has been defined as null, it is still considered to be defined.

 !IFNDEF <macroname>
      Executes the statements between the !IFNDEF keyword and the next !ELSE or
      !ENDIF directive if <macroname> is not defined in the description file.

 !UNDEF <macroname>
      Undefines a previously defined macro.

 !ERROR <text>
      Prints text and then stops execution.

 !INCLUDE <filename>
      Reads and evaluates the file <filename> before continuing with the
      current description file.  If <filename> is enclosed by angle brackets
      (<>), NMAKE searches for the file in the directories specified by the
      INCLUDE macro; otherwise, it looks only in the current directory.  The
      INCLUDE macro is initially set to the value of the INCLUDE environment
      variable.

 !CMDSWITCHES {+|-}<opt>
      Turns on or off one of four NMAKE options: /D, /I, /N, and /S.  If no
      options are specified, the options are reset to the values they had when
      NMAKE was started. To turn an option on, precede it with a plus sign (+);
      to turn it off, precede it with a minus sign (-). This directive updates
      the MAKEFLAGS macro.

      See Special Macros.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9.1. Directives Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

!INCLUDE <INFRULES.TXT>
!CMDSWITCHES +D
WINNER.EXE:WINNER.OBJ
!IFDEF DEBUG
! IF "$(DEBUG)"=="y"
     LINK /CO WINNER.OBJ;
! ELSE
     LINK WINNER.OBJ;
! ENDIF
!ELSE
! ERROR Macro named DEBUG is not defined.
!ENDIF

The directives in this example do the following:

   o  The !INCLUDE directive causes the file INFRULES.TXT to be read and
      evaluated as if it were part of the description file.

   o  The !CMDSWITCHES directive turns on the /D option, which displays the
      dates of the files as they are checked.

   o  If WINNER.EXE is out-of-date with respect to WINNER.OBJ, the !IFDEF
      directive checks to see whether the macro DEBUG is defined.  If it is
      defined, the !IF directive checks to see whether it is set to y.  If it
      is, the linker is invoked with the /CO option; otherwise, it is invoked
      without the /CO. If the DEBUG macro is not defined, the !ERROR directive
      prints the message and NMAKE stops executing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9.2. Pseudotargets ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A "pseudotarget" is a target in a description block that is not a file.
Instead, it is a name that serves as a "handle" for building a group of files
or executing a group of commands.  In the following example, UPDATE is a
pseudotarget:

UPDATE: *.*
  !copy $** A:\PRODUCT

When NMAKE evaluates a pseudotarget, it always considers the dependents to be
out-of-date.  In the description above, NMAKE copies each of the dependent
files to the specified drive and directory.

NMAKE predefines several pseudotargets for special purposes.

See Predefined Pseudotargets.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9.3. Predefined Pseudotargets ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NMAKE predefines several pseudotargets that provide special rules within a
description file:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9.3.1. .SILENT Pseudotarget ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  .SILENT : dependents...

This pseudotarget suppresses the display of executed commands for a single
description block.  The /S option does the same thing for all description
blocks.

See Suppress Command Display (/S).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9.3.2. .IGNORE Pseudotarget ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  .IGNORE : dependents...

This pseudotarget ignores exit codes returned by programs for a single
description block.  The /I option does the same thing for all description
blocks.

See Ignore Exit Codes (/I).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9.3.3. .SUFFIXES Pseudotarget ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  .SUFFIXES : extensions...

This pseudotarget defines file extensions to try when NMAKE needs to build a
target file for which no dependents are specified. NMAKE searches the current
directory for a file with the same name as the target file and an extension in
<extensions...>.  If NMAKE finds such a file, and if an inference rule applies
to the file, NMAKE treats the file as a dependent of the target.

The .SUFFIXES pseudotarget is predefined as

.SUFFIXES : .OBJ .EXE .C .ASM

To add extensions to the list, specify .SUFFIXES : followed by the new
extensions.  To clear the list, specify

.SUFFIXES:

Note:  Only those extensions specified in .SUFFIXES can have inference rules.
       NMAKE ignores inference rules unless the extensions have been specified
       in a .SUFFIXES list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9.3.4. .PRECIOUS Pseudotarget ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  .PRECIOUS : targets...

This pseudotarget tells NMAKE not to delete a target even if the commands that
build it are terminated or interrupted. This pseudotarget overrides the NMAKE
default.  By default, NMAKE deletes the target if it cannot be sure that the
target was built successfully.

For example,

.PRECIOUS : TOOLS.LIB
TOOLS.LIB : A2Z.OBJ Z2A.OBJ
 command
  :

If the commands to build TOOLS.LIB are interrupted, leaving an incomplete file,
NMAKE does not delete the partially built TOOLS.LIB.

Note:  The pseudotarget .PRECIOUS is useful only in limited circumstances.
       Most professional development tools have their own interrupt handlers
       and "clean up" when errors occur.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.10. In-Line Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You may need to issue a command in the description file with a list of
arguments exceeding the command-line limit of the operating system. Just as
NMAKE supports the use of command files, it can also generate in-line files
which are read as response files by other programs.

To generate an in-line file, use the following syntax for your description
block:

target : dependents
  command @<<[filename]
in-line file text
<< [KEEP | NOKEEP]

All of the text between the two sets of double less than signs (<<) is placed
into an in-line file and given the name <filename>.  You can refer to the
in-line file at a later time by using <filename>.  If <filename> is not given,
NMAKE gives the file a unique name in the directory specified by the TMP
environment variable if it is defined.  Otherwise, NMAKE creates a unique file
name in the current directory.

The in-line file can be temporary or permanent.  If you do not specify
otherwise, or if you specify the keyword NOKEEP, the in-line file is temporary.
Specify KEEP to retain the file.

Note:  The at sign (@) is not part of the NMAKE syntax but is the typical
       character used by utilities (such as LINK386) to designate a file as a
       response file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.10.1. In-Line Files Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MATH.LIB :  ADD.OBJ SUB.OBJ MUL.OBJ DIV.OBJ
  LIB @<<
MATH.LIB
-+ADD.OBJ-+SUB.OBJ-+MUL.OBJ-+DIV.OBJ
listing
<<

The above example creates an in-line file and uses it to invoke the Library
Manager (LIB).  The in-line file is used as a response file by (LIB).  It
specifies which library to use, the commands to execute, and the listing file
to produce.  The in-line file contains the following:

          MATH.LIB
          -+ADD.OBJ-+SUB.OBJ-+MUL.OBJ-+DIV.OBJ
          listing

Because no file name is listed after the LIB command, the in-line file is given
a unique name and placed into the current directory (or the directory defined
by the TMP environment variable).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.10.2. Escape Characters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NMAKE uses the following punctuation characters in its syntax:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
Γöé(     Γöé)     Γöé#     Γöé$     Γöé^     Γöé\     Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé{     Γöé}     Γöé!     Γöé@     Γöé-     Γöé      Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

To use one of these characters in a command and not have it interpreted by
NMAKE, use a caret ( ^ ) in front of the character.

For example,

BIG^#.C

is treated as

BIG#.C

With the caret, you can include a literal newline character in a description
file.  This capability is useful in macro definitions, as in the following
example:

XYZ=abc^<ENTER>
def

The effect is equivalent to the effect of assigning the C-style string abc\ndef
to the XYZ macro.  Note that this effect differs from the effect of using the
backslash ( \ ) to continue a line. A newline character that follows a
backslash is replaced with a space.

NMAKE ignores a caret that is not followed by any of the characters it uses in
its syntax.  A caret that appears within quotation marks is not treated as an
escape character.

Note:  The escape character cannot be used in the command portion of a
       dependency block.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11. Characters That Modify Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any of three characters can be placed in front of a command to modify how the
command is run:

 - (dash)       Turns off error checking for the command

 @ (at sign)    Suppresses display of the command

 ! (exclamation point) Executes the command for each dependent file

 NOTE

   1. Spaces can separate the modifying character from the command. Any command
      on a separate line  - whether modified or not - must be indented by one
      or more spaces or tabs.

   2. You can use more than one character to modify a single command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11.1. Turn Error Checking Off (-) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  -[n] command

The /I option globally turns command error-checking off.  The dash (-) command
modifier overrides the global setting to turn error checking off for commands
individually.  This modifier is used in two ways:

   o  A dash without a number turns off all error checking.

   o  A dash followed by a number causes NMAKE to abort only if the exit code
      returned by the command is greater than the number.

 See Ignore Exit Codes (/I).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11.2. Dash Command Modifier Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LIGHT.LST : LIGHT.TXT
  - FLASH LIGHT.TXT

In the example above, NMAKE never ends, regardless of the exit code returned by
FLASH.

LIGHT.LST : LIGHT.TXT
  -1 FLASH LIGHT.TXT

In the example above, NMAKE ends if the exit code returned by FLASH is greater
than 1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11.3. Suppress Command Display (@) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  @ command

The /S option globally suppresses the display of commands while NMAKE is
running.  The at sign (@) modifier suppresses the display for individual
commands.

Note:  Regardless of the /S option or the @ modifier, output generated by the
       command itself always appears.

 See Suppress Command Display (/S).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11.4. At Sign (@) Command Modifier Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Suppress Command Display (@)

SORT.EXE:SORT.OBJ
  @ ECHO sorting

The command line calling the ECHO command is not displayed.  The output of the
ECHO command, however, is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11.5. Execute Command for Dependents (!) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:  ! command

The exclamation-point command modifier causes the command to be executed for
each dependent file if the command uses one of the special macros $? or $**.
The $? macro refers to all dependent files out-of-date with respect to the
target.  The $** macro refers to all dependent files in the description block.

See Special Macros.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11.6. Exclamation Point (!) Command Modifier Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LEAP.TXT : HOP.ASM SKIP.BAS JUMP.C
  ! print $** lpt1:

The example above executes the following three commands, regardless of the
modification dates of the dependent file:

print HOP.ASM lpt1:
print SKIP.BAS lpt1:
print JUMP.C lpt1:

LEAP.TXT : HOP.ASM SKIP.BAS JUMP.C
  ! print $? lpt1:

The example above executes the print command only for those dependent files
with modification dates later than that of the LEAP.TXT file. If HOP.ASM and
JUMP.C have modification dates later than LEAP.TXT, the following two commands
are executed:

print HOP.ASM lpt1:
print JUMP.C lpt1:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11.7. EXTMAKE Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Description files can use a special syntax to determine the drive, path, base
name, and extension of the first dependent file in a description block.  This
syntax is called the "extmake" syntax.

The characters %s represent the complete file specification of the first
dependent file.  Various parts of the file specification are represented using
the syntax

%|partsF

where <parts> is a combination of the following letters:

 d  Drive
 p  Path
 f  Base name
 e  Extension

 For example, to specify the drive and path name of the first dependent file in
 a description block, use:

  %|dpF

 The percent symbol (%) is a replacement in DOS and OS/2 command lines.  To use
 the percent symbol in command-line arguments, use a double percent (%%).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.12. Macros and Inference Rules in TOOLS.INI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can place either macros or inference rules in your TOOLS.INI file.  NMAKE
looks for the TOOLS.INI file first in the current directory and then in the
directory indicated by the INIT environment variable.

If NMAKE finds a TOOLS.INI file, it looks for the following tag:

[nmake]

You can place macros and inference rules below this tag in the same format you
would use in a description file.

If a macro or inference rule is defined in both the TOOLS.INI file and the
description file, the definition in the description file takes precedence.
Also, if you use the /R option, the TOOLS.INI file is ignored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.12.1. TOOLS.INI Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

[nmake]
CFLAGS=/ss /ms /Gd-
.C.OBJ:
  $(CC) -c $(CFLAGS) $*.C

These lines in the TOOLS.INI file do the following:

   o  Define the CFLAGS macro as "/ss /ms /Gd-"

   o  Redefine the predefined inference rule to build .OBJ files from .C source
      files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Quick Information (KwikINF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

KwikINF provides you with a quick and convenient method of accessing
information in online documents stored in the OS/2 BOOKSHELF from anywhere on
the desktop, with the exception of DOS or WIN-OS/2 sessions. When KwikINF has
been started, you can open a dialog with KwikINF by pressing a user-selectable
hot key. Until you configure KwikINF, your KwikINF hot key is ALT+Q. The
KwikINF window includes a Configure push button. This opens another dialog with
KwikINF:  the Configure KwikINF window. The KwikINF window also allows you to
initiate searches for text strings in online documents of choice.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.1. Automatic Text Retrieval ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The KwikINF window includes a Search String entry field. You can specify the
text string you want KwikINF to search for. Or, under certain conditions, this
entry field automatically contains the word located under the cursor when you
press your KwikINF hot key. This text retrieval feature is available from OS/2
full-screen and Presentation Manager (PM) multi-line entry (MLE) fields. This
feature is also available from PM AVIO and VIO windows. Communication Manager's
3270 emulator is a common example of a PM AVIO window. An OS/2 Window is a VIO
window. This means that if, for example, you open an OS/2 Window and start an
OS/2 text-based application, KwikINF will automatically retrieve the word under
the cursor when you press your KwikINF hot key. This automatic text-retrieval
feature is not available from graphic-text PM windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.2. BOOKSHELF Online Documents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The KwikINF window includes a Volume to Search list box of all online documents
stored in the OS/2 BOOKSHELF subdirectories. KwikINF initiates searches for
information in any online document in this list.

The BOOKSHELF is an environment variable, set in CONFIG.SYS, that contains a
list of subdirectories containing online documents created as viewable .INF
files with the Information Presentation Facility (IPF). The BOOKSHELF
environment variable is set as follows:

SET BOOKSHELF=<subdirectory>;...;<subdirectory>;

Online documents for OS/2 (for example, the Command Reference) are stored in
the \OS2\BOOK subdirectory of the drive on which OS/2 is installed.  Online
documents for the OS/2 Toolkit (for example, the Programming References) are
stored in the \TOOLKIT\BOOK subdirectory of the drive specified during
installation of the online programming information. As an example, after
installation of OS/2 and the Toolkit, the BOOKSHELF environment variable is set
as follows:

SET BOOKSHELF=C:\OS2\BOOK;D:\TOOLKIT\BOOK;

Where c: is the drive where OS/2 is installed and D: is the drive where the
Toolkit is installed.

The online document where KwikINF looks for the Search String is selected from
the Volume to Search list box by KwikINF or by you. KwikINF selects the Volume
to Search by looking for the text string that has a matching entry in the
KwikINF index file or, if there is no matching entry in the index file, in the
Default Volume you have selected in the Configure KwikINF window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.2.1. Index Files for Rapid Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The KwikINF index file provides a rapid-search mechanism for locating specific
kinds of information in online documents in the BOOKSHELF. The KwikINF index
file consists of one or more concatenated files stored in the BOOKSHELF and
defined by the HELPNDX variable in CONFIG.SYS as shown in the following
example:

SET HELPNDX=EPMKWHLP.NDX

where EPMKWHLP.NDX is the KwikINF index file for the OS/2 Toolkit.

As an example, the following excerpt from the KwikINF index file for the OS/2
Toolkit:

EXTENSIONS: *
DESCRIPTION: IBM Developer's Toolkit for OS/2
(IPF*, view ipfc20.inf ~)
(WinCreateWindow, view pmwin.inf ~)

is used by KwikINF to quickly locate Search String entries with the prefix IPF
in the IPF-viewable file IPFC20.INF. and to quickly locate the specific Search
String entry WinCreateWindow in the IPF-viewable file PMWIN.INF.

The first token in a rapid-search string is a specific text string (for
example, WinCreateWindow) or prefix wildcard (for example, IPF*).  It is also
used as the text-string you want VIEW.EXE to locate within the online document.
The second token is the name of the IPF file viewer (VIEW.EXE). The third token
is a parameter for VIEW.EXE: the name of the .INF file that contains the online
document.  Currently, the fourth token is not being used and it is treated as a
comment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.2.2. Enabling Online Documents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can enable any online document for KwikINF by:

   1. Creating the online document as a viewable .INF file using the
      Information Presentation Facility (IPF).

   2. Appending the name of the subdirectory where it is stored to the
      BOOKSHELF in CONFIG.SYS.

   3. Creating an index file to support the KwikINF rapid-search mechanism,
      storing it in the BOOKSHELF, and adding it to the HELPNDX variable in
      CONFIG.SYS.

 For example, you can enable your online document MYDOC stored in MYSUBDIR
 subdirectory for KwikINF by:

   1. Compiling the tagged source for MYDOC with the IPF compiler by entering:

            IPFC MYDOC /INF

   2. Modifying the BOOKSHELF statement in CONFIG.SYS as follows:

            SET BOOKSHELF=...;C:\MYSUBDIR;

   3. Creating MYINDEX file in MYSUBDIR as shown below:

            /* C style comments and blank lines are acceptable */
            /* specific file extensions may be specified here  */
            EXTENSIONS: *
            /* a title may be placed here                      */
            DESCRIPTION: Any custom KwikINF index file
            /* rapid-search strings                            */
            (thisfunction, view mydoc.inf ~)
            (my*, view mydoc.inf ~)

   4. Modifying the HELPNDX variable in CONFIG.SYS as follows:

            SET HELPNDX=EPMKWHLP.NDX+MYINDEX.NDX

 For more information on creating an IPF-viewable online document, see the IPF
 Reference in the Toolkit Information folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.3. Using KwikINF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

KwikINF is installed as a program object in the OS/2 Toolkit Information
folder.  You start KwikINF by double-clicking on the KwikINF object or by
entering KwikINF from the command line of an OS/2 Window. You can start KwikINF
automatically when you start OS/2 by placing a shadow of the KwikINF object in
the Startup folder in the OS/2 System folder on the desktop. You shadow an
object by pressing CTRL + SHIFT while dragging the object.

KwikINF installs a PM system hook to monitor keystrokes in PM sessions and OS/2
character device monitors to monitor keystrokes in OS/2 full-screen sessions.
KwikINF will install only one copy of the hook and monitors, even if you
attempt to re-start KwikINF.

When KwikINF has been started, you can initiate searches for text strings in
online documents of choice by pressing a user-selectable hot key.

Note:  You cannot initiate searches for text strings in online documents from
       DOS or WIN-OS/2 sessions.

 Until you configure KwikINF, your KwikINF hot key is ALT+Q. You configure
 KwikINF by pressing your KwikINF hot key and then pressing the Configure push
 button to open the Configure KwikINF window.

 Note:  When you start KwikINF by double-clicking on the KwikINF object in the
        Toolkit Information folder, a message box tells you what hot key opens
        the KwikINF window. This technique can also be used to determine what
        your current KwikINF hot key is, after KwikINF has been started.

 How you initiate a search for information in online documents is dependent on
 where you are on the desktop when you press the KwikINF hot key:

   o  From an OS/2 full-screen session, a PM VIO or AVIO window, or PM MLE:
      position the cursor on the string you want to search for and press the
      KwikINF hot key. KwikINF retrieves the word at the cursor. If you have
      configured KwikINF to display the KwikINF window when the KwikINF hot key
      is pressed, KwikINF automatically places the retrieved word in the Search
      String entry field of the KwikINF window. When you press the Search push
      button or Enter, KwikINF displays the information. If you have configured
      KwikINF to bypass the KwikINF window when the KwikINF hot key is pressed,
      KwikINF automatically displays the information.

      If no word is under the cursor, the previous Search String is used. If no
      previous Search String exists, KwikINF displays the Contents of the
      Default volume to search.

   o  From a graphic-text PM window: press the KwikINF hot key, then type the
      string you want to search for in the Search String entry field of the
      KwikINF window. The KwikINF text-retrieval feature is not available from
      graphic-text PM windows.

 The online document where KwikINF looks for the text string is selected from
 the Volume to Search list box by KwikINF or by you. To open the online
 document to the panel that contains the information, press the Search push
 button or press Enter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.3.1. KwikINF From the Command Line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can start, terminate, and configure KwikINF from the command line in an
OS/2 Window by entering:

KwikINF [no options] [/C] [/T] [/?]

where:

 no options  starts KwikINF. After entering this command, the default KwikINF
             hot key (ALT + Q) is enabled.

 /T          terminates KwikINF and disables the KwikINF hot key.

 /C          opens the Configure KwikINF window. Use this window to select
             another KwikINF hot key, to select a default online document from
             the BOOKSHELF to search, and to select the activation behavior of
             the KwikINF window.

 /?          displays the following information.

                           Usage: KwikINF [Option]
                            Option    Description
                              /C      Configure KwikINF
                              /T      Terminate KwikINF
                              /?      This short help list


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.3.2. Configuring KwikINF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You configure KwikINF through the Configure KwikINF window. KwikINF displays
this window when you press the Configure push button on the KwikINF window or
when you enter the following from the command line of an OS/2 Window:

KwikINF /C

The Configure KwikINF window allows you to:

   o  Select another KwikINF hot key.

   o  Specify the number of OS/2 full-screen sessions enabled for KwikINF.

   o  Specify the name of the default online document KwikINF searches.

   o  Select the activation behavior of the KwikINF window.

 Use the push buttons on the Configure KwikINF window as follows:

   o  Press OK to enable your configuration choices.

   o  Press Cancel to cancel your configuration choices. This closes the
      Configure KwikINF window.

   o  Press Help to get general help for the current window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.3.3. Activation Key Sequence ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Activation Key Sequence provides a selectable list of KwikINF hot keys. To
access the list, single-click on the down arrow. Select the KwikINF hot key of
your choice from the following list:

 CTRL   + A

 CTRL   + H

 CTRL   + Q

 ALT    + A

 ALT    + Q (this is the default hot key)

 The KwikINF hot key initiates searches for information in online documents
 from anywhere on the desktop, with the exception of DOS or WIN-OS/2 sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.3.4. Full Screen Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Number of Fullscreen Sessions to Monitor spin button to specify the
number of OS/2 full-screen sessions enabled for KwikINF.  KwikINF is
implemented as a PM system hook to monitor keystrokes in PM sessions and as
OS/2 character device monitors to monitor keystrokes in OS/2 full-screen
sessions.  For OS/2 full-screen sessions, KwikINF will monitor only the number
of sessions specified here.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.3.5. Default Volume to Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Default Volume to Search single selection list box to specify which
online document in the BOOKSHELF you want KwikINF to search by default.
KwikINF looks for the Search String in this online document, when there is no
matching entry in the KwikINF index file. Select the online document, then
select the OK push button to activate the selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.3.6. Activation Behavior ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Activation Behavior radio buttons to select the behavior of the KwikINF
window. The KwikINF window can be displayed or bypassed when the user presses
the KwikINF hot key after KwikINF has been installed.

   o  Select the Display KwikINF Window radio button to tell KwikINF that you
      always want the KwikINF window to be displayed when you press the KwikINF
      hot key to initiate searches for information.  This is the default
      behavior of the KwikINF window.

      When the you press the KwikINF hot key, you can initiate a search for the
      text string that may be automatically displayed in the Search String
      entry field or for the text string that you enter into this field. You
      can also specify which online document in the BOOKSHELF KwikINF searches
      for the text string.

   o  Select the Bypass KwikINF Window radio button to tell KwikINF that you do
      not want the KwikINF window to be displayed when you press the KwikINF
      hot key to initiate searches for information. This is typically used when
      working under conditions where the KwikINF automatic text-retrieval
      feature is available.

      When you press the KwikINF hot key, KwikINF automatically looks for the
      text string under the cursor in the online document that has a matching
      entry in the KwikINF index file or, if there is no matching entry in the
      index file, in the Default volume selected from the Configure KwikINF
      window.

      You configure KwikINF by pressing the Configure push button in the
      KwikINF window. To configure KwikINF when this window is bypassed, press
      SHIFT + your KwikINF hotkey to display the Configure KwikINF window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.4. Searching Using the KwikINF Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have configured KwikINF to display the KwikINF window (this is the
default condition), the KwikINF window is displayed when you press your KwikINF
hot key.

The KwikINF window allows you to search for a text string in an online document
in the OS/2 BOOKSHELF.  The text string is typed by you in the Search String
entry field or is automatically retrieved by KwikINF, under certain conditions,
from under the cursor when you press your KwikINF hot key.

The online document that KwikINF searches for the text string is selected from
the Volume to Search list box by KwikINF or by you.  KwikINF selects the Volume
to Search by looking for the text string that has a matching entry in the
KwikINF index file or, if there is no matching entry in the index file, in the
Default Volume you have selected in the Configure KwikINF window.  Or you can
override KwikINF's selection of the Volume to Search by making your own
selection from the list box.

To initiate the search for the text string in the online document, press the
Search push button or press Enter. If the search is successful, KwikINF opens
the online document to the online panel that contains the information and
displays a window with a title bar that matches the search string.

If the search is not successful, you can search any online document for the
information by following this procedure:

   o  Clear the Search String entry field.

   o  Select an online document from the Volume to Search list box.  The
      Contents window of the online document appears.

   o  Select Services from the menu bar.

   o  Select Search from the Services pull down menu.  The Search help window
      appears.

   o  Type the text string, then select the All libraries radio button.

   o  Select the Search push button or press Enter.

 Use the push buttons on the KwikINF window as follows:

   o  Press Search to initiate the search for the text string in the Search
      String entry field in the selected online document.

   o  Press Cancel to cancel the request to search for the text string and to
      close the KwikINF window.

   o  Press Configure to display the Configure KwikINF window.

   o  Press Help to get general help for the current window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.4.1. Search String Entry Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

KwikINF searches for the text string in this entry field in the selected online
document in the OS/2 BOOKSHELF.

Under certain conditions, KwikINF automatically retrieves the word under the
cursor when you press your KwikINF hot key. Letters, numbers, underscores, and
the pound sign are retrievable by KwikINF. Blank spaces and other special
characters are used as delimiters and are not retrievable by KwikINF.

You may also type any text string you want into this field. All characters are
valid in the entry field to allow for special search criteria.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.4.2. VOLUME TO SEARCH List Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The KwikINF window includes a list box of all online documents stored in the
OS/2 BOOKSHELF subdirectories.  KwikINF initiates searches for information in
any online document in this list. The online document where KwikINF looks for
the Search String is selected from the Volume to Search list box by KwikINF or
by you.  KwikINF selects the Volume to Search by looking for the text string
that has a matching entry in the KwikINF index file or, if there is no matching
entry in the index file, in the Default Volume you have selected in the
Configure KwikINF window. Or you can override KwikINF's selection of the Volume
to Search by making your own selection from the list box.

You can also open and display the Contents of an online document by
double-clicking on an entry in this list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.4.3. KwikINF Keys Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use your KwikINF hot key (ALT+Q or the hot key you select from the Configure
KwikINF window) to display the KwikINF window. You can also use your KwikINF
hot key to initiate a search for a text string automatically, when you
configure KwikINF to bypass the KwikINF window.

To re-configure KwikINF, when you have configured KwikINF to bypass the KwikINF
window, press SHIFT + your KwikINF hot key.

To determine what your KwikINF hot key is, double-click on the KwikINF program
object in the OS/2 Toolkit Information folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Resource Compiler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 Resource Compiler (RC) is an application-development tool that lets
you add application resources, such as message strings, pointers, menus, and
dialog boxes, to the executable file of your application. The Resource Compiler
is primarily intended to prepare data for OS/2 applications that use functions
such as WinLoadString, WinLoadPointer, WinLoadMenu, and WinLoadDlg.  These
functions load resources from the executable file of your application or
another specified executable file.  The application can then use the loaded
resources as needed.

The Resource Compiler and the resource functions let you quickly define and/or
modify application resources without recompiling the application itself.  That
is, RC can modify the resources in an executable file at any time without
affecting the rest of the file. This means that you can create custom
applications from a single executable file - you just use RC to add the custom
resources you need to each application.

The Resource Compiler is especially important for international applications
because it lets you define all language-dependent data, such as message
strings, as resources.  Preparing the application for a new language is simply
a matter of adding new resources to the existing executable file.

Note:  Make sure the file RCPP.EXE (the Resource Compiler preprocessor) is
       available for the use of the Resource Compiler. It can be in the current
       directory, or in a directory to which there is a path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1. Command-Line Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following options can be specified on the Resource Compiler command line:

 -d<defname>[=<value>] Define macro to preprocessor
 -i <pathspec>       Include file path
 -r                  Create .res file
 -p                  Pack - 386 resources will not cross 64K boundaries.
 -cp (or -k)  {<codepage>|<lbs,lbe>...} -DBCS code page or lead byte
                     information
 -x[{1|2}]           Exepack - compress resources, using method 1 or 2.
 -cc <countrycode>   Country code
 -h                  Access Help

 Leave a blank after the letter when using option -cc, -D, -I , -cp or -k.
 Upper or lowercase can be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1.1. Explanation of Command-Line Options. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The -D option is useful for passing conditional-compilation flags to the
preprocessor. The <defname> is a sequence of letters, underscore symbols, and
digits which does not begin with a digit. The <value> is a sequence of symbols
which you want to substitute for the <defname> wherever it appears in the input
script file.  If you omit the =<value>, the <defname> will be set to the
default value 1. For example, the option -D_3d is equivalent to including at
the beginning of the input file this line:

#define   _3d     1

You can use the -D option up to eight times to define different macros from the
command line.

The -I option defines paths for files to be included with the source file. The
<pathspec> is any path where you want RC to search for files included by the
preprocessor #include directive.  The <pathspec> must not contain embedded
blanks.  To include more than one path, code the -I option once for each path.
The preprocessor reads paths from the INCLUDE environment after reading the
paths you provide with -I options.

The -r switch will create in your current directory a binary resource file
containing the resources you compile.  The -r switch takes no argument.  The
name given to this binary resource file will be the same as the name of the
input resource script file except that the extension will be .RES instead of
.RC. When you use -r, you do not bind resources to an executable file.

The -p switch is used only when binding resources to an executable.  It
positions resources so that they do not cross 64K boundaries.

The -cp or -k option is used to specify code page information for the resource
script file to be compiled. The <codepage> is a numeric code page value from
the Code Page Table. Instead of specifying a code page, you may provide a
sequence of pairs of DBCS lead byte code points.  Each pair of numbers gives
the lower and upper limit of a range of code points which are to be interpreted
as DBCS lead bytes. The code page must be valid for the country code in effect:
either the default country code or the country specified using the -CC option.

The -CC option allows you to specify a country code for the resource script
file to be compiled. The <countrycode> is a number from the table.  For more
information see Code Page Table.

The -X option is used only when binding resources to an executable.  It causes
resources to be compressed.  These resources will be decompressed automatically
when the resource is accessed.

The -X1 option causes Resource Compiler to use the compression algorithm that
is compatible with OS/2 2.0, 2.1, and 2.11.

The -X2 option causes Resource Compiler to use a compression algorithm that is
incompatible with OS/2 2.0, 2.1 and 2.11.  The -X2 option will produce smaller
executable files that can access resources faster.

-x with no number defaults to -X1.

When you give the -h switch, Resource Compiler will display on your screen a
summary of the available options and environment variables that it uses.  When
you give -h, Resource Compiler does not read any input files.  This is
equivalent to entering on the command line "RC" with no operands.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1.2. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display Resource Compiler help, type RC at the prompt, with no parameters.
The appropriate copyright statement will be displayed, along with a list of
Resource Compiler options. You can also display this list by using the
command-line option -h.

Usage:  rc [<options>] <.RC input file>[<.EXE output file>]

  -d defname        - Preprocessor define
  -Ddefname         - Preprocessor define
  -i                - Include file path
  -r                - Create .res file
  -x[1|2]           - Exepack-compress resources using method 1or 2
  -cc cc            - country code
  -p                - Pack - 386 resources will not cross 64K boundaries
  -cp cp | lb,tb,...- DBCS codepage or lead/trail byte information
  -h                - Access Help

Environment variables:
  DBCS=cp | lb,tb,...
  TMP=temporary file path
  TEMP=temporary file path
  INCLUDE=include file path

Note:  Option -X2 will produce executable files that are incompatible with OS/2
       2.0, 2.1, and 2.11.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.2. Resource Script Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This topic describes the resource script file used to define your application
resources and explains how to compile the file and add the resources to your
executable file.

Use the Resource Compiler to perform the following actions:

   o  Create a resource script file.

   o  Compile the file.

   o  Add the file to the executable file of your application (optional).

 The following sections describe the resource script file and the RC program.

 Resource Script Files

 A resource script file consists of one or more resource statements that define
 the type, identifier, and data for each resource.  For example, the following
 multiple-line resource statement defines a menu to be used with an
 application:

    MENU 1
    BEGIN
        MENUITEM "Alpha", 101
        MENUITEM "Beta", 102
    END

 A resource script file is a text file you can create by using an ordinary text
 editor.  Since some resources may contain binary data that cannot be created
 using a text editor, many resource statements let you specify additional files
 to include when compiling the resource script file. For example, the following
 statement defines an icon and specifies the file MYICON.ICO as containing the
 icon data:

    ICON 1 myicon.ico

 Directives

 A resource script file can also contain directives. For example, the following
 directive includes the header file OS2.H when RC processes the resource script
 file:

    #include <os2.h>

 Resource script files typically have the .RC filename extension. .RC is the
 default extension; use it for all your resource script files.

 Note:  Although the Resource Compiler is C-like in syntax, it is not a C
        compiler. Use only the Resource Compiler statements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.3. Directives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A directive is a Resource Compiler statement that carries out a task such as
including a header file, defining constants, or conditionally compiling
portions of the resource script file.

Directives

      elif Directive
      else Directive
      endif Directive
      if Directive
      ifdef Directive
      ifndef Directive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.3.1. Using the Resource Compiler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Resource Compiler (RC) compiles a resource script file to create a new file
called a binary resource file.

The binary resource file can be added to the executable file of the
application, replacing any existing resources in that file.

You can start RC in any of three ways.

   o  Compile and add a resource definition file to an executable file
   o  Compile a resource script file
   o  Add a binary resource file to an executable file

 The RC command line has the following three basic forms:

    rc resource-script-file [executable-file]

    rc resource-file [executable-file]

    rc -r  resource-script-file [resource-file]

 Note:  The third option does not add to the executable file.

 The resource-script-file field must be the filename of the resource script
 file to be compiled.  If the file is not in the current directory, you must
 provide a full path.  If you provide a filename without specifying a filename
 extension, RC automatically appends the .RC extension to the name.

 The executable-file field must be the name of the executable file to receive
 the compiled resources.  This is a file having a filename extension of either
 .EXE or .DLL.  If the file is not in the current directory, you must provide a
 full path.  If you omit the executable-file field, RC adds the compiled
 resources to the executable file that has the same name as the resource script
 file but which has the .EXE filename extension.  If you specify the
 executable-file field but omit the filename extension, RC will append the .EXE
 extension.  If this executable file does not exist, RC displays an error
 message.

 The -r option directs RC to compile the resource script file without adding it
 to an executable file.  You can use this option to prepare a binary resource
 file that you can add to an executable file at a later time.  If you do not
 explicitly name a binary resource file along with the -r option, RC uses the
 same name as the resource script file but with the .RES filename extension.

 The resource-file field must be the name of the binary resource file to be
 added to the executable file.  If the binary resource file does not already
 exist, RC creates it; otherwise, RC replaces the existing file.  If the file
 is not in the current directory, you must provide a full path.  The binary
 resource file must have the .RES filename extension.

 For example, to compile the resource script file EXAMPLE.RC, and add the
 result to the executable file EXAMPLE.EXE, use the following command:

    rc example

 You do not need to specify the .RC extension. RC creates the binary resource
 file EXAMPLE.RES and adds the compiled resource to the executable file
 EXAMPLE.EXE.

 To compile the resource script file EXAMPLE.RC into a binary resource file
 without adding the resources to an executable file, use the following command:

    rc -r example

 The compiler creates the binary resource file EXAMPLE.RES. To create a binary
 resource file that has a name different from the resource script file, use the
 following command:

    rc -r example newfile.res

 To add the compiled resources in the binary resource file EXAMPLE.RES to an
 executable file, use the following command:

    rc example.res

 To specify the name of the executable file, if the name is different from the
 resource file, use the following command:

    rc example.res newfile.exe

 To add the compiled resources to a dynamic-link-library (.DLL) file, use the
 following command:

    rc example.res dynalink.dll

 In addition to -r, RC offers two other command-line options: -cp and -cc.  The
 -cp option lets you specify a code-page identifier or DBCS lead byte
 information. The -cc option lets you specify a country code. The syntax is as
 follows:

    -cp {codepage-id | lead-byte-start, lead-byte-end,...}
    -cc country-code
 The lead-byte-start and lead-byte-end fields give the upper and lower limits
 of each interval of DBCS lead bytes which you are defining for the code page.
 You may specify these values instead of a codepage-id.

 The codepage-id or country-code field contains one of the valid code page or
 country codes, for example:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.3.2. Code Page Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéCODE-PAGE ID        ΓöéCOUNTRY CODE        ΓöéMEANING             Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé932                 Γöé81                  ΓöéJapan               Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé934                 Γöé82                  ΓöéKorea               Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé936                 Γöé86                  ΓöéChina               Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé938                 Γöé88                  ΓöéTaiwan              Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.4. Defining Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The -d option lets you define up to eight symbolic constants on the command
line.  The syntax is as follows:

  -d defname[=value]

In the previous example, defname is a name, and value is an integer constant,
or an expression. The -d option is useful for passing conditional-compilation
flags to the RC preprocessor.

The following example specifies a Japanese code-page identifier and also
defines two symbolic constants to be passed to the preprocessor as
conditional-compilation flags.

  rc -cp 932 -d DEBUG -d VERSION=2 example

Note:  To process directives in the resource script file, RC uses the files
RCPP.EXE and RCPP.ERR.  Be sure that these files are in the current directory
or in a directory specified by your PATH environment variable.  RC creates many
temporary files and writes them to the directory indicated by the TMP or TEMP
environment variable.  If RC cannot write these temporary files to this
directory, it writes them to the current directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.4.1. About Resource Statements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each resource statement consists of one or more keywords, numbers, character
strings, constants, or filenames.  You combine these to define the resource
type, identifier, and data.

Keywords are words that have a special meaning to the Resource Compiler. In a
statement, keywords specify the resource type, the load and memory options, and
the beginning and end of nested statements. You can use the RC keywords only as
specified in the statement syntax.

Keywords, except for those specifying directives, can be any combination of
uppercase and lowercase letters.  Note that the curly braces, { and }, are
reserved characters.  You can use them in place of the BEGIN and END keywords.

Numbers are integers that represent coordinates, dimensions, styles, and other
numeric data.  You can specify numbers in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal
notation:

      Decimal numbers must contain decimal digits but can start with a minus
      sign (-) when they represent a negative number.
      Hexadecimal numbers must contain hexadecimal digits (uppercase or
      lowercase) and must start with the characters 0x.
      Octal numbers are similar to hexadecimal numbers, except that a lowercase
      letter o replaces the x.

 The following example shows several numbers represented in decimal, octal, and
 hexadecimal notation:

  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
  ΓöéDECIMAL             ΓöéOCTAL               ΓöéHEXADECIMAL         Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé1                   Γöé0o1                 Γöé0x1                 Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé10                  Γöé0o12                Γöé0xA                 Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé255                 Γöé0o377               Γöé0xFF                Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé-1                  Γöé0o177777            Γöé0xFFFF              Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé65535               Γöé0o177777            Γöé0xFFFF              Γöé
  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

 Statements that create controls in dialog windows and menu items in menus
 require that you specify an identifier for each control or menu item.
 Statements that create controls also require you to specify coordinates and
 dimensions.  You specify identifiers, coordinates, and dimensions using
 integers in the range -32768 through 32767.  Optionally, you can use simple
 expressions that evaluate to integers from 0 through 65535; this lets you
 specify identifiers, dimensions, and coordinates that are relative to those of
 the corresponding dialog window or menu.

 Character strings represent names, labels, titles, and messages. A character
 string consists of one or more characters enclosed in double quotation marks.
 Character values must be in the range 1 through 255. If a double quotation
 mark (") is required in a string, you must include the double quotation mark
 twice.  The meaning of each character value (that is, the character each value
 represents) depends on the code page (character set) defined for the resource
 script file.

 The Resource Compiler interprets the backslash (\) as an escape character in
 character strings.  You can include any ASCII character in a character string
 by specifying either \xdd, where dd is the hexadecimal representation of an
 ASCII character, or \nnn, where nnn is the octal representation of an ASCII
 character.  If a backslash is required in a string, you must include the
 backslash twice.

 Constants are names that have been assigned values by using the define
 directive.  A constant can represent a number, a character string, or other
 data.  Most resource statements in a resource script file use constants, and
 many use the constants defined in the OS/2 header files (for example, os2.h).
 For this reason, you should always use the include directive to include OS2.H
 in your resource script file.

 Filenames are OS/2 filenames.  If the specified file is not in the current
 directory, you must specify the drive, directory, and filename.

 Resource statements have three basic forms:

      Single-line statements
      Multiple-line statements
      Directives

 Single-line statements consist of a keyword identifying the resource type, a
 constant or number specifying the resource identifier, and a filename
 specifying the file containing the resource data. For example, this ICON
 statement defines an icon resource:

    ICON 1 myicon.ico

 The icon resource has the icon identifier 1. The file MYICON.ICO contains the
 icon data.

 Multiple-line statements consist of a keyword identifying the resource type, a
 constant or number specifying the resource identifier, and, between the BEGIN
 and END keywords, additional resource statements that define the resource
 data. For example, this MENU statement defines a menu resource:

    MENU 1
    BEGIN
        MENUITEM "Alpha", 101
        MENUITEM "Beta",  102
    END

 The menu identifier is 1.  The menu contains two MENUITEM statements that
 define the contents of the menu.

 In multiple-line statements such as DLGTEMPLATE and WINDOWTEMPLATE, RC allows
 any level of nested statements.  For example, the DLGTEMPLATE and
 WINDOWTEMPLATE statements typically contain a single DIALOG or FRAME
 statement.  These statements can contain any number of WINDOW and CONTROL
 statements; the WINDOW and CONTROL statements can contain additional WINDOW
 and CONTROL statements; and so on.  The nested statements let you define
 controls and other child windows for the dialog boxes and windows.  If a
 nested statement creates a child window or control, the parent and owner of
 the new window is the window created by the containing statement.  (FRAME
 statements occasionally create frame controls whose parent and owner windows
 are not the same.)

 Directives consist of the reserved character # in the first column of a line,
 followed by the directive keyword and any additional numbers, character
 strings, or filenames.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.4.2. Binary Resource Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The binary resource file created by the Resource Compiler consists of one or
more resource entries, each in the following form:

  struct {
      UCHAR  fResType;
      USHORT usResType;
      UCHAR  fResID;
      USHORT resid;
      USHORT fsOptions;
      ULONG  cb;
      BYTE   bytes[1];
  };

The fields in each entry have the following meanings:

 fRestype              Specifies whether the resource-type identifier is a
                       string or an integer. For OS/2, the resource type is
                       always an integer and this field is set to 0xFF.

 usResType             Specifies the resource-type identifier. This value is an
                       integer in the range -32768 through 32767. The following
                       resource types are predefined:

 RT_ACCELTABLE         Accelerator table

 RT_BITMAP             Bitmap

 RT_CHARTBL            Character table

 RT_DIALOG             Dialog template

 RT_DISPLAYINFO        Display information

 RT_DLGINCLUDE         Dialog include-file name

 RT_FKALONG            Long-form function-key area

 RT_FKASHORT           Short-form function-key area

 RT_FONT               Font

 RT_FONTDIR            Font directory

 RT_HELPSUBTABLE       Help subtable

 RT_HELPTABLE          Help table

 RT_KEYTBL             Key table

 RT_MENU               Menu template

 RT_MESSAGE            Error-message table

 RT_POINTER            Mouse-pointer shape

 RT_RCDATA             Binary data

 RT_STRING             String table

 RT_VKEYTBL            Virtual key table

 fResID                Specifies whether the resource identifier is a string or
                       an integer.  For OS/2, the resource identifier is always
                       an integer and this field is set to 0xFF.

 resid                 Specifies the resource identifier.  This value is an
                       integer in the range -32768 through 32767.

 fsOptions             Specifies the load and memory options.  This value can
                       be a combination of the following:

      0x0010      MOVEABLE resource.  If not given, the resource is FIXED.
      0x0040      PRELOAD resource.  If not given, the resource is LOADONCALL.
      0x1000      DISCARDABLE resource.

 cb                    Specifies the size of the resource (in bytes).

 bytes                 Contains the resource.

 Note:  There is a size limitation of 65,280 bytes for a binary resource file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5. Statements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following statements and directives are used by the Resource Compiler (RC):

      ACCELTABLE Statement
      ASSOCTABLE Statement
      AUTOCHECKBOX Statement
      AUTORADIOBUTTON Statement
      BITMAP Statement
      CHECKBOX Statement
      CODEPAGE Statement
      COMBOBOX Statement
      CONTAINER Statement
      CONTROL Statement
      CTEXT Statement
      CTLDATA Statement
      DEFAULTICON Statement
      define Directive
      DEFPUSHBUTTON Statement
      DIALOG Statement
      DLGINCLUDE Statement
      DLGTEMPLATE Statement
      EDITTEXT Statement
      elif Directive
      else Directive
      endif Directive
      ENTRYFIELD Statement
      FONT Statement
      FRAME Statement
      GROUPBOX Statement
      HELPITEM Statement
      HELPSUBITEM Statement
      HELPSUBTABLE Statement
      HELPTABLE Statement
      ICON Statement (Resource)
      ICON Statement (Control)
      if Directive
      ifdef Directive
      ifndef Directive
      include Directive
      LISTBOX Statement
      LTEXT Statement
      MENU Statement
      MENUITEM Statement
      MESSAGETABLE Statement
      MLE Statement
      NOTEBOOK Statement
      POINTER Statement
      PRESPARAMS Statement
      PUSHBUTTON Statement
      RADIOBUTTON Statement
      RCDATA Statement
      RCINCLUDE Statement
      RESOURCE Statement
      RTEXT Statement
      SLIDER Statement
      SPINBUTTON Statement
      STRINGTABLE Statement
      SUBITEMSIZE Statement
      SUBMENU Statement
      undef Directive
      VALUESET Statement
      WINDOW Statement
      WINDOWTEMPLATE Statement


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.1. ACCELTABLE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

  ACCELTABLE acceltable-id [mem-option][code-page]
  BEGIN
  key-value, command[, accelerator-options]...
      .
      .
      .
  END

Description

The ACCELTABLE statement creates a table of accelerators for an application.
An accelerator is a keystroke that gives the user a quick way to choose a
command from a menu or carry out some other task.  An accelerator table can be
loaded when needed from the executable file by using the WinLoadAccelTable
function.

You can provide any number of ACCELTABLE statements in a resource script file.
Each statement must specify a unique table identifier.  You can provide any
number of accelerator definitions in an accelerator table; however, no two
definitions in a table can specify the same key.

Each accelerator definition must specify a key value and command. The
WinSetAccelTable function used in the application translates the accelerator
keystroke into a WM_COMMAND, WM_HELP, or WM_SYSCOMMAND message that has the
corresponding command value.  The message type depends on the
accelerator-option field.

 acceltable-id     Specifies the accelerator-table identifier.  This value must
                   be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.  Each
                   accelerator table in a resource script file must have a
                   unique identifier.
 mem-option        Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is in
                   memory.  This value must be one of the following:

      OPTION         Meaning
      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
                     This is the default option.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
 code-page         Specifies a code page value. For a list of valid code pages
                   see CODEPAGE Statement.
 key-value         Specifies the character, scan, or virtual-key code of the
                   accelerator key.  The meaning depends on the
                   accelerator-options field.  The key-value field must be a
                   single character enclosed in double-quotation marks or an
                   integer in the range 0 through 255. If you specify an
                   integer, you must specify the CHAR, SCANCODE, or VIRTUALKEY
                   accelerator option; otherwise, the default option is CHAR.
                   Integers must be in decimal or hexadecimal notation.
 command           Specifies the command value for the corresponding
                   WM_COMMAND, WM_HELP, or WM_SYSCOMMAND message.  This value
                   must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a
                   simple expression that evaluates to an integer in that
                   range.
 accelerator-options Specifies the accelerator type.  This value can be a
                   combination of the following:

      VIRTUALKEY      Specifies that the key-value field is a virtual-key code.
      SCANCODE        Specifies that the key-value field is a keyboard scan
                      code.
      CHAR            Specifies that the key-value field is a character code.
      SHIFT           Specifies that the user must press the Shift key and the
                      key corresponding to the key-value field to generate the
                      accelerator.
      CONTROL         Specifies that the user must press the Ctrl key and the
                      key corresponding to the key-value field to generate the
                      accelerator.
      ALT             Specifies that the user must press the Alt key and the
                      key corresponding to the key-value field to generate the
                      accelerator.
      LONEKEY         Specifies that the user needs to press only the key
                      corresponding to the key-value field to generate the
                      accelerator.
      SYSCOMMAND      Specifies that the accelerator translates to a
                      WM_SYSCOMMAND message.  If you do not include this
                      option, the accelerator translates to a WM_COMMAND
                      message.
      HELP            Specifies that the accelerator translates to a WM_HELP
                      message.  If you do not include this option, the
                      accelerator translates to a WM_COMMAND message.

 Note:  VIRTUALKEY, SCANCODE, and CHAR are mutually exclusive. SYSCOMMAND and
 HELP are also mutually exclusive.

 Comments

 If two accelerators use the same key with different Shift, Control, or ALT
 options, you should specify the more restrictive accelerator first in the
 table.  For example, you should place Shift+Enter before Enter.

 If you include the OS2.H header file, you can use the following constants to
 specify the accelerator options:

  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
  ΓöéAF_ALT              ΓöéAF_CHAR             ΓöéAF_CONTROL          Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓöéAF_HELP             ΓöéAF_LONEKEY          ΓöéAF_SCANCODE         Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓöéAF_SHIFT            ΓöéAF_SYSCOMMAND       ΓöéAF_VIRTUALKEY       Γöé
  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

 To combine these constants, you must use the bitwise OR (|) operator.

 Example

 This example creates an accelerator table whose accelerator-table identifier
 is 1.  The table contains two accelerators:  Ctrl+S and Ctrl+G.  These
 accelerators generate WM_COMMAND messages with values of 101 and 102,
 respectively, when the user presses the corresponding keys.

    ACCELTABLE 1
    BEGIN
        "S", 101, CONTROL
        "G", 102, CONTROL
    END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.2. ASSOCTABLE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

  ASSOCTABLE assoctable-id [load-option][mem-option][code-page]
  BEGIN
  association-name, file-match-string[, extended-attribute-flag]
    [, icon-filename]
    .
    .
    .
  END

Description

The ASSOCTABLE statement defines a file-association table for an application.
This table associates the data files that an application creates with the
executable file of the application.  When the user selects one of these data
files from File Manager, the associated application begins executing.

A file-association table can also associate icons with the data files that an
application creates.  The shell uses these icons to identify the data files
graphically.  Because a file-association table associates icons by file type,
all data files having the same file type have the same icon.

You can provide any number of ASSOCTABLE statements in a resource script file,
but each statement must specify a unique assoctable-id value.  The
file-association tables are written not only to the resources within your
executable file, but also to the .ASSOC extended attribute.  However, only the
last file-association table specified in the resource script file is actually
written to the extended attribute.

 assoctable-id     Specifies the association-table identifier.  This value must
                   be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 load-option       Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                   executable file into memory.  This value must be one of the
                   following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     DosGetResource or DosGetResource2 function.  This is the
                     default option.
 mem-option        Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is in
                   memory.  This value must be one of the following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
                     This is the default option.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
 code-page         Specifies a code page value.  For a list of valid code pages
                   see CODEPAGE Statement.
 association-name  Specifies the name of the file type the application
                   recognizes.  This field must contain zero or more characters
                   enclosed in double quotation marks.

                   Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.  If a
                   double quotation mark is required in the name, you must
                   include the double quotation mark twice.
 file-match-string Specifies the file-matching string of a particular type of
                   data file that the application creates. This field must
                   contain zero or more characters enclosed in double quotation
                   marks. You can only use characters that are valid in OS/2
                   filenames and extensions and the OS/2 wildcard characters
                   question mark (?) and asterisk (*).
 extended-attribute-flag Specifies the extended-attribute options. This value
                   can be a combination of the following:

      EAF_DEFAULTOWNER      Specifies that the application containing the
                            file-association table starts when the user selects
                            any file matching the file-match-string field from
                            File Manager.
      EAF_REUSEICON         Specifies that the icon defined in the previous
                            entry of the file-association table is used as the
                            icon for the current data-file type.
      EAF_UNCHANGEABLE      Specifies that the entry should not be edited.
 icon-filename     Specifies the name of the file containing an icon. File
                   Manager uses this icon to represent all application-created
                   data files matching the file-match-string field.  The file
                   must be in the current directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.3. AUTOCHECKBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

  AUTOCHECKBOX text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The AUTOCHECKBOX statement creates an automatic-check-box control. The control
is a small rectangle (check box) that contains an X when the user selects it.
The specified text is displayed to the right of the check box.  An X appears in
the square when the user first selects the control and disappears the next time
the user selects it.  The AUTOCHECKBOX statement, which you can use only in a
DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and
attributes of a control window.  The predefined class for this control is
WC_BUTTON. If you do not specify the style, the default style is
BS_AUTOCHECKBOX and WS_TABSTOP.

 text    Specifies text that is displayed to the right of the control.  This
         field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in double
         quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.
         If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you must include
         the double quotation mark twice.  A tilde ( ~ ) character in the text
         indicates that the following character is used as a mnemonic character
         for the control.  When the control is displayed, the tilde is not
         shown, but the mnemonic character is underlined.  The user can choose
         the control by pressing the key corresponding to the underlined
         mnemonic character.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_BUTTON. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates an automatic-check-box control that is labeled "Italic."

    AUTOCHECKBOX "Italic", 101, 10, 10, 100, 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.4. AUTORADIOBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

AUTORADIOBUTTON text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The AUTORADIOBUTTON statement creates an automatic-radio-button control.  This
control is a small circle with the given text displayed to its right.  The
control highlights the circle and sends a message to its parent window when the
user selects the button.  The control also removes the selection from any other
automatic-radio-button controls in the same group.  When the user selects the
button again, the control removes the highlight before sending a message.  The
AUTORADIOBUTTON statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW
statement, defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of a
control window.  The predefined class for this control is WC_BUTTON.  If you do
not specify a style, the default style is BS_AUTORADIOBUTTON.

 text    Specifies text that is displayed to the right of the control.  This
         field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in double
         quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.
         If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you must include
         the double quotation mark twice.  A tilde ( ~ ) character in the text
         indicates that the following character is used as a mnemonic character
         for the control.  When the control is displayed, the tilde is not
         shown, but the mnemonic character is underlined. The user can choose
         the control by pressing the key corresponding to the underlined
         mnemonic character.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range 32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_BUTTON. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates an automatic-radio-button control that is labeled
 "Italic."

    AUTORADIOBUTTON "Italic", 101, 10, 10, 24, 50


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.5. BITMAP Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

BITMAP bitmap-id [load-option] [mem-option] [codepage] filename

The BITMAP statement defines a bit map resource for an application.  A bit map
resource, typically created using the Icon Editor, is a custom bit map that an
application uses in its display or as an item in a menu.  The BITMAP statement
copies the bit-map resource from the file specified in the filename field and
adds it to the application's other resources.  A bit-map resource can be loaded
from the executable file when needed by using the GpiLoadBitmap function.

You can provide any number of BITMAP statements in a resource script file, but
each statement must specify a unique bitmap-id value.

 bitmap-id         Specifies the bit-map-resource identifier.  This value must
                   be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 load-option       Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                   executable file into memory.  This value must be one of the
                   following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     GpiLoadBitmap function.  This is the default option.
 mem-option        Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is in
                   memory.  This value must be one of the following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
                     This is the default option.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
 codepage          Specifies a code page value. For a list of valid code pages
                   see CODEPAGE Statement.
 filename          Specifies the name of the file containing the icon resource.
                   If the file is not in the current directory, filename must
                   be preceded by a full path.

 Example

 This example defines a bit map whose bit-map identifier is 12. The bit-map
 resource is copied from the file CUSTOM.BMP.

    BITMAP 12 custom.bmp


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.6. CHECKBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

CHECKBOX text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The CHECKBOX statement creates a check-box control.  The control is a small
rectangle (check box) that has the specified text displayed to the right.  The
control highlights the rectangle and sends a message to its parent window when
the user selects the control.  The CHECKBOX statement, which you can use only
in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and
attributes of a control window.  The predefined class for this control is
WC_BUTTON.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is BS_CHECKBOX and
WS_TABSTOP.

 text    Specifies text that is displayed to the right of the control.  This
         field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in double
         quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.
         If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you must include
         the double quotation mark twice.  A tilde ( ~ ) character in the text
         indicates that the following character is used as a mnemonic character
         for the control.  When the control is displayed, the tilde is not
         shown, but the mnemonic character is underlined.  The user can choose
         the control by pressing the key corresponding to the underlined
         mnemonic character.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_BUTTON. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a check-box control that is labeled "Italic."

    CHECKBOX "Italic", 101, 10, 10, 100, 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.7. CODEPAGE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

CODEPAGE codepage-id

The CODEPAGE statement sets the code page for all subsequent resources.  The
code page specifies the character set used for characters in the resource.

If the CODEPAGE statement is not given in a resource script file, RC uses the
code page set up for the individual system.  If more than one CODEPAGE
statement is given in the file, each CODEPAGE statement applies to the resource
statements between it and the next CODEPAGE statement.

 codepage-id       Identifies the code page to be used for subsequent
                   resources. This value can be one of the following:

      437  United States
      850  Multilingual
      860  Portuguese
      863  Canadian French
      865  Norwegian
      932  Japanese
      934  Korean
      936  Chinese
      938  Taiwan

 Comments

 You may also specify a code page by placing a code-page identifier in the
 load-options or memory-options field of any RC statement that uses those
 fields.

 Example

 In this example, the code page for the character-string resources is set to
 Portuguese (860).

    CODEPAGE 860

    STRINGTABLE
    BEGIN
        1 "Filename not found"
        2 "Cannot open file for reading"
    END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.8. COMBOBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

  COMBOBOX text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The COMBOBOX statement creates a combination-box control.  This control
combines a list-box control with an entry-field control.  It allows the user to
place the selected item from a list box into an entry field.

The COMBOBOX statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement,
defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of a control window.
The predefined class for this control is WC_COMBOBOX. If you do not specify a
style, the default style is CBS_SIMPLE, WS_GROUP, WS_TABSTOP, and WS_VISIBLE.

 text    Specifies text that is displayed in the entry field of the control.
         This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in double
         quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.
         If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you must include
         the double quotation mark twice.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_COMBOBOX. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a combination-box control.

    COMBOBOX "", 101, 10, 10, 24, 50


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.9. CONTAINER Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

CONTAINER  id, x, y, width, height [,style]

The CONTAINER statement creates a container control within a dialog window.
The container control is a visual component that holds objects.  The CONTAINER
statement defines the identifier, position, dimensions, and attributes of a
container control. The predefined class for this control is WC_CONTAINER.  If
you do not specify a style, the default style is WS_TABSTOP, WS_VISIBLE, and
CCS_SINGLESEL.

 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value is any integer -32768
         through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates to a value in
         that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window containing the container
         control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window containing the container
         control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value is any integer 0
         through 65535, or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The width is in n-character
         units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value is any integer 0
         through 65535, or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_CONTAINER. Use the bitwise OR (|) operator to
         combine styles.

 Comments

 A CONTAINER statement is only used in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.

 Example

 This example creates a container control at position (30,30) within the dialog
 window.  The container has a width of 70 character units and a height of 25
 character units.  Its resource ID is 301.  The default style CCS_SINGLESEL has
 been overridden by the style specification CCS_MULTIPLESEL.  The default
 styles WS_TABSTOP and WS_GROUP are both in effect, though only the latter is
 specified.

  #define IDC_CONTAINER    301
  #define IDD_CONTAINERDLG 504
  DIALOG "Container", IDD_CONTAINERDLG, 23, 6, 120, 280, FS_NOBYTEALIGN |
          WS_VISIBLE, FCF_SYSMENU | FCF_TITLEBAR
    BEGIN
       CONTAINER   IDC_CONTAINER, 30, 30, 70, 200, CCS_MULTIPLESEL |
                         WS_GROUP
    END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.10. CONTROL Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

  CONTROL text, id, x, y, width, height, class[, style]
  [ data-definitions ]
  [ BEGIN
  control-definition
      .
      .
      .
  END ]

The CONTROL statement defines a control as belonging to the specified class.
The statement defines the position and dimensions of the control within the
parent window, as well as the control style.  The CONTROL statement is most
often used in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.

Typically, several CONTROL statements are used in each DIALOG statement, and
each CONTROL statement must have a unique id value. The optional BEGIN and END
statements enclose any CONTROL statements that may be given with the control.
CONTROL statements given in this manner represent child windows belonging to
the control created by the CONTROL statement.

 text    Specifies text that is displayed to the right of the control.  This
         field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in double
         quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.
         If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you must include
         the double quotation mark twice.  In the appropriate styles, a tilde (
         ~ ) character in the text indicates that the following character is
         used as a mnemonic character for the control.  When the control is
         displayed, the tilde is not shown, but the mnemonic character is
         underlined.  The user can choose the control by pressing the key
         corresponding to the underlined mnemonic character.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the parent window.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the parent window.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The value is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The value is in
         1/8-character units.
 class   Specifies the control class.  This value can be one of the control
         classes specified in the "Control Classes" table, in the Presentation
         Manager Programming Reference, or the name of the control class,
         enclosed in double quotation marks.
 style   Specifies the control style.  This value can be a combination of
         control styles. You can use the bitwise OR (|) operator to combine
         styles.
 data-definitions Specifies a CTLDATA and/or PRESPARAMS statement. These
         statements define control and presentation data for the control. For
         more information, see CTLDATA Statement and PRESPARAMS Statement.
 control-definition Specifies a CONTROL statement or any one of several
         predefined control statements. These statements define the style,
         position, and dimensions of controls in the control.

 Comments

 The CONTROL statement can actually contain any combination of CONTROL, DIALOG,
 and WINDOW statements.  But typically, a CONTROL statement contains no such
 statements.

 Example

 This example creates a pushbutton control with the WS_TABSTOP and WS_VISIBLE
 styles.

    CONTROL "OK", 101, 10, 10, 20, 50, WC_BUTTON, BS_PUSHBUTTON |
                                                  WS_TABSTOP    |
                                                  WS_VISIBLE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.11. CTEXT Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

  CTEXT text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The CTEXT statement creates a centered-text control.  The control is a simple
rectangle displaying the given text centered in the rectangle.  The text is
formatted before it is displayed.  Words that would extend past the end of a
line are automatically wrapped to the beginning of the next line.  The CTEXT
statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the
text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of the control.  The predefined
class for this control is WC_STATIC.  If you do not specify a style, the
default style is SS_TEXT, DT_CENTER, and WS_GROUP.

 text    Specifies text that is centered in the rectangular area of the
         control.  This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in
         double quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1
         through 255.  If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you
         must include the double quotation mark twice.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_STATIC. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a centered-text control that is labeled "Filename."

    CTEXT "Filename", 101, 10, 10, 100, 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.12. CTLDATA Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

  CTLDATA word-value[, word-value][...]

  CTLDATA string

  CTLDATA MENU
  BEGIN
  menuitem-definition
     .
     .
     .
  END

The CTLDATA statement defines control data for a custom dialog box, window, or
control.  The statement has three basic forms to permit specifying a menu or
specifying data in words or characters.  The data can be in any format, since
only your window procedure will use it. The window procedure of the dialog box,
window, or control receives this data when the item is created.  It is up to
the window procedure to process the data.

 word-value     Specifies a 16-bit value.  This value must be an integer in the
                range -32768 through 32767.  It must be in decimal notation.
 string         Specifies a string of 8-bit characters.  This field must
                contain zero or more characters enclosed in double quotation
                marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.
                If a double quotation mark is required in the string, you must
                include the double quotation mark twice.
 menuitem-definition Specifies a MENUITEM or SUBMENU statement.  These
                statements define the individual commands or submenus in the
                given menu. For details about these statements, see MENUITEM
                Statement and SUBMENU Statement.

 Comments

 CTLDATA is often used to supply data that controls the subsequent operation of
 the custom window.  For example, the CTLDATA statement may contain extended
 style bits - that is, style bits designed specifically for your customized
 window.

 You should reserve the CTLDATA statement for window classes that you create
 yourself.

 Example

 This example creates a menu for the window created with the WINDOW statement.

    WINDOWTEMPLATE 1
    BEGIN
        WINDOW "Sample", 1, 0, 0, 100, 100, "MYCLASS", 0, FCF_STANDARD
        CTLDATA MENU
        BEGIN
            MENUITEM "Exit", 101
        END
    END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.13. DEFAULTICON STATEMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This statement installs the named icon file definition under the ICON Extended
Attribute of the program file.  An icon with an icon-id of 1 is the default
icon by default, unless you supply a different icon.

Example DEFAULTICON filename.ico


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.14. define Directive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

  define name value

The define directive assigns the given value to the specified name. All
subsequent occurrences of the name are replaced by the value.

 name    Specifies the name to be defined.  This value is any combination of
         letters, digits, and punctuation.
 value   Specifies any integer, character string, or line of text. This value
         can contain another defined name, which creates a level of nested
         defines.  You are limited to 64 levels of nested defines.

 Example

 This example assigns values to the names "NONZERO" and "USERCLASS".

    #define     NONZERO     1
    #define     USERCLASS   "MyControlClass"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.15. DEFPUSHBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

DEFPUSHBUTTON text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The DEFPUSHBUTTON statement creates a default pushbutton control. The control
is a round-cornered rectangle containing the given text. The rectangle has a
bold outline to represent that it is the default response for the user.  The
control sends a message to its parent window when the user chooses the control.
The DEFPUSHBUTTON statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW
statement, defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of the
control.  The predefined class for this control is WC_BUTTON.  If you do not
specify a style, the default style is BS_PUSHBUTTON, BS_DEFAULT, and
WS_TABSTOP.

 text    Specifies text that is centered in the rectangular area of the
         control.  This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in
         double quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1
         through 255.  If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you
         must include the double quotation mark twice.  A tilde ( ~ ) character
         in the text indicates that the following character is used as a
         mnemonic character for the control.  When the control is displayed,
         the tilde is not shown, but the mnemonic character is underlined. The
         user can choose the control by pressing the key corresponding to the
         underlined mnemonic character.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_BUTTON. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a default pushbutton control that is labeled "Cancel."

  DEFPUSHBUTTON "Cancel", 101, 10, 10, 24, 50


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.16. DIALOG Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

DIALOG text, id, x, y, width, height[, style[,
framectl]][data-definitions]
BEGIN
control-definition
    .
    .
    .
END

The DIALOG statement defines a window that an application can use to create
dialog boxes.  The statement defines the position and dimensions of the dialog
box on the screen, as well as the dialog-box style.  The DIALOG statement is
most often used in a DLGTEMPLATE statement.

Typically, you use only one DIALOG statement in each DLGTEMPLATE statement, and
the DIALOG statement contains at least one control definition.

 text        Specifies the dialog-box title if the style specifies a title bar.
             This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in double
             quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through
             255.  If a double quotation mark is required in the title, you
             must include the double quotation mark twice.
 id          Specifies the dialog-box identifier.  This value must be an
             integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression
             that evaluates to a value in that range.
 x           Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the dialog
             box.  This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through
             32767 or an expression consisting of integers and the addition (+)
             or subtraction (-) operator.  The value is in dialog units, but
             its exact meaning depends on the dialog style.  See the "Comments"
             section for details.
 y           Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the dialog
             box.  This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through
             32767 or an expression consisting of integers and the addition (+)
             or subtraction (-) operator.  The value is in dialog units, but
             its exact meaning depends on the dialog style.  See the "Comments"
             section for details.
 width       Specifies the width of the dialog box.  This value must be an
             integer in the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting
             of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The
             value is in n-character units.
 height      Specifies the height of the dialog box.  This value must be an
             integer in the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting
             of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The
             value is in 1/8-character units.
 style       Specifies the dialog-box style.  This value can be any of the
             window, dialog-box, or frame styles. You can use the bitwise OR
             (|) operator to combine styles.
 framectl    Specifies the styles for frame controls belonging to the dialog
             box.  This value can be any of the frame-control styles specified
             in the "Frame-Control Flags" table in the Presentation Manager
             Programming Reference. You can use the bitwise OR (|) operator to
             combine styles.
 data-definitions Specifies a CTLDATA and/or PRESPARAMS statement. These
             statements define control and presentation data for the dialog
             box.  For more information, see CTLDATA Statement and PRESPARAMS
             Statement.
 control-definition Specifies a CONTROL statement or any one of several
             predefined control statements.  These statements define the style,
             position, and dimensions of controls in the dialog box.

 Comments

 The exact meaning of the coordinates depends on the style defined by the style
 field.  For dialog boxes with FS_SCREENALIGN style, the coordinates are
 relative to the origin of the display screen.  For dialog boxes with the style
 FS_MOUSEALIGN, the coordinates are relative to the position of the mouse
 pointer at the time the dialog box is created.  For all other dialog boxes,
 the coordinates are relative to the origin of the parent window.

 The DIALOG statement can actually contain any combination of CONTROL, DIALOG,
 and WINDOW statements.  Typically, a DIALOG statement contains one or more
 CONTROL statements.

 Example

 This example creates a dialog box that is labeled "Disk Error."

  DLGTEMPLATE 1
  BEGIN
      DIALOG  "Disk Error", 100, 10, 10, 300, 110
      BEGIN
          CTEXT "Select One:", 1, 10, 80, 280, 12
          RADIOBUTTON "Retry", 2, 75, 50, 60, 12
          RADIOBUTTON "Abort", 3, 75, 30, 60, 12
          RADIOBUTTON "Ignore", 4, 75, 10, 60, 12
      END
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.17. DLGINCLUDE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

DLGINCLUDE id filename

The DLGINCLUDE statement adds the specified filename to the resource file.  The
DLGINCLUDE statement is typically used to let the application access the
definitions file for the dialog box with the corresponding identifier.  The
file named by filename must contain the define directives used by the dialog
box.

You can provide any number of DLGINCLUDE statements in a resource script file,
but each must have a unique identifier.

 id          Specifies the dialog-box identifier.  This value must be an
             integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression
             that evaluates to a value in that range.
 filename    Specifies the name of the file containing the define directives.
             If the file is not in the current directory, filename must be
             preceded by a full path.

 Example

 This example includes the name of the definition file dlgdef.h. The dialog-box
 identifier is 5.

  DLGINCLUDE 5 \\INCLUDE\\DLGREF.H


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.18. DLGTEMPLATE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

DLGTEMPLATE dialog-id  [load-option]  [mem-option][codepage]
BEGIN
dialog-definition
    .
    .
    .
END

The DLGTEMPLATE statement creates a dialog-box template.  A dialog-box template
consists of a series of statements that define the identifier, load and memory
options, dialog-box dimensions, and controls in the dialog box.  The dialog-box
template can be loaded from the executable file by using the WinLoadDlg
function.

You can provide any number of dialog-box templates in a resource script file,
but each template must have a unique dialog-id value.

 dialog-id         Specifies the dialog-box identifier.  This value must be an
                   integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 load-option       Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                   executable file into memory.  This value must be one of the
                   following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     WinLoadDlg function.  This is the default option.
 mem-option        Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is in
                   memory.  This value must be one or more of the following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
                   The default setting is MOVEABLE and DISCARDABLE.
 codepage          Specifies a code-page value.  For a list of valid code pages
                   see CODEPAGE Statement.
 dialog-definition Specifies a DIALOG statement. The statement defines the
                   dimensions and style of the given dialog box. For details
                   about the statement, see DIALOG Statement.

 Comments

 A DLGTEMPLATE statement can actually contain DIALOG, CONTROL, and WINDOW
 statements.  Typically, you include only one DIALOG statement.

 Example

 This example uses a DLGTEMPLATE statement to create a dialog box.

  DLGTEMPLATE ID_GETTIMER
  BEGIN
      DIALOG "Timer", 1, 10, 10, 100, 40
      BEGIN
          LTEXT "Time (0 - 15):", 4, 8, 24, 72, 12
          ENTRYFIELD "0", ID_TIME, 80, 28, 16, 8, ES_MARGIN
          DEFPUSHBUTTON "Enter", ID_TIMEOK, 10, 6, 36, 12
          PUSHBUTTON "Cancel", ID_TIMECANCEL, 52, 6, 40, 12
      END
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.19. EDITTEXT Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

EDITTEXT text, id, x, y, width, height [,style]

The EDITTEXT statement creates an entry-field control.  This control is a
rectangle in which the user can type and edit text. The control displays a
pointer when the user selects the control.  The user can then use the keyboard
to enter text or edit the existing text.  Editing keys include the BACKSPACE
and DELETE keys.  By using the mouse or the DIRECTION keys, the user can select
the character or characters to delete or select the place to insert new
characters.

The EDITTEXT statement defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes
of a control window.  The predefined class for this control is WC_ENTRYFIELD.
If you do not specify a style, the default style is ES_AUTOSCROLL and
WS_TABSTOP.

 text    Specifies text that is displayed in the rectangular area of the
         control.  This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in
         double quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1
         through 255.  If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you
         must include the double quotation mark twice.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value is any integer -32768
         through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates to a value in
         that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value is any integer -32768 through 32767, or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value is any integer -32768 through 32767, or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value is any integer 0
         through 65 535, or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The width is in n-character
         units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value is any integer 0
         through 65 535, or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_ENTRYFIELD.  You can use the bitwise OR ( | )
         operator to combine styles.

 Comments

 The EDITTEXT control statement is identical to the ENTRYFIELD control
 statement.

 Use the EDITTEXT statement only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.

 Example

 This example creates an entry-field control that is not labeled.

     EDITTEXT "", 101, 10, 10, 24, 50


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.20. elif Directive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

elif constant-expression

The elif directive marks an optional clause of a conditional-compilation block
defined by a ifdef, ifndef, or if directive.  The directive controls
conditional compilation of the resource file by checking the specified constant
expression.  If the constant expression is nonzero, elif directs the compiler
to continue processing statements up to the next endif, else, or elif directive
and then skip to the statement after endif.  If the constant expression is
zero, elif directs the compiler to skip to the next endif, else, or elif
directive.  You can use any number of elif directives in a conditional block.

 constant-expression   Specifies the expression to be checked.  This value is a
                       defined name, an integer constant, or an expression
                       consisting of names, integers, and arithmetic and
                       relational operators.

 Example

 In this example, elif directs the compiler to process the second BITMAP
 statement only if the value assigned to the name "Version" is less than 7.
 The elif directive itself is processed only if Version is greater than or
 equal to 3.

  #if Version < 3
  BITMAP 1 errbox.bmp
  #elif Version < 7
  BITMAP 1 userbox.bmp
  #endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.21. else Directive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:   else

The else directive marks an optional clause of a conditional-compilation block
defined by a ifdef, ifndef, or if directive.  The else directive must be the
last directive before the endif directive.

This directive has no arguments.

Example

This example compiles the second BITMAP statement only if the name "DEBUG" is
not defined.

    #ifdef DEBUG
        BITMAP 1 errbox.bmp
    #else
        BITMAP 1 userbox.bmp
    #endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.22. endif Directive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: endif

The endif directive marks the end of a conditional-compilation block defined by
a ifdef directive.  One endif is required for each if, ifdef, or ifndef
directive.

This directive has no arguments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.23. ENTRYFIELD Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ENTRYFIELD text, id, x, y, width, height , [style]

The ENTRYFIELD statement creates an entry-field control.  This control is a
rectangle in which the user can type and edit text.  The control displays a
pointer when the user selects the control.  The user can then use the keyboard
to enter text or edit the existing text. Editing keys include the BACKSPACE and
DELETE keys.  By using the mouse or the DIRECTION keys, the user can select the
character or characters to delete or select the place to insert new characters.
The ENTRYFIELD statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW
statement, defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of a
control window.  The predefined class for this control is WC_ENTRYFIELD.  If
you do not specify a style, the default style is ES_AUTOSCROLL and WS_TABSTOP.

 text    Specifies text that is displayed in the rectangular area of the
         control.  This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in
         double quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1
         through 255.  If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you
         must include the double quotation mark twice.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_ENTRYFIELD. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates an entry-field control that is not labeled.

  ENTRYFIELD "", 101, 10, 10, 24, 50


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.24. FONT Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

FONT font-id  [load-option][ mem-option] [codepage]  filename

The FONT statement defines a font resource for an application. A font resource,
typically created by using the OS/2 Font Editor, is a bit map defining the
shape of the individual characters in a character set.  The FONT statement
copies the font resource from the file specified in the filename field and adds
it to the other resources of the application.  A font resource can be loaded
from the executable file when needed by using the GpiLoadFonts function.

You can provide any number of FONT statements in a resource script file, but
each statement must specify a unique font-id value.

 font-id           Specifies the font-resource identifier.  This value must be
                   an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 load-option       Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                   executable file into memory.  This value must be one of the
                   following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     GpiLoadFonts function.  This is the default option.
 mem-option        Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is i
                   memory.  This value must be one or more of the following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
                   The default setting is MOVEABLE and DISCARDABLE.
 codepage          Specifies a code page value.  For a list of valid code pages
                   see CODEPAGE Statement.
 filename          Specifies the name of the file containing the font resource.
                   If the file is not in the current directory, filename must
                   be preceded by a full path.

 Example

 This example defines a font whose font identifier is 5. The font resource is
 copied from the file cmroman.fon.

  FONT 5 cmroman.fon


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.25. FRAME Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

FRAME text, id, x, y, width, height[, style[, framectl]]
  data-definitions
[ BEGIN
window-definition
    .
    .
    .
END ]

The FRAME statement defines a frame window.  The statement defines the title,
identifier, position, and dimensions of the frame window, as well as the window
style.  The FRAME statement is most often used in a WINDOWTEMPLATE statement,
and typically, only one FRAME statement is used.  The FRAME statement, in turn,
typically contains at least one WINDOW statement that defines the client window
belonging to the frame window.

The frame window has no default style.  You must use the framectl field to
define additional frame controls, such as a title bar and system menu, to be
created when the frame window is created.  If the text field is not empty, the
statement automatically adds a title-bar control to the frame window, whether
or not you specify the FCF_TITLEBAR style.  Frame controls are given default
styles and control identifiers depending on their class.  For example, a
title-bar control receives the identifier FID_TITLEBAR.

 text        Specifies the title of the frame window.  This field must contain
             zero or more characters enclosed in double quotation marks.
             Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.  If a double
             quotation mark is required in the name, you must include the
             double quotation mark twice.
 id          Specifies the window identifier.  This value must be an integer in
             the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that
             evaluates to a value in that range.
 x           Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the window.
             This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or
             an expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or
             subtraction (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in
             dialog units and is relative to the origin of the dialog box,
             window, or control containing the specified window.
 y           Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the window.
             This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or
             an expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or
             subtraction (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in
             dialog units and is relative to the origin of the dialog box,
             window, or control containing the specified window.
 width       Specifies the width of the window.  This value must be an integer
             in the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of
             integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The
             width is in n-character units.
 height      Specifies the height of the window.  This value must be a integer
             in the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of
             integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The
             height is in 1/8-character units.
 style       Specifies the frame and window styles.  This value can be a
             combination of frame styles. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
             operator to combine styles.
 framectl    Specifies the styles of frame controls belonging to the frame
             window.  This value can be a combination of the styles specified
             in the "Frame-Control Styles" table in the Presentation Manager
             Programmers Reference. You can use the bitwise OR (|) operator to
             combine styles.
 data-definitions Specifies a CTLDATA and/or PRESPARAMS statement.  These
             statements define control and presentation data for the frame
             window.  For more information, see CTLDATA Statement and
             PRESPARAMS Statement.
 window-definition Specifies a WINDOW statement or any one of several
             predefined control statements.  These statements define the style,
             position, and dimensions of windows or controls in the frame
             window.

 Comments

 The FRAME statement can actually contain any combination of CONTROL, DIALOG,
 and WINDOW statements.  Typically, a FRAME statement contains one WINDOW
 statement.

 Example

 This example creates a standard frame window, with a title bar, a system menu,
 minimize and maximize boxes, and a vertical scroll bar. The FRAME statement
 contains a WINDOW statement defining the client window belonging to the frame
 window.

  WINDOWTEMPLATE 1
  BEGIN
      FRAME "My Window", 1, 10, 10, 320, 130, 0,
              FCF_STANDARD | FCF_VERTSCROLL
      BEGIN
          WINDOW "", FID_CLIENT, 0, 0, 0, 0, "MyClientClass"
      END
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.26. GROUPBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

GROUPBOX text, id, x, y, width, height [, style]

The GROUPBOX statement creates a group-box control.  The control is a rectangle
that groups other controls together.  The controls are grouped by drawing a
border around them and displaying the given text in the upper-left corner.  The
GROUPBOX statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement,
defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of a control window.
The predefined class for this control is WC_STATIC.  If you do not specify a
style, the default style is SS_GROUPBOX and WS_TABSTOP.

 text    Specifies text that appears in the upper-left corner of the control.
         This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in double
         quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.
         If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you must include
         the double quotation mark twice.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_STATIC. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a group-box control that is labeled "Options."

  GROUPBOX "Options", 101, 10, 10, 100, 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.27. HELPITEM Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

HELPITEM application-window-id, help-subtable-id, extended-helppanel-id

The HELPITEM statement defines the help items in a help table.  The statement,
permitted only in a HELPTABLE statement, specifies the resource identifier of
an application window for which help is provided, and the resource identifiers
of the help subtable and extended help panel associated with the application
window.

You can provide any number of HELPITEM statements in a HELPTABLE statement.
You should provide one HELPITEM statement for each application window for which
help is provided.

 application-window-id    Specifies the resource identifier of an application
                          window for which help is provided.
 help-subtable-id         Specifies the resource identifier of the help
                          subtable associated with the specified application
                          window.
 extended-helppanel-id    Specifies the resource identifier of the extended
                          help panel associated with the specified application
                          window.

 Example

 This example defines a help item that associates a help subtable called
 IDSUB_FILEMENU and an extended help panel called IDEXT_APPHLP with an
 application window called IDWIN_FILEMENU.

  HELPITEM IDWIN_FILEMENU, IDSUB_FILEMENU, IDEXT_APPHLP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.28. HELPSUBITEM Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

HELPSUBITEM child-window-id, helppanel-id [ , integer...]

The HELPSUBITEM statement defines the help subitems in a help subtable.  This
statement, which is permitted only in a HELPSUBTABLE statement, specifies the
identifier of a child window for which help is provided, the identifier of the
help panel associated with the child window, and one or more optional,
application-defined integers.

You can provide any number of HELPSUBITEM statements in a HELPSUBTABLE
statement.  You should provide one HELPSUBITEM statement for each child window
for which help is provided.

 child-window-id     Specifies the resource identifier of the child window for
                     which help is provided.
 helppanel-id        Specifies the resource identifier of the help panel
                     associated with the specified child window.
 integer             Specifies optional, application-defined integers.  If you
                     use this field, you must include the SUBITEMSIZE statement
                     in the help subtable to specify the size, in words, of
                     each help subitem in the help subtable. For details about
                     this statement, see SUBITEMSIZE Statement.

 Example

 This example defines a help subitem that associates a child window called
 IDCLD_FILEMENU with a help panel called IDHP_FILEMENU.

  HELPSUBITEM IDCLD_FILEMENU, IDHP_FILEMENU


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.29. HELPSUBTABLE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

HELPSUBTABLE helpsubtable-id
 SUBITEMSIZE size
BEGIN
helpsubitem-definition
    .
    .
    .
END

The HELPSUBTABLE statement defines the contents of a help-subtable resource.  A
help-subtable resource contains a help-subitem entry for each item that can be
selected in an application window.  Each of these items should be a child
window of the application window specified in the help-table resource.  The
help subtable should contain a help subitem for each control, child window, and
menu item in the application window.

You can provide any number of HELPSUBTABLE statements in a resource script
file, but each statement must specify a unique helpsubtable-id value.  You can
also provide any number of helpsubitem-definition statements in the help
subtable.  These specify the child window for which help is provided, the help
panel containing the help text for the child window, and one or more
application-defined integers.

If you include optional integers in the helpsubitem-definition statements, you
must also include a SUBITEMSIZE statement to specify the size, in words, of
each help subitem.  All help subitems in a help subtable must be the same size.
The default size is two words per help subitem.

 helpsubtable-id
      Specifies the resource identifier of the help subtable.  This value must
      be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression
      that evaluates to a value in that range.
 helpsubitem-definition
      Specifies a HELPSUBITEM statement.  A HELPSUBITEM statement specifies a
      child window, the help panel associated with the child window, and one or
      more optional, application-defined integers.  For details about this
      statement, see HELPSUBITEM Statement.

 Example

 This example creates a help-subtable resource whose help-subtable identifier
 is IDSUB_FILEMENU.  Each HELPSUBITEM statement specifies a child window and a
 help panel.

  HELPSUBTABLE IDSUB_FILEMENU
  BEGIN
      HELPSUBITEM IDCLD_OPEN, IDPNL_OPEN
      HELPSUBITEM IDCLD_SAVE, IDPNL_SAVE
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.30. HELPTABLE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

HELPTABLE helptable-id
BEGIN
helpitem-definition
    .
    .
    .
END

The HELPTABLE statement defines the contents of a help-table resource. A
help-table resource contains a help-item entry for each application window,
dialog box, and message box for which help is provided.

You can provide any number of HELPTABLE statements in a resource script file,
but each statement must specify a unique helptable-id value.  You can also
provide any number of helpitem-definition statements in the help table.  These
specify the application windows for which help is provided, the help subtables
associated with each application window, and the extended help panels
associated with each application window.

 helptable-id          Specifies the resource identifier of the help table.
                       This value must be an integer in the range -32768
                       through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates to
                       a value in that range.
 helpitem-definition   Specifies a HELPITEM statement. A HELPITEM statement
                       specifies an application window and the associated help
                       subtable and extended help panel. For details about this
                       statement, see HELPITEM Statement.

 Example

 This example creates a help-table resource whose help-table identifier is 1.
 Each HELPITEM statement specifies an application window, a help subtable, and
 an extended help panel.

  HELPTABLE 1
  BEGIN
      HELPITEM IDWIN_FILEMENU, IDSUB_FILEMENU, IDEXT_APPHLP
      HELPITEM IDWIN_EDITMENU, IDSUB_EDITMENU, IDEXT_APPHLP
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.31. ICON Statement (Resource) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

ICON icon-id  [load-option]  [ mem-option] [codepage] filename

This form of the ICON statement defines an icon resource for an application.
An icon resource, typically created by using Icon Editor, is a bit map defining
the shape of the icon to be used for a given application.  The ICON statement
copies the icon resource from the file specified in the filename field and adds
it to the application's other resources.  An icon resource can be loaded when
creating a window by using the WinCreateStdWindow function with the FS_ICON
style.

You can provide any number of ICON statements in a resource script file, but
each statement must specify a unique icon-id value.

 icon-id           Specifies the icon-resource identifier.  This value must be
                   an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.  A
                   icon-id of 1 has a special meaning; for details, see the
                   "Comment" section.
 load-option       Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                   executable file into memory.  This value must be one of the
                   following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     WinCreateStdWindow function.  This is the default option.
 mem-option        Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is in
                   memory.  This value must be one or more of the following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
                   The default setting is MOVEABLE and DISCARDABLE.
 codepage          Specifies a code page value.  For a list of valid code pages
                   see CODEPAGE Statement.
 filename          Specifies the name of the file containing the icon resource.
                   If the file is not in the current directory, filename must
                   be preceded by a full path.

 Comments

 An icon with an icon-id of 1 is the default icon.  The RC program writes the
 icon not only to the resources in your executable file, but also as the .ICON
 extended attribute.  File Manager will display this icon next to the name of
 the executable file.

 Example

 This example defines an icon whose icon identifier is 11.  The icon resource
 is copied from the file custom.ico.

  ICON 11 custom.ico


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.32. ICON Statement (Control) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

ICON icon-id, id, x, y, width, height , [style]

This form of the ICON statement creates an icon control.  This control is an
icon displayed in a dialog box.  The ICON statement, which you can use only in
a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the icon-resource identifier,
icon-control identifier, position, and attributes of a control window.  The
predefined class for this control is WC_STATIC.  If you do not specify a style,
the default style is SS_ICON.  For the ICON statement, the width and height
fields are ignored; the icon automatically sizes itself.

 icon-id   Specifies the resource identifier of an icon that is defined
           elsewhere in the resource file.
 id        Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
           the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that
           evaluates to a value in that range.
 x         Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
           This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or
           an expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or
           subtraction (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog
           units and is relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or
           control containing the specified control.
 y         Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
           This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or
           an expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or
           subtraction (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog
           units and is relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or
           control containing the specified control.
 width     Specifies a reserved value.  Can be set to zero.
 height    Specifies a reserved value.  Can be set to zero.
 style     Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of
           the styles specified for WC_STATIC. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
           operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates an icon control whose icon identifier is 99.

  ICON 99, 101, 10, 10, 0, 0


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.33. if Directive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

if constant-expression

The if directive controls conditional compilation of the resource file by
checking the specified constant expression.  If the constant expression is
nonzero, if directs the compiler to continue processing statements up to the
next endif, else, or elif directive and then skip to the statement after the
endif directive.  If the constant expression is zero, if directs the compiler
to skip to the next endif, else, or elif directive.

 constant-expression   Specifies the expression to be checked.  This value is a
                       defined name, an integer constant, or an expression
                       consisting of names, integers, and arithmetic and
                       relational operators.

 Example

 This example compiles the BITMAP statement only if the value assigned to the
 name "Version" is less than 3.

  #if Version < 3
  BITMAP 1 errbox.bmp
  #endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.34. ifdef Directive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: ifdef name

The ifdef directive controls conditional compilation of the resource file by
checking the specified name.  If the name has been defined by using a define
directive or by using the -d command-line option of rc, ifdef directs the
compiler to continue with the statement immediately after the ifdef directive.
If the name has not been defined, ifdef directs the compiler to skip all
statements up to the next endif directive.

 name    Specifies the name to be checked by the directive.

 Example

 This example compiles the BITMAP statement only if the name "Debug" is
 defined.

  #ifdef Debug
  BITMAP 1 errbox.bmp
  #endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.35. ifndef Directive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: ifndef name

The ifndef directive controls conditional compilation of the resource file by
checking the specified name.  If the name has not been defined or if its
definition has been removed by using the undef directive, ifndef directs the
compiler to continue processing statements up to the next endif, else, or elif
directive and then skip to the statement after the endif directive.  If the
name is defined, ifndef directs the compiler to skip to the next endif, else,
or elif directive.

 name    Specifies the name to be checked by the directive.

 Example

 This example compiles the BITMAP statement only if the name "Optimize" is not
 defined.

  #ifndef Optimize
  BITMAP 1 errbox.bmp
  #endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.36. include Directive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

include filename

The include directive causes RC to process the file specified in the filename
field.  This file should be a header file that defines the constants used in
the resource script file.  Only the define directives in the specified file are
processed; all other statements are ignored.

 filename    Specifies the OS/2 name of the file to be included.  This value
             must be an ASCII string enclosed either in double quotation marks
             (if the file is in the current directory) or in less-than and
             greater-than characters (<>) (if the file is in the directory
             specified by -i command-line options or by the INCLUDE environment
             variable).  You must give a full path enclosed in double quotation
             marks if the file is not in the current directory or in the
             directory specified by -i command-line  options or by the INCLUDE
             environment variable.

 Comments

 The filename field is handled as a C string.  Therefore, you must include two
 backslashes wherever one is required in the path.  (As an alternative, you can
 use a single forward slash (/) instead of two backslashes.)

 Example

 This example processes the header files OS2.H and HEADERS\MYDEFS.H\I while
 compiling the resource script file.

  #include <os2.h>
  #include "headers\\\\mydefs.h"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.37. LISTBOX Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

LISTBOX id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The LISTBOX statement creates commonly used controls for a dialog box or
window.  The control is a rectangle containing a list of user-selectable
strings, such as filenames.

The LISTBOX statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement,
defines the identifier, dimensions, and attributes of a control window.  The
predefined class for this control is WC_LISTBOX.  If you do not specify a
style, the default style is WS_TABSTOP.

 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_LISTBOX. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a list-box control whose identifier is 101.

  LISTBOX 101, 10, 10, 100, 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.38. LTEXT Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

LTEXT text, id, x, y, width, height[ , style]

The LTEXT statement creates a left-aligned text control.  The control is a
simple rectangle displaying the given text left-aligned in the rectangle.  The
text is formatted before it is displayed.  Words that would extend past the end
of a line are automatically wrapped to the beginning of the next line.  The
LTEXT statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement,
defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of the control.  The
predefined class for this control is WC_STATIC.  If you do not specify a style,
the default style is SS_TEXT, DT_LEFT, and WS_GROUP.

 text    Specifies text that is left-aligned in the rectangular area of the
         control.  This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in
         double quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1
         through 255.  If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you
         must include the double quotation mark twice.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_STATIC. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a left-aligned text control that is labeled "Filename."

  LTEXT "Filename", 101, 10, 10, 100, 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.39. MENU Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

MENU menu-id  [load-option][ mem-option][codepage]
BEGIN
menuitem-definition
    .
    .
    .
END

The MENU statement defines the contents of a menu resource.  A menu resource is
a collection of information that defines the appearance and function of an
application menu.  A menu is a special input tool that lets a user choose
commands from a list of command names.  A menu resource can be loaded from the
executable file when needed by using the WinLoadMenu function.

You can provide any number of MENU statements in a resource script file, but
each statement must specify a unique menu-id value.  You can provide any number
of menuitem-definition statements in the menu. These define the submenus and
menu items (commands) in the menu.  The order of the statements defines the
order of the menu items.

 menu-id               Specifies the menu-resource identifier.  This value must
                       be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a
                       simple expression that evaluates to a value in that
                       range.
 load-option           Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                       executable file into memory.  This value must be one of
                       the following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     WinLoadMenu function. This is the default option.
 mem-option            Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is
                       in memory.  This value must be one or more of the
                       following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
                       The default setting is MOVEABLE and DISCARDABLE.
 codepage              Specifies a codepage value.  For a list of valid code
                       pages see CODEPAGE Statement.
 menuitem-definition   Specifies a PRESPARAMS, MENUITEM, or SUBMENU statement.
                       You can use one or more PRESPARAMS statements to control
                       the appearance of a menu, such as the font and the
                       foreground and background colors.  If used, PRESPARAMS
                       statements must be the first statements following the
                       BEGIN keyword.  For details about the PRESPARAMS
                       statement, see PRESPARAMS Statement.

                       MENUITEM and SUBMENU statements define the individual
                       commands or submenus in the given menu.  For details
                       about these statements, see MENUITEM Statement and
                       SUBMENU Statement.

 Example

 This example creates a menu resource whose menu identifier is 1. The menu
 contains a menu item named Alpha and a submenu named Beta. The submenu
 contains two menu items, Item 1 and Item 2.

  MENU 1
  BEGIN
      MENUITEM "Alpha", 100
      SUBMENU "Beta", 101
      BEGIN
          MENUITEM "Item 1", 200
          MENUITEM "Item 2", 201, , MIA_CHECKED
      END
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.40. MENUITEM Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

MENUITEM text, menu-id[,  menuitem-style][,menuitem-attribute]

MENUITEM SEPARATOR

The MENUITEM statement creates a menu item for a menu.  The statement,
permitted only in a MENU or SUBMENU statement, defines the text, identifier,
and attributes of a menu item.  The system displays the text when it displays
the corresponding menu.  If the user chooses the menu item, the system
generates a WM_COMMAND message that includes the specified menu-item identifier
and sends it to the window owning the menu.

You can provide any number of MENUITEM statements, but each must have a unique
menu-id value.

The alternative form of the MENUITEM statement, MENUITEM SEPARATOR, creates a
menu separator.  A menu separator is a horizontal dividing bar between two menu
items in a submenu.  The separator is not active - that is, the user cannot
choose it, it has no text associated with it, and it has no identifier.

 text              Specifies the text of the menu item.  This field must
                   contain zero or more characters enclosed in double quotation
                   marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.
                   If a double quotation mark is required in the string, you
                   must include the double quotation mark twice.  The tilde
                   character ( ~ ) and the \t and \a character combinations
                   have special meanings in the string; for details, see the
                   "Comments" section.

                   If the menuitem-style field is MIS_BITMAP, item-name must be
                   a bit-map identifier instead of a name. The bit-map
                   identifier must have been previously defined using a BITMAP
                   statement, must be preceded by the \b character, and must be
                   enclosed in double quotation marks.
 menu-id           Specifies the menu-item identifier.  This value must be an
                   integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.  Each
                   identifier must be unique.
 menuitem-style    Specifies the menu-item style.  This value can be a
                   combination of the following:

      MIS_BITMAP          Specifies that item-name is a bit map identifier.
      MIS_BREAK           Specifies that the menu has multiple columns of items
                          in one pull-down menu or multiple lines of menus in
                          the top-level menu.
      MIS_BREAKSEPARATOR  Specifies that the menu has a vertical line between
                          the columns in a pull-down menu.
      MIS_BUTTONSEPARATOR Specifies that the user can activate the menu item
                          only by using the mouse.  The text is centered in the
                          item, rather than left justified.  This option is
                          used for the Help item on the right side of the menu
                          bar.
      MIS_HELP            Specifies that the menu item generates a WM_HELP
                          message.
      MIS_OWNERDRAW       Specifies that the menu item is drawn by the owner
                          window.
      MIS_SEPARATOR       Specifies that the menu item is a menu separator.
                          Although the item-name and menu-id fields are
                          ignored, you must still give values if you specify
                          this style.
      MIS_STATIC          Specifies that the user cannot choose the menu item.
      MIS_SUBMENU         Specifies that the MENUITEM statement is to be
                          treated as a SUBMENU statement.  When you specify
                          this option, you must follow the MENUITEM statement
                          with a BEGIN and END clause, as in a SUBMENU
                          statement.  You may include a PRESPARAMS statement
                          immediately after the BEGIN keyword.
      MIS_SYSCOMMAND      Specifies that the menu item generates a
                          WM_SYSCOMMAND message.
      MIS_TEXT            Specifies that item-name is a character string.  This
                          is the default option.
 menuitem-attribute Specifies the menu-item attributes.  This value can be a
                   combination of the following:

      MIA_CHECKED         Places a check mark next to the menu-item name.
      MIA_DISABLED        Disables the menu item, preventing the system from
                          generating a message when the user chooses the
                          command.
      MIA_FRAMED          Places a frame (heavy border) around the menu item.
      MIA_HILITED         Places a highlight on the menu-item name when it is
                          displayed, by inverting the name and background.
      MIA_NODISMISS       Causes a submenu or menu item to remain displayed
                          after the user chooses an item.

 Comments

 You can use the \t or \a character combination in any item name. The \t
 character inserts a tab when the name is displayed and is typically used to
 separate the menu-item name from the name of an accelerator key.  The \a
 character aligns to the right all text that follows it.  These characters are
 intended to be used for menu items in submenus only.  The width of the
 displayed submenu is always adjusted so that there is at least one space (and
 usually more) between any pieces of text separated by a \t or a \a.  (When
 compiling the menu resource, the compiler stores the \t and \a characters as
 control characters.  For example, the \t is stored as 0x09.)

 A tilde ( ~ ) character in the item name indicates that the following
 character is used as a mnemonic character for the item. When the menu is
 displayed, the tilde is not shown, but the mnemonic character is underlined.
 The user can choose the menu item by pressing the key corresponding to the
 underlined mnemonic character.

 Example

 This example creates a menu item named Alpha.  The item identifier is 101.

  MENUITEM "Alpha", 101

 This example creates a menu item named Beta.  The item identifier is 102. The
 menu item has a text style and a checked attribute.

  MENUITEM "Beta", 102, MIS_TEXT, MIA_CHECKED

 This example creates a menu separator between menu items named Gamma and
 Delta.

  MENUITEM "Gamma", 103
  MENUITEM SEPARATOR
  MENUITEM "Delta", 104

 This example creates a menu item that has a bit map instead of a name. The
 bit-map identifier, 1, is first defined using a BITMAP statement. The
 identifier for the menu item is 301.  Note that a sign must be placed in front
 of the bit map identifier in the MENUITEM statement.

  BITMAP 1 mybitmap.bmp

  MENUITEM "#1", 301, MIS_BITMAP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.41. MESSAGETABLE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

MESSAGETABLE  [load-option]  [ mem-option][codepage]
BEGIN
string-id string-definition
    .
    .
    .
END

The MESSAGETABLE statement creates one or more string resources for an
application.  A string resource is a null-terminated character string that has
a unique string identifier.  A string resource can be loaded from the
executable file when needed by using the DosGetResource function with the
RT_MESSAGE resource type. RT_MESSAGE resources are bundled together in groups
of 16, with any missing IDs replaced with zero length strings. Each group, or
bundle, is assigned a unique sequential ID. The resource string ID is not
necessarily the same as the ID specified when using DosGetResource. The formula
for calculating the ID of the resource bundle, for use in DosGetResource, is as
follows:

bundle ID = ( id / 16) +1,
where id is the string ID assigned in the RC file.

Thus, bundle 1 contains strings 0 to 15, bundle 2 contains strings 16 to 31,
and so on. Once the address of the bundle has been returned by DosGetResource
(using the calculated ID), the buffer can be parsed to locate the particular
string within the bundle. The number of the string is calculated by the
formula:

string = id % 16
(string = remainder for id/16).

The buffer returned consists of the CodePage of the strings in the first
USHORT, followed by the 16 strings in the bundle. The first BYTE of each string
is the length of the string (including the null terminator), followed by the
string and the terminator. A zero length string is represented by two bytes:
01 (string length) followed by the null terminator.

You can provide any number of MESSAGETABLE statements in a resource script
file.  The compiler treats all the strings from the various MESSAGETABLE
statements as if they belonged to a single statement. This means that no two
strings in a resource script file can have the same string identifier.

Although the MESSAGETABLE and STRINGTABLE statements are nearly identical, most
applications use the STRINGTABLE statement instead of the MESSAGETABLE
statement to create string resources.

 load-option    Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                executable file into memory.  This value must be one of the
                following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     DosGetResource or DosGetResource2 function.  This is the
                     default option.
 mem-option     Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is in
                memory.  This value must be one or more of the following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
                The default setting is MOVEABLE and DISCARDABLE.
 codepage       Specifies a code page value.  See CODEPAGE Statement for a list
                of valid code pages.
 string-id      Specifies the character-string identifier.  This value must be
                an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                expression that evaluates to a value in that range.  The value
                can be specified in decimal or hexadecimal notation.  Each
                string identifier in a resource script file must be unique.
 string-definition Specifies a character string.  This field must contain zero
                or more characters enclosed in double quotation marks.
                Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.  If a
                double quotation mark is required in the string, you must
                provide the double quotation mark twice.

 Comments

 You can continue a string on multiple lines by terminating the line with a
 backslash (\) or by terminating the line with a double quotation mark (") and
 then starting the next line with a double quotation mark.

 Example

 This example creates two string resources whose string identifiers are 1 and
 2.

  MESSAGETABLE
  BEGIN
      1 "Filename not found"
      2 "Cannot open file for reading"
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.42. MLE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

MLE text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The MLE statement creates a multiple-line entry-field control.  The control is
a rectangle in which the user can type and edit multiple lines of text.  The
control displays a pointer when the user selects it.  The user can then use the
keyboard to enter text or edit the existing text.  Editing keys include the
BACKSPACE and DELETE keys. By using the mouse or the DIRECTION keys, the user
can select the character or characters to delete or select the place to insert
new characters.  The MLE statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or
WINDOW statement, defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of a
control window.  The predefined class for this control is WC_MLE.  If you do
not specify a style, the default style is MLS_BORDER, WS_GROUP, and WS_TABSTOP.

 text    Specifies text that is displayed in the rectangular area of the
         control.  If the MLS_READONLY style is not specified, the user can
         edit the text.  This field must contain zero or more characters
         enclosed in double quotation marks.  Character values must be in the
         range 1 through 255.  If a double quotation mark is required in the
         text, you must include the double quotation mark twice.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_MLE. You can use the bitwise OR (|) operator
         to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a multiple-line entry-field control that is not labeled.

  MLE "", 101, 10, 10, 50, 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.43. NOTEBOOK Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

NOTEBOOK   id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The NOTEBOOK statement creates a notebook control within the dialog window.
This control is used to organize information on individual pages so that it can
be located and displayed easily. The NOTEBOOK statement defines the identifier,
position, dimensions, and attributes of a notebook control. The predefined
class for this control is WC_NOTEBOOK. If you do not specify a style, the
default style is WS_TABSTOP and WS_VISIBLE.

 id      Specifies the control identifier.  The value is any integer -32768
         through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates to a value in
         that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         The value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         The value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  The value is any integer 0
         through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The width is in n-character
         units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  The value is any integer 0
         through 65535 or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_NOTEBOOK.  You can use the bitwise OR ( | )
         operator to combine styles.

 Comments

 The NOTEBOOK statement is used only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.

 Example

 This example creates a notebook control at position (20, 20) within the dialog
 window.  The notebook has a width of 200 character units and a height of 50
 character units.  Its resource ID is 201. The tabs style BKS_ROUNDEDTABS
 specification overrides the notebook default style of square tabs. The default
 styles WS_TABSTOP and WS_GROUP are both in effect, though only the latter is
 specified.

  #define    IDC_NOTEBOOK     201
  #define    IDD_NOTEBOOKDLG  503
  DIALOG "Notebook", IDD_NOTEBOOKDLG, 11, 11, 420, 420, FS_NOBYTEALIGN |
          WS_VISIBLE, FCF_SYSMENU | FCF_TITLEBAR
    BEGIN
      NOTEBOOK   IDC_NOTEBOOK, 20, 20, 200, 400, BKS_ROUNDEDTABS | WS_GROUP
    END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.44. POINTER Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

POINTER pointer-id  [load-option]  [ mem-option]
[codepage]  filename

The POINTER statement defines a pointer resource for an application. A pointer
resource, typically created by using the OS/2 Icon Editor, is a bit map
defining the shape of the mouse pointer on the screen. The POINTER statement
copies the pointer resource from the file specified in the filename field and
adds it to the application's other resources.  A pointer resource can be loaded
from the executable file when needed by using the WinLoadPointer function.

You can provide any number of POINTER statements in a resource script file, but
each statement must specify a unique pointer-id value.

 pointer-id        Specifies the pointer-resource identifier.  This value must
                   be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 load-option       Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                   executable file into memory.  This value must be one of the
                   following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     WinLoadPointer function.  This is the default option.
 mem-option        Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is in
                   memory.  This value must be one or more of the following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
                   The default setting is MOVEABLE and DISCARDABLE.
 codepage          Specifies a code page value.  See CODEPAGE Statement for a
                   list of valid code pages.
 filename          Specifies the name of the file containing the pointer
                   resource. If the file is not in the current directory,
                   filename must be preceded by a full path.

 Example

 This example defines a pointer whose pointer identifier is 10. The pointer
 resource is copied from the file custom.cur.

  POINTER 10 custom.cur


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.45. PRESPARAMS Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

PRESPARAMS presparam, value, presparam, value, ...

The PRESPARAMS statement defines presentation fields that customize a dialog
box, menu, window, or control.  PRESPARAMS data is a series of types and
values.  The window procedure of the dialog box, menu, window or control
receives and processes this data when the item is created.  The data for custom
controls can be in any format.

 presparam   Specifies a presentation-field type.
 value       Specifies the presentation-field value.

 Comments

 PRESPARAMS is often used to supply data to control the appearance of the
 customized window when it is first created.  For example, the PRESPARAMS
 statement may specify the colors to be used in the window.

 Example

 This example creates a menu resource with a menu identifier of 1. The
 PRESPARAMS statement specifies that the following three menu items be
 displayed in the 12-point Helvetica font.

  MENU 1
  BEGIN
      PRESPARAMS PP_FONTNAMESIZE, "12.Helv"
      MENUITEM "New", 100
      MENUITEM "Open", 101
      MENUITEM "Save", 102
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.46. PUSHBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

PUSHBUTTON text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The PUSHBUTTON statement creates a pushbutton control.  The control is a
round-cornered rectangle containing the given text.  The control sends a
message to its parent whenever the user chooses the control. The PUSHBUTTON
statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the
text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of a control window.  The
predefined class for this control is WC_BUTTON. If you do not specify a style,
the default style is BS_PUSHBUTTON and WS_TABSTOP.

 text    Specifies text that is centered in the rectangular area of the
         control.  This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in
         double quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1
         through 255.  If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you
         must include the double quotation mark twice.  A tilde ( ~ ) character
         in the text indicates that the following character is used as a
         mnemonic character for the control.  When the control is displayed,
         the tilde is not shown, but the mnemonic character is underlined. The
         user can choose the control by pressing the key corresponding to the
         underlined mnemonic character.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_BUTTON. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a pushbutton control that is labeled "OK."

  PUSHBUTTON "OK", 101, 10, 10, 100, 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.47. RADIOBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

RADIOBUTTON text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The RADIOBUTTON statement creates a radio-button control.  The control is a
small circle that has the given text displayed to its right.  The control
highlights the circle and sends a message to its parent window when the user
selects the button.  The control removes the highlight and sends a message when
the button is next selected.  The RADIOBUTTON statement, which you can use only
in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement, defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and
attributes of a control window.  The predefined class for this control is
WC_BUTTON.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is BS_RADIOBUTTON.

 text    Specifies text that is displayed to the right of the control.  This
         field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in double
         quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.
         If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you must include
         the double quotation mark twice.  A tilde ( ~ ) character in the text
         indicates that the following character is used as a mnemonic character
         for the control.  When the control is displayed, the tilde is not
         shown, but the mnemonic character is underlined.  The user can choose
         the control by pressing the key corresponding to the underlined
         mnemonic character.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_BUTTON. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a radio-button control that is labeled "Italic."

  RADIOBUTTON "Italic", 101, 10, 10, 24, 50


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.48. RCDATA Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

RCDATA resource-id
BEGIN
data-definition  , data-definition   ...
    .
    .
    .
END

The RCDATA statement defines a custom-data resource for an application.  The
custom data can be in whatever format the application requires.  You can
provide any number of RCDATA statements in a resource script file, but each
statement must specify a unique resource-id value.  A custom-data resource can
be loaded from the executable file when needed by using the DosGetResource or
DosGetResource2 functions with the RT_RCDATA resource type.

 resource-id       Specifies the custom-data identifier.  This value must be an
                   integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 data-definition   Specifies the custom data.  The data may be simple
                   expressions or strings.

 Example

 This example defines custom data that has a resource identifier of 5.

  RCDATA 5
  BEGIN
      "E. A. Poe", 1849, -32, 3L, 0x8000000l, 3+4+5
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.49. RCINCLUDE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

RCINCLUDE filename

The RCINCLUDE statement causes RC to process the resource script file specified
in the filename field along with the current resource script file.  The
contents of both files are compiled by RC and the results are placed in one
binary resource file and/or executable file.

 filename    Specifies the name of the resource script file to be included. If
             the file is not in the current directory, filename must be
             preceded by a full path.

 Comments

 RCINCLUDE statements are processed before any other processing is done,
 including preprocessing by RCPP.EXE, which removes comments, replaces values
 in the define directives, and so on.

 When specifying a high performance file system (HPFS) file name on an
 RCINCLUDE statement, enclose the path and file name in double quotes; for
 example:

     RCINCLUDE "d:\project\long dialog.dlg"

 Double quotes enables the Resource Compiler to recognize a name containing
 embedded blank characters.

 Example

 This example includes the file DIALOGS.RC as part of the current resource
 script file.

  RCINCLUDE dialogs.rc


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.50. RESOURCE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

RESOURCE type-id resource-id  [load-option]
[mem-option][code page]  filename

The RESOURCE statement defines a custom resource for an application. A custom
resource can be any data in any format.  The RESOURCE statement copies the
custom resource from the specified file and adds it to the application's other
resources.  A custom resource can be loaded from the executable file when
needed by using the DosGetResource or DosGetResource2 function and specifying
the resource's type and resource identifier.

You can provide any number of RESOURCE statements in a resource script file,
but each statement must specify a unique combination of type-id and resource-id
values.  That is, RESOURCE statements having the same type-id value are
permitted as long as the resource-id value for each is unique.

 type-id           Specifies the custom-resource type.  This value must be an
                   integer in the range 256 through 65 535, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.  (Values
                   0 through 255 are reserved.)
 resource-id       Specifies the custom-resource identifier.  This value must
                   be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 load-option       Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                   executable file into memory.  This value must be one of the
                   following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     DosGetResource or DosGetResource2 function.  This is the
                     default option.
 mem-option        Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is in
                   memory.  This value must be one or more of the following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
                   The default setting is MOVEABLE and DISCARDABLE.
 codepage          Specifies a code page value. See CODEPAGE Statement. for a
                   list of valid code pages.
 filename          Specifies the name of the file containing the custom
                   resource. If the file is not in the current directory,
                   filename must be preceded by a full path.

 Example

 This example defines a custom resource whose type identifier is 300 and whose
 resource identifier is 14.  The custom resource is copied from the file
 CUSTOM.RES.

  RESOURCE 300 14 custom.res


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.51. RTEXT Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

RTEXT text, id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The RTEXT statement creates a right-aligned text control.  The control is a
simple rectangle displaying the given text right-aligned in the rectangle.  The
text is formatted before it is displayed.  Words that would extend past the end
of a line are automatically wrapped to the beginning of the next line.  The
RTEXT statement, which you can use only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement,
defines the text, identifier, dimensions, and attributes of the control.  The
predefined class for the control is WC_STATIC.  If you do not specify a style,
the default style is SS_TEXT, DT_RIGHT, and WS_GROUP.

 text    Specifies text that is right-aligned in the rectangular area of the
         control.  This field must contain zero or more characters enclosed in
         double quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range 1
         through 255.  If a double quotation mark is required in the text, you
         must include the double quotation mark twice.
 id      Specifies the control identifier.  This value must be an integer in
         the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates
         to a value in that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         This value must be an integer in the range -32768 through 32767 or an
         expression consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
         (-) operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog box, window, or control
         containing the specified control.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The width is in
         n-character units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  This value must be an integer in
         the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and
         the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  This value can be a combination of the
         styles specified for WC_STATIC. You can use the bitwise OR (|)
         operator to combine styles.

 Example

 This example creates a right-aligned text control that is labeled "Filename."

  RTEXT "Filename", 101, 10, 10, 100, 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.52. SLIDER Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

SLIDER   id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The SLIDER statement creates a slider control within the dialog window.  This
control lets the user set, display, or modify a value by moving a slider arm
along a slider shaft.  The SLIDER statement defines the identifier, position,
dimensions, and attributes of a slider control.  The predefined class for this
control is WC_SLIDER.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is
WS_TABSTOP and WS_VISIBLE.

 id      Specifies the control identifier.  The value is any integer -32768
         through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates to a value in
         that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         The value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         The value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  The value is any integer 0
         through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The width is in n-character
         units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  The value is any integer 0
         through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  The value can be any combination of the
         styles specified for WC_SLIDER.  You can use the bitwise OR ( | )
         operator to combine styles.

 Comments

 The SLIDER statement is only used in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.

 Example

 This example creates a slider control at position (40, 30) within the dialog
 window.  The slider has a width of 120 character units and a height of 2
 character units.  Its resource ID is 101. The style specification
 SLS_BUTTONSLEFT adds buttons to the left of the slider shaft.  The default
 styles WS_TABSTOP and WS_VISIBLE are both in effect, though only the latter is
 specified.

  #define    IDC_SLIDER       101
  #define    IDD_SLIDERDLG    502
  DIALOG "Slider", IDD_SLIDERDLG, 11, 11, 200, 240, FS_NOBYTEALIGN |
          WS_VISIBLE, FCF_SYSMENU | FCF_TITLEBAR
    BEGIN
      SLIDER   IDC_SLIDER, 40, 30, 120, 16, SLS_BUTTONSLEFT | WS_VISIBLE
    END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.53. SPINBUTTON Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

SPINBUTTON   id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The SPINBUTTON statement creates a spinbutton control within the dialog window.
This control gives the user quick access to a finite set of data.  The
SPINBUTTON statement defines the identifier, position, dimensions, and
attributes of a spinbutton control.  The predefined class for this control is
WC_SPINBUTTON. If you do not specify a style, the default style is WS_TABSTOP,
WS_VISIBLE, and SPBS_MASTER.

 id      Specifies the control identifier.  The value is any integer -32768
         through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates to a value in
         that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         The value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         The value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  The value is any integer 0
         through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The width is in n-character
         units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  The value is any integer 0
         through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles.  The value is any combination of the
         styles specified for WC_SPINBUTTON.  You can use the bitwise OR ( | )
         operator to combine styles.

 Comments

 The SPINBUTTON statement is used only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.

 Example

 This example creates a spinbutton control at position (80, 20) within the
 dialog window.  The spinbutton has a width of 60 character units and a height
 of 3 character units.  Its resource ID is 302. The style specification
 SPBS_NUMERICONLY creates a control which accepts only the digits 0-9 and
 virtual keys.  The default styles SPBS_MASTER, WS_TABSTOP, and WS_VISIBLE are
 all in effect, though only WS_TABSTOP is specified.

  #define    IDC_SPINBUTTON   302
  #define    IDD_SPINDLG    502
  DIALOG "Spin button", IDD_SPINDLG, 11, 11, 200, 240, FS_NOBYTEALIGN |
          WS_VISIBLE, FCF_SYSMENU | FCF_TITLEBAR
    BEGIN
      SPINBUTTON  IDC_SPINBUTTON, 80, 20, 60, 24, SPBS_NUMERICONLY | WS_TABSTOP
    END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.54. STRINGTABLE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

STRINGTABLE  [load-option]  [mem-option][codepage]
BEGIN
string-id string-definition
    .
    .
    .
END

The STRINGTABLE statement creates one or more string resources for an
application.  A string resource is a null-terminated character string that has
a unique string identifier.  A string resource can be loaded from the
executable file when needed by using the WinLoadString or with DosGetResource
with the RT_STRING resource type. RT_STRING resources are bundled together in
groups of 16, with any missing IDs replaced with zero length strings. Each
group, or bundle, is assigned a unique sequential ID. The resource string ID is
not necessarily the same as the ID specified when using DosGetResource. The
formula for calculating the ID of the resource bundle, for use in
DosGetResource, is as follows:

bundle ID = ( id / 16) +1
where id is the string ID assigned in the RC file.

Thus, bundle 1 contains strings 0 to 15, bundle 2 contains strings 16 to 31,
and so on. Once the address of the bundle has been returned by DosGetResource
(using the calculated ID), the buffer can be parsed to locate the particular
string within the bundle. The number of the string is calculated by the
formula:

string = id % 16
(string = remainder for id/16).

The buffer returned consists of the CodePage of the strings in the first
USHORT, followed by the 16 strings in the bundle. The first BYTE of each string
is the length of the string (including the null terminator), followed by the
string and the terminator. A zero length string is represented by two bytes:
01 (string length) followed by the null terminator.

You can provide any number of STRINGTABLE statements in a resource script file.
The compiler treats all the strings from the various STRINGTABLE statements as
if they belonged to a single statement.  This means that no two strings in a
resource script file can have the same string identifier.

 load-option    Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                executable file into memory.  This value must be one of the
                following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     WinLoadString function. This is the default option.
 mem-option     Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is in
                memory.  This value must be one or more of the following:
 code-page      Specifies a code page value.  See CODEPAGE Statement for a list
                of valid code page values.

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
                The default setting is MOVEABLE and DISCARDABLE.
 string-id      Specifies the character-string identifier.  This value must be
                an integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                expression that evaluates to a value in that range.  The value
                can be specified in decimal or hexadecimal notation.  Each
                string identifier in a resource script file must be unique.
 string-definition Specifies a character string.  This field must contain zero
                or more characters enclosed in double quotation marks.
                Character values must be in the range 1 through 255.  If a
                double quotation mark is required in the string, you must
                include the double quotation mark twice.

 Comments

 You can continue a string on multiple lines by terminating the line with a
 backslash (\) or by terminating the line with a double quotation mark (") and
 then starting the next line with a double quotation mark.

 Example

 This example creates two string resources whose string identifiers are 1 and
 2.

  #define IDS_HELLO    1
  #define IDS_GOODBYE  2

  STRINGTABLE
  BEGIN
      IDS_HELLO   "Hello"
      IDS_GOODBYE "Goodbye"
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.55. SUBITEMSIZE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

SUBITEMSIZE  size

The SUBITEMSIZE statement specifies the size, in words, of each help subitem in
a help subtable.  The minimum size is two words, and each help subitem in a
help subtable must be the same size.  When used, the SUBITEMSIZE statement must
appear after the HELPSUBTABLE statement and before the BEGIN keyword.

You do not need to use the SUBITEMSIZE statement if the help subitems are the
default size (2).

 size    Specifies the size of each help subitem.  This value must be an
         integer.

 Example

 The SUBITEMSIZE statement in this example specifies that each HELPSUBITEM
 statement contains three words.

  HELPSUBTABLE 1
  SUBITEMSIZE 3
  BEGIN
      HELPSUBITEM IDCLD_FILEMENU, IDHP_FILEMENU, 5
      HELPSUBITEM IDCLD_HELPMENU, IDHP_HELPMENU, 6
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.56. SUBMENU Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

SUBMENU text, submenu-id [, menuitem-style]
BEGIN
menuitem-definition
    .
    .
    .
END

The SUBMENU statement creates a submenu for a given menu.  A submenu is a
vertical list of menu items from which the user can choose a command.

You can provide any number of SUBMENU statements in a MENU statement, but each
SUBMENU statement must specify a unique submenu-id value. You can provide any
number of menuitem-definition statements in the SUBMENU statement.  These
define the menu items (commands) in the menu.  The order of the statements
determines the order of the menu items.

 text                  Specifies the text of the submenu.  This field must
                       contain zero or more characters enclosed in double
                       quotation marks.  Character values must be in the range
                       1 through 255.  If a double quotation mark is required
                       in the string, you must include the double quotation
                       mark twice.  A tilde ( ~ ) character in the item name
                       indicates that the following character is used as a
                       mnemonic character for the item.  When the menu is
                       displayed, the tilde is not shown, but the mnemonic
                       character is underlined.  The user can choose the menu
                       item by pressing the key corresponding to the underlined
                       mnemonic character.
 submenu-id            Specifies the submenu identifier. This value must be an
                       integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                       expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 menuitem-style        Specifies the submenu style. This value can be a
                       combination of MIS_ values. For details on the MIS_
                       values, see MENUITEM Statement.
 menuitem-definition   Specifies a PRESPARAMS or MENUITEM statement.  You can
                       use the PRESPARAMS statement to control the appearance
                       of a submenu, such as the font and the foreground and
                       background colors.  If used, the PRESPARAMS statement
                       must immediately follow the BEGIN keyword.  For details
                       about the PRESPARAMS statement, see PRESPARAMS
                       Statement.

                       The MENUITEM statement defines an individual command in
                       the given menu.  For details, see MENUITEM Statement.

 Example

 This example creates a submenu named Elements.  Its identifier is 2. The
 submenu contains three menu items, which are created by using MENUITEM
 statements.

  SUBMENU "Elements", 2
  BEGIN
      MENUITEM "Oxygen", 200
      MENUITEM "Carbon", 201, , MIA_CHECKED
      MENUITEM "Hydrogen", 202
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.57. undef Directive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax: undef name

This directive removes the current definition of the specified name.  All
subsequent occurrences of the name are processed without replacement.

 name    Specifies the name to be removed.  This value is any combination of
         letters, digits, and punctuation.

 Example

 This example removes the definitions for the names "nonzero" and "USERCLASS".

  #undef     nonzero
  #undef     USERCLASS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.58. VALUESET Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

VALUESET   id, x, y, width, height[, style]

The VALUESET statement creates a value set control within the dialog window.
This control lets a user select one choice from a group of mutually exclusive
choices.  The VALUESET statement defines the identifier, position, dimensions,
and attributes of a value set control.  The predefined class for this control
is WC_VALUESET.  If you do not specify a style, the default style is WS_TABSTOP
and WS_VISIBLE.

 id      Specifies the control identifier.  The value is any integer -32768
         through 32767, or a simple expression that evaluates to a value in
         that range.
 x       Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         The value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 y       Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the control.
         The value is any integer -32768 through 32767 or an expression
         consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction (-)
         operator.  The coordinate is assumed to be in dialog units and is
         relative to the origin of the dialog window.
 width   Specifies the width of the control.  The value is any integer 0
         through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The width is in n-character
         units.
 height  Specifies the height of the control.  The value is any integer 0
         through 65 535 or an expression consisting of integers and the
         addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator. The height is in
         1/8-character units.
 style   Specifies the control styles. The value is any combination of the
         styles specified for WC_VALUESET. You can use the bitwise OR ( | )
         operator to combine styles.

 Comments

 The VALUESET statement is used only in a DIALOG or WINDOW statement.

 Example

 This example creates a value set control at position (40, 40) within the
 dialog window.  The value set control has a width of 220 character and a
 height of 20 character units.  Its resource ID is 302.  The style
 specification VS_ICON creates a control to show items in icon form.  The
 default styles WS_TABSTOP and WS_VISIBLE are both in effect, though only
 WS_TABSTOP is specified.

  #define    IDC_VALUESET     302
  #define    IDD_VALUESETDLG  501
  DIALOG "Value set", IDD_VALUESETDLG, 11, 11, 260, 240, FS_NOBYTEALIGN |
          WS_VISIBLE, FCF_SYSMENU | FCF_TITLEBAR
    BEGIN
      VALUESET  IDC_VALUESET, 40, 40, 220, 160, VS_ICON | WS_TABSTOP
    END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.59. WINDOW Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

WINDOW text, id, x, y, width, height, class[ , style[  , framectl]]
  data-definitions
[ BEGIN
control-definition
    .
    .
    .
END ]

The WINDOW statement creates a window of the specified class.  The statement
defines the position and dimensions of the window relative to its parent
window, as well as the window-box style.  The WINDOW statement is typically
used in a WINDOWTEMPLATE or FRAME statement.

Typically, only one WINDOW statement is used in a FRAME statement.  It defines
the client window belonging to the corresponding frame window. The optional
BEGIN and END keywords enclose any CONTROL statements that are given with the
window.  CONTROL statements given in this manner represent child windows
belonging to the window created by the WINDOW statement.

 text              Specifies the window title if the style specifies a title
                   bar. This field must contain zero or more characters
                   enclosed in double quotation marks.  The character values
                   must be in the range 1 through 255.  If a double quotation
                   mark is required in the title, you must include the double
                   quotation mark twice.
 id                Specifies the window identifier.  This value must be an
                   integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                   expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 x                 Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the
                   window. This value must be an integer in the range -32768
                   through 32767 or an expression consisting of integers and
                   the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The value is
                   in dialog units.  The position is relative to the origin of
                   the parent window.
 y                 Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the
                   window. This value must be an integer in the range -32768
                   through 32767 or an expression consisting of integers and
                   the addition (+) or subtraction (-) operator.  The value is
                   in dialog units.  The position is relative to the origin of
                   the parent window.
 width             Specifies the width of the window.  This value must be an
                   integer in the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression
                   consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
                   (-) operator.  The value is in n-character units.
 height            Specifies the height of the window.  This value must be an
                   integer in the range 0 through 65 535 or an expression
                   consisting of integers and the addition (+) or subtraction
                   (-) operator.  The value is in 1/8-character units.
 class             Specifies the window class.  This value can be one of the
                   control classes specified in the "Control Classes" table in
                   the Presentation Manager Programmer Reference or the name of
                   the window class, enclosed in double quotation marks.
 style             Specifies the window style.  This value can be any of the
                   window, dialog box, or frame styles specified.
 framectl          Specifies the style of the frame controls belonging to the
                   window.  This value can be a combination of the styles
                   specified in the table, "Frame-Control Styles." You can use
                   the bitwise OR (|) operator to combine styles.
 data-definitions  Specifies a CTLDATA and/or PRESPARAMS statement. These
                   statements define control and presentation data for the
                   window. For more information, see CTLDATA Statement and
                   PRESPARAMS Statement.
 control-definition Specifies a CONTROL statement or any one of several
                   predefined control statements. These statements define the
                   style, position, and dimensions of controls in the window.

 Comments

 The WINDOW statement can actually contain any combination of CONTROL, DIALOG,
 and WINDOW statements. Typically, a WINDOW statement contains one or no such
 statements.

 Example

 This example creates a client window belonging to the frame window. The client
 window belongs to the "MyClientClass" window class and has the standard window
 identifier FID_CLIENT.

  WINDOWTEMPLATE 1
  BEGIN
      FRAME "My Window", 1, 10, 10, 320, 130,
               0, FCF_STANDARD | FCF_VERTSCROLL
      BEGIN
          WINDOW "", FID_CLIENT, 0, 0, 0, 0, "MyClientClass"
      END
  END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5.60. WINDOWTEMPLATE Statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

WINDOWTEMPLATE window-id  [load-option]  [ mem-option][code-page]
BEGIN
window-definition
    .
    .
    .
END

The WINDOWTEMPLATE statement creates a window template.  A window template
consists of a series of statements that define the window identifier, load and
memory options, window dimensions, and controls in the window.  The window
template can be loaded from the executable file by using the WinLoadDlg
function.

You can provide any number of window templates in a resource script file, but
each template must have a unique window-id value.

 window-id           Specifies the window identifier.  This value must be an
                     integer in the range -32768 through 32767, or a simple
                     expression that evaluates to a value in that range.
 load-option         Specifies when the system loads the resource from the
                     executable file into memory.  This value must be one of
                     the following:

      PRELOAD        System loads the resource when the application starts.
      LOADONCALL     System loads the resource when the application calls the
                     WinLoadDlg function. This is the default option.
 mem-option          Specifies how the system manages the resource when it is
                     in memory.  This value must be one or more of the
                     following:

      FIXED          System keeps the resource at a fixed memory location.
      MOVEABLE       System moves the resource as necessary to compact memory.
      DISCARDABLE    System discards the resource if it is no longer needed.
                     The default setting is MOVEABLE and DISCARDABLE.
 code-page           Specifies a code page value.  See CODEPAGE Statement for a
                     list of valid code pages.
 window-definition   Specifies a WINDOW statement.  The statement defines the
                     dimensions and style of the given window.  For details
                     about the statement, see WINDOW Statement.

 Comments

 A WINDOWTEMPLATE statement can contain DIALOG, CONTROL, and WINDOW statements.
 Typically, only one WINDOW statement is used in the WINDOWTEMPLATE statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. T Terminal Emulator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Kernel Debugger uses the T Terminal Emulator to communicate with the
machine to be debugged, also known as the MUT (Machine Under Test).

You can also use T to send and receive ASCII files.

All functions of T are listed on the Help menu. Press F1 to view the Help menu,
which is shown below.

  TERMINAL - OS/2 ASCII Terminal Program

  Version 2.00.00

 F1 or ALT-H   Help
 F2            Terminal Setup
 F3            Sending Files
 F4            Pausing and Scrolling
 F6            Receiving Files
 F8  or ALT-X  Exit terminal program


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.1. Command-Line Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display help for command-line syntax, type T -? at the prompt.

OS/2 Terminal program
Version 2.00.00
November 1, 1991

Valid command line switches:
  -L[ines]X      X={lines}
  -C[om]N        N={1..8}
  -Q[uiet]       enter quiet mode
  -V[tp]:name    name=vtp server
  -S[end]:name   name=auto-send file name
  -R[emark]:text text=status line remark (20 chars max)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.1.1. Command-Line Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use command line options when invoking T to specify the screen size and the COM
port to be used:

 -L[ines]X      Where x = {25, 43, 50}

 -C[om]N        Where n = {1,2,3}

 -?             To display these options


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.2. Terminal Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

All terminal setup functions are listed here. Press F2 from the program's main
screen to view the Terminal Setup menu.

The Terminal Setup Options are as follows:

   o  Help (press F1)
   o  Port setup (Press F2)
   o  Terminal emulation (Press F3)
   o  Keyboard macros (Press F4)
   o  Bells & Whistles (Press F5)
   o  Exit setup mode (Press Esc or F8)

 You must press Esc to return to the main screen before continuing with any
 functions other than the above setup functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.2.1. Setup Terminal Emulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up terminal emulation, follow these steps:

   1. Press F2 at the main screen. The Terminal Setup dialog will be displayed.

   2. Press F3. The Terminal Emulation Setup dialog will be displayed.

   Terminal Emulation Setup
   Emulator status: None loaded.

   Help:                       F1
   Z19 emulator:               F2

   Exit emulator setup mode:   Esc, F8


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.2.2. Setup Bells & Whistles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change bells and whistles, follow these steps:

   1. Press F2 at the main screen. The Terminal Setup dialog will be displayed.

   2. Press F5. The Bells & Whistles Setup dialog will be displayed.

   3. Make your selections.

  Bells and Whistles Setup

  Filter NULL characters: Yes
  Disable beeps:          No

                        Background:   Foreground:
  Normal screen:        Black         White
  Status line:          Blue          Bright White
  Scroll screen:        Blue          Red
  Scroll status line:   White         Blue
  Help screen:          Blue          Bright White
  Menu:                 Blue          Bright White
  Menu highlight:       Cyan          Black

  Next Value:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.2.3. Setting Communications Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change communications parameters, follow these steps:

   1. Press F2 at the main screen. The Terminal Setup dialog will be displayed.

   2. Press F2. The Current COM2 Port Parameters dialog will be displayed.

             Current COM2 Port parameters:

             Baud Rate:                   9600
             Parity:                      NONE
             Data Bits:                      8
             Stop Bits:                      1
             Write Timeout (sec.):        1.00
             Read Timeout (sec.):         0.10
             Handshaking:             XON/XOFF

             Next Value: ->   Previous Value: <-
             Next Field: Dn   Previous Field: Up
             Don't Change:   Esc
             Accept Changes: Enter

   3. Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow cursor keys to scroll backward and
      forward through the parameter list, and the -> and <- keys to scroll
      through allowable values for each parameter.

   4. Press Escape to exit this dialog without changing values, or press Enter
      to save these values and exit the dialog.

 Note:  The communications port may be changed from the command line by using
        the -c option. See Command-Line Options


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.3. Sending Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To send a file, follow these steps:

   1. Press F3. The Send File Control dialog will be displayed.

             Send File Control

             Send file name:
             SEND.TXT

             Don't send file:               Esc
             Accept changes and send file:  Enter

   2. Enter the filename in the Send File name field.

   3. Press Enter to send the file and exit the dialog, or press Escape to exit
      this dialog without sending a file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.4. Pausing and Scrolling ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To enter Scroll Mode and pause display of communications, follow these steps:

   1. Press F4.  A status line will appear at the bottom of the screen.

            F1=Help  ESC=Active mode  Screen Top is 100%
            through the buffer.  Scroll Mode

   2. Press F1 to display the Scroll Mode commands.

             Screen Scroll Mode

             F1 or ALT-H       Help
             Dn                Down a line
             Up                Up a line
             PgUp              Up a page
             PgDn              Down a page
             ESC or Enter      Return to active mode

   3. Select a scroll mode command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.5. Receiving Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To receive a file, follow these steps:

   1. Press F6. The Capture File Control dialog will be displayed.

             Capture File Control

             Capture file name:
             Capture.Txt

             Capture entire buffer: F3
             START Capture:         F5
             Delete file:           F9
             Don't Change:          Esc
             Accept Changes:        Enter

   2. Select an item from the Capture File Control menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. Workplace Class List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Workplace Class List is a tool that creates a workplace object class and an
instance of a workplace object class. Workplace objects are constructed using
the SOM protocol and are instances of one of the following workplace object
classes:

 Predefined   These classes are defined by the system. Examples of predefined
              workplace object classes are WPObject, WPFileSys, and WPAbstract.
 Subclass     These classes are derived from existing predefined workplace
              object classes. They add or remove function; however, they retain
              the basic behavior of that class.
 Replaced     These classes replace the class being subclassed. They modify the
              behavior of an instance of a predefined workplace object class
              without the instance being aware of the new class.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.1. Starting Workplace Class List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start Workplace Class List, select the PM Development Tools folder, and then
select Workplace Class List. A window appears.  The window contains a list of
the workplace object classes currently registered in the OS/2 Workplace Shell.
Using the window, you can:

   o  Create an instance of a workplace object class
   o  Replace a workplace object class
   o  Unreplace a workplace object class
   o  Add a workplace object class
   o  Delete a workplace object class


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.1.1. Creating an Object Class Instance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create an instance of a workplace object class:

   1. Select the class from the list in the Workplace Object Class window.
   2. Display the pop-up menu by clicking mouse button 2.
   3. Select the Create Instance choice.

      Note:  Only an instance of a physical workplace object class can be
             created. In other words, you cannot create instances of WPObject
             or WPClass because they are not physical classes.


   4. Fill-in the following input fields:

 Object Title          The text string you assign to the object. The text
                       string becomes the object title and appears under the
                       object when the object is displayed on the Workplace
                       Shell. When the object is in an opened state, the text
                       string appears in the title bar of the window.
 Class of new object   The name of the class of which the object you selected
                       is a member.
 Parameters            A series of keyname=value pairs (separated by
                       semicolons) that change the behavior of the object. Each
                       object class defines the keynames and parameters it
                       expects to see. All parameters have safe defaults, so it
                       is never required to pass parameters to an object.
 Location              A real name specified by a fully qualified file
                       specification, such as C:\OS2\DLL\MINXOBJ.DLL, or a
                       logical name specified by a predefined symbol.

 Examples of logical names include the following:

 LOCATION_NOWHERE                Hidden folder
 LOCATION_DESKTOP                OS/2 Desktop (Workplace)
 LOCATION_SYSTEM                 OS/2 System folder
 LOCATION_TEMPLATES              Template folder
 LOCATION_SYSTEMSETUP            System setup folder
 LOCATION_STARTUP                Startup folder
 LOCATION_INFORMATION            Information folder
 LOCATION_INFORMATION            Information folder
 LOCATION_DRIVES                 Drives folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.1.2. Replacing a Workplace Object Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To replace an existing registered class:

   1. Select the class from the list in the Workplace Object Class window.
   2. Display the pop-up menu by single-clicking mouse button 2.
   3. Select the Replace choice. Note that only classes that have already been
      registered are valid.
   4. Fill-in the following input fields: Original class and Replacement class.

 Note:  The replacement class must be a descendant of the original class.
        Replacing an object class is useful for modifying the behavior of
        objects which are instances of the original class but are not aware of
        the replacement class.

 Original class        The name of the object class being replaced in the
                       Workplace.
 Replacement class     The name of the object class replacing the original
                       class.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.1.3. Unreplaceing a Workplace Object Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To return a replaced class to its original class:

   1. Select the replaced class from the list on the workplace object class
      window.
   2. Display the pop-up menu by clicking mouse button 2.
   3. Select the Unreplace choice. Note that only classes that have already
      been replaced are valid.
   4. Fill-in the following input fields:

 Original class        The name of the replaced object class being returned to
                       its original object class in the Workplace.
 Replacement class     The name of the replaced object class being returned to
                       its original object class.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.1.4. Adding a Workplace Object Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a class to the Workplace Shell:

   1. Display the pop-up menu by clicking mouse button 2.
   2. Select the Add Class choice.
   3. Fill-in the following input fields:

 New class name      The name of object class you want to add to the Workplace.
                     Type the class name exactly as it is built,
                     case-sensitive.
 Library module      The name of the dynamic link library (DLL) that holds the
                     object definition. Type the library name with complete
                     file specification information.

                     Note:  The DLL must be created by the IBM System Object
                            Model.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.1.5. Deleting an Object Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a class from the Workplace Shell:

   1. Select the class you want to delete from the list in the Workplace Object
      Class window.
   2. Display the pop-up menu by clicking mouse button 2.
   3. Select the Delete a Class choice.
   4. Fill-in the name of the class you want to delete from the Workplace.

 Note:  You cannot delete system predefined classes, such as WPObject or
        WPClass.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. Error Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1. LINK386 Error Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Format of Error Messages

There are three types of LINK386 error messages:

   o  Fatal errors cause LINK386 to stop running. They have the following
      format: location : fatal error L1xxx : message text

   o  Nonfatal errors indicate problems in the executable file. LINK386
      produces the executable file and sets the error bit in the header for the
      OS/2 environment. This means that the executable file cannot be run from
      OS/2. Nonfatal error messages have the following format:

           location : error L2xxx : message text

   o  Warnings indicate possible problems in the executable file. LINK386
      produces the executable file, but does not set the error bit in the
      header for the OS/2 environment. Warnings have the following format:

           location : warning L4xxx : message text

 In all these messages, location is the input file associated with the error,
 or it is LINK386 itself if there is no input file. The message text is the
 actual text message that LINK386 generates. When the input file is a module
 definition file, the line number is included, as in this example:

  myfile.def(3): fatal error L1030: missing internal name

 When the input file is an object file or library file and has a module name,
 the module name is enclosed in parentheses, as in the following examples:

  SLIBCE.LIB(_file)
  MAIN.OBJ(main.c)
  TEXT.OBJ

 Error Message Descriptions

      Fatal Error Messages (part 1) 1001 - 1049
      Fatal Error Messages (part 2) 1050 - 1098
      Fatal Error Messages (part 3) 1100 - 1130
      Nonfatal Error Messages 2000 - 2063
      Warning Error Messages 4000 - 4094


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1.1. Fatal Error Messages (Part 1) 1001 - 1049 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 L1001     option : option name ambiguous
           Explanation: A unique option name does not appear after the option
           indicator (/).
           Example: The command

                          LINK386 /N main;
           produces this error because LINK386 cannot tell which of the seven
           options beginning with the letter N is intended.
           Action: Retry using the correct minimum option abbreviation.

 L1004     option : invalid numeric value
           Explanation: An incorrect value appeared for one of the LINK386
           options. This might be because a character string has been entered
           for an option that requires a numeric value or because the proper
           numeric prefix (for example, 0x for hexadecimal) was not used for a
           numeric value.
           Action: Retry with a numeric value.

 L1006     option : stack size exceeds 65,535 bytes
           Explanation: The size you specified for the stack in the /STACK
           option of the link command is more than 65,535 bytes.
           Action: Retry with a stack size of less than or equal to 65,535
           bytes.

 L1008     option : segment limit set too high
           Explanation: The specified limit on the /SEGMENTS option is greater
           than 16 375.
           Action: Retry with a limit in the range 1 to 16 375.

 L1020     no object modules specified
           Explanation: You did not specify any object file names to the
           linker.
           Action: Restart LINK386, including at least one object file name.

 L1021     cannot nest response files
           Explanation: A response file has been named within another response
           file. You have used @filename within the response file. The @ symbol
           is reserved by LINK386 to signify a response file name.
           Action: Edit the response file to remove the nested response file.

 L1022     response line too long
           Explanation: A line in an automatic response file is longer than 256
           characters.
           Action: Edit the line to make it shorter than 256 characters.
           Response files can contain more than one line.

 L1023     terminated by user
           Explanation: You pressed Ctrl+C or Ctrl+Break.
           Action: Your action has terminated LINK386. Restart if necessary.

 L1030     missing internal name
           Explanation: You have not specified an internal name for an import
           in the module definition file.
           Action: Edit the module definition file, giving an internal name so
           that LINK386 can identify references to the import.

 L1031     module description redefined
           Explanation: You have used the DESCRIPTION keyword for a module in
           the module definition file more than once.
           Action: Edit the module definition file, deleting the extra
           descriptions.

 L1032     module name redefined
           Explanation: You have defined a module name more than once with the
           NAME or LIBRARY keyword in the module definition file.
           Action: Edit the module definition file, checking the module name
           definitions.

 L1033     input line too long; number characters allowed
           Explanation: The input line contains more than number characters.
           Action: Retry the command with fewer characters on the input line.

 L1040     too many exported entries
           Explanation: You have tried to export more than 65535 names.
           Action: Retry with fewer names, creating an additional executable
           module if necessary.

 L1041     resident-name table overflow
           Explanation: The total length of all your resident-names, together
           with an overhead of 3 bytes for each name, is greater than the
           LINK386 limit. The internal LINK386 limit is  65,534 for LINK386
           versions prior to 2.01.012 and is 1,048,576 for LINK386 version
           2.01.012 and later versions.
           Action: Reduce the number or the length of your resident names.

 L1042     nonresident-name table overflow
           Explanation: The total length of all your nonresident-names,
           together with an overhead of 3 bytes for each name, is greater than
           65,534 for versions prior to 2.01.012 and is 1,048,576 for LINK386
           version 2.01.012 and later versions.
           Action: Reduce the number or the length of your nonresident-names.

 L1043     relocation table overflow
           Explanation: There are more than 65,535 load-time relocations for a
           single segment.
           Action: Reduce the number of relocations in the source files and
           recompile or reassemble them. Interframe references generate
           load-time relocations.

 L1044     imported-name table overflow
           Explanation: The total length of all your imported-names, together
           with an overhead of 1 byte for each name, is greater than 65,535
           bytes.
           Action: Reduce the number or the length of your imported-names.

 L1045     too many TYPDEF records
           Explanation: An object module contains more than 255 TYPDEF records.
           These records describe communal variables. This error can only
           appear with programs produced by compilers that support communal
           variables.
           Action: Reduce the number of TYPDEF records, breaking the module
           into smaller parts, if necessary.

 L1046     too many external symbols in one module
           Explanation: An object module specifies more than the limit of 1023
           external symbols.
           Action: Reduce the number of external symbols, breaking the module
           into smaller parts, if necessary.

 L1047     too many group, segment, and class names in one module
           Explanation: The program module contains too many group, segment,
           and class names.
           Action: Reduce the number of groups, segments, or classes, and
           re-create the object files.

 L1048     too many segments in one module
           Explanation: An object module has more than 255 segments.
           Action: Reduce the number of segments, splitting the module or
           combining some segments.

 L1049     too many segments
           Explanation: The program has more than the maximum number of
           segments. The /SEGMENTS option specifies the maximum allowed number;
           the maximum is 16375.
           Action: Restart LINK386 using the /SEGMENTS option with an
           appropriate number of segments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1.2. Fatal Error Messages (Part 2) 1050 - 1098 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 L1050     too many groups in one module
           Explanation: LINK386 found more than 32 group definitions (GRPDEF)
           in a single module.
           Action: Reduce the number of group definitions by splitting the
           module, by eliminating one or more group definitions, or combining
           group definitions.

 L1051     too many groups
           Explanation: The program defines more than 32 groups in addition to
           DGROUP.
           Action: Reduce the number of group definitions by splitting the
           module, by eliminating one or more group definitions, or combining
           group definitions.

 L1052     too many libraries
           Explanation: You tried to link with more than 32 libraries.
           Action: Combine libraries, or use modules that require fewer
           libraries.

 L1053     out of memory for symbol table
           Explanation: The program has more symbolic information, such as
           public, external, segment, group, class, and file names, than the
           amount that could fit in available real memory.
           Action: Combine modules or segments and recreate the object files.
           Eliminate as many public symbols as possible or use shorter names.

 L1054     requested segment limit too high
           Explanation: There is not enough memory to allocate the necessary
           tables for the amount of segments requested.
           Action: Reduce the number of segments by combining or creating
           additional executable modules.

 L1057     data record too large
           Explanation: A LEDATA record (in an object module) contained more
           than 1024 bytes of data. This is a translator (compiler or
           assembler) error.
           Action: Note which translator (compiler or assembler) produced the
           incorrect object module and the circumstances, and contact your
           supplier.

 L1060     program exceeds number bytes
           Explanation: There is not enough memory to process all segments.
           Action: Reduce the number of segments by combining or creating
           additional executable modules.

 L1063     out of memory for debugging information
           Explanation: LINK386 was given too many object files with debug
           information, and ran out of space to store them.
           Action: Reduce the number of object files that have debug
           information.

 L1064     out of memory - name heap exhausted
           Explanation: The linker ran out of heap space; name = near or far.
           Action: Reduce the number of background processes or install more
           memory.

 L1070     name: segment size exceeds 64K
           Explanation: A single segment contains more than 64K of code or
           data. This could be because you attempted to combine identically
           named segments.
           Action: Try compiling (or assembling) and linking using a larger
           memory model or breaking up the named segment.

 L1071     segment _TEXT larger than 65,520 bytes
           Explanation: This error is likely to occur only in small-model C
           programs, but it can occur when any program with a segment named
           _TEXT is linked using the /DOSSEG option of the LINK386 command.
           Small-model C programs must reserve code addresses 0 and 1; the
           reserve is increased to 16 for alignment purposes.
           Action: Make the program source code smaller, or change to a larger
           memory model.

 L1072     common area longer than 65,536 bytes
           Explanation: The program has more than 64K of communal variables.
           This error occurs only with programs produced by compilers that
           support communal variables.
           Action: Rewrite your program using fewer or smaller communal
           variables.

 L1073     file-segment limit exceeded
           Explanation: There are more than 255 physical or file segments.
           Action: Reduce the number of physical or file segments. You could
           use the Combine Contiguous Data (/PACKD) option for combining data
           segments or the Combine Contiguous Code (/PACKC) option for
           combining code segments.

 L1074     name: group larger than 64K
           Explanation: A group contains segments that total more than 65,536
           bytes.
           Action: Reduce the number or size of segments or remove segments
           from the group.

 L1075     entry table larger than 65,535 bytes
           Explanation: You have exceeded a linker table size limit because of
           an excessive number of entry names.
           Action: Reduce the number of names in the modules that you are
           linking or create additional executable modules.

 L1076     name: segment size exceeds numberM
           Explanation: The named segment is larger than the specified size.
           Action: Break the segment into smaller segments and try again.

 L1077     common area longer than 4G-1 bytes
           Explanation: The space for the C languages common area is too big.
           Action: If the load module is an .EXE, consider putting some
           routines in .DLL; otherwise, link without debugging information or
           create additional executable modules.

 L1080     cannot open list file
           Explanation: The disk or a directory is full, or an invalid file
           name was specified.
           Action: Check that the file name specified is correct. Delete or
           move files to make space and restart LINK386.

 L1081     out of space for run file
           Explanation: The disk on which the .EXE file is being written is
           full.
           Action: Delete or move files to make space and restart LINK386.

 L1082     name: stub file not found
           Explanation: The stub file specified in the module definition file
           could not be found.
           Action: Check that the correct path to the stub file has been
           specified.

 L1083     cannot open run file - reason
           Explanation: The run file could not be opened for the stated reason.
           Action: Correct the problem and restart LINK386.

 L1088     out of space for list file
           Explanation: The disk on which the listing file is being written is
           full.
           Action: Delete or move files to make space and restart LINK386.

 L1089     filename: cannot open response file
           Explanation: LINK386 cannot find the specified response file. This
           usually indicates a typing error.
           Action: Include the drive specifier or path, or both, for the
           response file.

 L1091     unexpected end-of-file on library
           Explanation: The disk containing the library has probably been
           removed or is corrupted.
           Action: Replace the disk containing the library and restart LINK386.

 L1092     cannot open module definition file
           Explanation: The specified module definition file cannot be opened,
           or an invalid file name was specified.
           Action: Check that the specified file name is correct. Include the
           drive specifier or path, or both, for the module definition file.

 L1093     name: object not found
           Explanation: LINK386 could not open the object module you specified.
           Action: Specify full path name or directory in which object module
           resides.

 L1096     unexpected end-of-file
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered an end-of-file character while
           reading an input file AND expected more information.
           Action: Check input files for errors and relink.

 L1097     I/O error - string
           Explanation: The linker encountered the I/O error shown while
           reading from a file.
           Action: Make sure the file is not corrupted or on a bad disk sector
           and relink.

 L1098     cannot open include file filename - reason
           Explanation: LINK386 could not open the include file for the stated
           reason.
           Action: Correct the problem and restart LINK386.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1.3. Fatal Error Messages (Part 3) 1100 - 1130 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 L1100     stub .EXE file invalid
           Explanation: The stub file specified in the module definition file
           is not a valid .EXE file.
           Action: Ensure that the stub file is an executable file.

 L1101     invalid object module
           Explanation: One of the object modules was incorrectly formed during
           compilation or assembly.
           Action: Recompile or reassemble your source code. If the error
           persists, contact your supplier.

 L1102     unexpected end-of-file
           Explanation: An invalid format for a library was found.
           Action: Restore the library file from your backup disk and restart
           LINK386. If this does not work, rebuild your library or contact your
           supplier.

 L1103     name: attempt to access data outside segment bounds
           Explanation: A data record in an object module specified data
           extending beyond the end of a segment. This is a translator error.
           Action: Note which translator (compiler or assembler) produced the
           incorrect object module and the circumstances, and contact your
           supplier.

 L1104     filename: not valid library
           Explanation: The specified file is not a valid library file. This
           error causes LINK386 to stop running.
           Action: Ensure that the named file is a valid library file and
           restart LINK386. If this does not work, rebuild your library or
           contact your supplier.

 L1105     invalid object due to aborted incremental compile
           Explanation: An object file from an aborted compile is trying to be
           linked.
           Action: Recompile the source that produced the bad compile and then
           relink.

 L1106     unknown COMDAT allocation type for name; record ignored
           Explanation: The COMDAT (record in .OBJ) allocation type for the
           named COMDAT was not valid.
           Action: Recompile or reassemble .OBJ and try again. If that does not
           work, contact your supplier.

 L1107     unknown COMDAT selection type for name; record ignored
           Explanation: The COMDAT (record in .OBJ) selection type for the
           named COMDAT is not valid.
           Action: Recompile or reassemble .OBJ and try again. If that does not
           work, contact your supplier.

 L1108     invalid format of debugging information
           Explanation: An error was detected in a segment that contains debug
           information.
           Action: Recompile or reassemble and try again. If that does not
           work, try relinking without using the /DE or /CO options.

 L1113     unresolved COMDEF; internal error
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered a COMDEF (record in .OBJ) in pass 2
           that was not defined in pass 1.
           Action: Recompile or reassemble and try again. If that does not
           work, contact your supplier.

 L1114     unresolved COMDAT name: internal error
           Explanation: LINK386 found specified COMDAT in pass 2 that does not
           correspond to COMDATs found in pass 1.
           Action: Recompile or reassemble and try again. If that does not
           work, contact your supplier.

 L1117     unallocated COMDAT name; internal error
           Explanation: The linker encountered COMDAT in pass 2 for which space
           was not allocated during pass 1.
           Action: Recompile or reassemble and try again. If that does not
           work, contact your supplier.

 L1121     name: group larger than 4G-1 bytes
           Explanation: The group indicated is too large.
           Action: Recompile or reassemble and try again. Remove segments from
           the group or create additional executables if necessary.

 L1123     name: segment defined both 16- and 32-bit
           Explanation: The segment named was defined as both 16-bit and
           32-bit.
           Action: Create two segments (one for 16-bit, one for 32-bit), or
           make sure the segment is defined one way and relink.

 L1126     conflicting IOPL-parameter-words value
           Explanation: The IOPL parameter words in the .DEF file does not
           exactly match those in the corresponding EXPDEF object record.
           Action: Make sure .DEF file coincides with that defined in .OBJ.
           Relink.

 L1128     too many nested include files in module-definition file
           Explanation: The .DEF file exceeded a nesting level.
           Action: Combine some nestings into one .DEF file and try again.

 L1129     missing or bad include file name
           Explanation: LINK386 could not find a file included by .DEF file.
           Action: Make sure the file exists and can be located and that any
           path is specified correctly. Try again.

 L1130     internal fix-up applied to undefined area at offset in object number
           Explanation: LINK386 attempted to apply an internal fix-up beyond
           the defined limits of the object.
           Action: This is probably a compiler or assembler error. Revise the
           source file and re-create the object file. If that does not work,
           contact your supplier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1.4. Fatal Error Messages (Part 4) 1200 - 1218 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 L1200     out of memory for page range information
           Explanation: The total size of all page range information is greater
           than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1201     out of memory for contribution information
           Explanation: The total size of the contribution information is
           greater than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1202     out of memory for executable string information
           Explanation: The total size of all executable string information is
           greater than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1203     out of memory for identifier mangler DLL information
           Explanation: The total size of all identifier mangler DLL
           information is greater than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1204     out of memory for object page table information
           Explanation: The total size of the object page table information is
           greater than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1205     out of memory for fixup record information
           Explanation: The total size of all fixup record information is
           greater than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1206     out of memory for fix up page table information
           Explanation: The total size of all fix up page table information is
           greater than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1207     out of memory for import module information
           Explanation: The total size of the import module information is
           greater than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1208     out of memory for page directory information
           Explanation: The total size of the page directory is greater than
           the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1209     out of memory for object page directory information
           Explanation: The total size of the object page director is greater
           than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1210     out of memory for module reference table information
           Explanation: The total size of the module reference table is greater
           than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1211     out of memory for chained relocation hash buckets
           Explanation: The total size of the relocation bucket is greater than
           the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1212     out of memory for chained relocation hash tables
           Explanation: The total size of the relocation hash tables is greater
           than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1213     out of memory for entry point information
           Explanation: The total size of the entry point information is
           greater than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1214     out of memory for entry table area
           Explanation: The total size of the entry table are is greater than
           the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1215     out of memory for imported names information
            Explanation: The total size of the imported names information is
           greater than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1216     out of memory for comdat iterated data
           Explanation: The total size of all comdat iterated is greater than
           the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1217     out of memory for back patch information
           Explanation: The total size of the back patch information is greater
           than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.

 L1218     out of memory for property list tables
           Explanation: The total size of the property list table is greater
           than the internal limit in LINK386.
           Action: Reduce the size of the executable, consider using dynamic
           link libraries to split the program into smaller modules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1.5. Nonfatal Error Messages 2000 - 2063 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 L2000     imported starting address
           Explanation:  A MODEND, or starting address record, referred to an
           imported name. Imported program-starting addresses are not
           supported.
           Action: The starting address record must refer to a non imported
           name. Edit the source file and recompile or reassemble.

 L2002     fix-up overflow at location in segment name
           Explanation: A fix up overflow occurred near location, in the named
           segment. See Conditions That Can Cause LINK386 Error 2002.
           Action: Revise the source file and re-create the object file. If
           that does not work, contact your supplier.

 L2003     inter segment self-relative fix-up at location in segment name
           Explanation: LINK386 detected an inter segment self-relative fix-up.
           A self-relative fix-up cannot be in another segment. This is
           probably caused by a near reference to procedure located in another
           segment.
           Action: Revise the source file and re-create the object file. If
           that does not work, contact your supplier.

 L2005     fix-up type unsupported at location in segment name
           Explanation:  LINK386 detected an unsupported fix up type. This is
           probably a compiler or assembler error.
           Action: Revise the source file and re-create the object file. If
           that does not work, contact your supplier.

 L2010     too many fix-ups in LIDATA record
           Explanation:  There are more fix ups applying to a LIDATA record
           than will fit into the LINK386's 1024 byte buffer. The buffer is
           divided between the data in the LIDATA record itself and the
           run-time relocation items.  These are 8 bytes each, so the maximum
           varies from 0 to 128.  This is probably a compiler error.
           Action: Revise the source file and re-create the object file. If
           that does not work, contact your supplier.

 L2011     name: NEAR/HUGE conflict
           Explanation:  There are conflicting NEAR and HUGE attributes for a
           communal variable. This error can occur only with programs produced
           by compilers that support communal variables.
           Action: Specify only one of these attributes.

 L2012     name: array-element size mismatch
           Explanation: A far communal array has been declared with two or more
           different array-element sizes (for example, an array declared once
           as an array of characters and once as an array of real numbers).
           This error occurs only when using compilers that support far
           communal arrays.
           Action: Match the definitions and re-create the object module or
           modules.

 L2013     LIDATA record too large
           Explanation: A LIDATA record in an object module contains more than
           512 bytes of data. It is likely that one of your assembler modules
           contains a complex structure definition or a series of deeply-nested
           DUP operators. (LIDATA is a DOS term.)
           Example: The following structure definition causes this error:

                      alpha   DB     10DUP(11 DUP(12 DUP(13 DUP(...))))

           Action: Simplify the structure definition and reassemble the module.

 L2022     name (alias internalname) : export undefined
           Explanation: A name has been directed to be exported but is not
           defined anywhere.
           Action: Edit the source file and define the export.

 L2023     name (alias internalname) : export imported
           Explanation: An imported name has been directed to be exported.
           Items that are not in the source file itself cannot be exported. You
           cannot export this imported name.
           Action: Edit the source file to not export the imported name.

 L2024     name: special symbol already defined
           Explanation: Your program defined a symbol name that LINK386 already
           used for one of its low-level symbols.  For example, the linker
           generates special names for overlay support.
           Action: Edit the source file and choose another name for the symbol.

 L2025     name: symbol defined more than once
           Explanation: A symbol has been defined more than once in the object
           file.
           Action: Edit the source file, removing the extra symbol definition.

 L2026     entry ordinal number, name name : multiple definitions for same
           ordinal
           Explanation: More than one entry point name has been assigned to the
           same ordinal in the module definition file.
           Action: Edit the module definition file to correct the usage of the
           ordinal.

 L2027     number: ordinal too large for export
           Explanation: You tried to export more than 3072 names or indicated
           too large of an ordinal.
           Action: Edit the source file or define smaller ordinals in the
           module definition file.

 L2029     string: unresolved external
           Explanation: A symbol declared to be external in one or more modules
           was not found among the given objects and libraries.
           Action: Supply files that will resolve these external calls.

 L2030     starting address not code (use class `CODE')
           Explanation: You specified a starting address to LINK386 that is not
           within a segment of type 'CODE.'
           Action: Reclassify the segment to CODE, or correct the starting
           point.

 L2044     string: symbol multiple defines, use /NOE
           Explanation: The symbol shown was defined more than once, perhaps
           for different things.
           Action: Recompile with the /NOEXDICTIONARY option.

 L2047     IOPL attribute conflict - segment: name in group:name
           Explanation: The segment indicated within the group shown has
           different IOPL attributes from the rest of the segments in the
           group.
           Action: Remove the segment from the group or make sure all segments
           have the same IOPL attributes. Relink.

 L2050     use16/use32 attribute conflict - segment:name in group:name
           Explanation: The segment indicated within the group shown has a
           different USE16/USE32 attribute from the rest of the segments in the
           group.
           Action: Remove the segment from the group or make sure all segments
           have the same USE16/USE32 attribute.

 L2052     name: unresolved external - possible calling convention mismatch
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered an undefined external, which could
           be a fast-call/C-call mismatch.
           Action: Make sure the external is defined and called the same way
           (for example, all C-calls).

 L2053     call gates are NOT allowed in 32-bit object if its size exceeds 64K
           - memory object number number
           Explanation: The memory object indicated is larger than 64K and uses
           call gates.
           Action: Remove the call gates or break the object into smaller
           portions.  Relink.

 L2054     data for invalid page in segment name
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered data past the defined end of
           initialized data in the segment indicated.
           Action:  The .OBJ is probably corrupted. Recompile or reassemble and
           try again.  If that does not work, contact your supplier.

 L2055     fix-up for invalid page at location in segment name
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered a fixup past the defined end of
           initialized data in the segment indicated.
           Action: The .OBJ is probably corrupted. Recompile or reassemble and
           try again.  If that does not work, contact your

 L2056     object type conflict - segment: name in group: name
           Explanation: The segment indicated within the group shown has a
           different TYPE attribute from the rest of the segments in the group.
           Action: Remove the segment from the group or make sure all segments
           have the same TYPE attribute.

 L2057     duplicate of name with different size found; record ignored
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered two COMDAT records with the
           selection type "SAME SIZE." The records have the same name but have
           different sizes.
           Action: The .OBJ is probably corrupted. Recompile or reassemble and
           try again.  If that does not work, contact your

 L2058     different duplicate of name found; record ignored
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered two COMDAT records with the
           selection type "EXACT." The records have the same name but have
           different sizes.
           Action: The .OBJ is probably corrupted. Recompile or reassemble and
           try again.  If that does not work, contact your

 L2059     size of the data block associated with name exceeds 4G
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered a continuation COMDAT record whose
           additional size made the communal data too large.
           Action: The .OBJ is probably corrupted. Recompile or reassemble and
           try again.  If that does not work, contact your

 L2061     no space for the data block associated with record name inside the
           segment name
           Explanation: While being allocated space for a COMDAT record inside
           the segment indicated, the segment grew larger than 64K.
           Action: Make the segment smaller or move communal data into a
           different segment.

 L2062     continuation of COMDAT name has conflicting attributes; record
           ignored
           Explanation: While concatenating the COMDAT record indicated,
           LINK386 found attributes that differ from those defined in the
           initial COMDAT record.
           Action: The .OBJ is probably corrupted. Recompile or reassemble and
           try again.  If that does not work, contact your

 L2063     name allocated in undefined segment
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered a COMDAT record in an undefined
           explicit allocation segment.
           Action: The .OBJ is probably corrupted. Recompile or reassemble and
           try again.  If that does not work, contact your supplier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1.6. Warning Error Messages 4000 - 4087 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 L4000     seg disp. included near location in segment name
           Explanation: This error is caused by using the LINK386 Warning of
           Fix-ups (/W) option.
           Action: The segment name and the location offset is displayed.

 L4001     frame-relative fix-up, frame ignored near location in segment name
           Explanation: A fix up occurred with a frame segment different from
           the target segment where either the frame or the target segment is
           not absolute. Such a fix-up is meaningless in the OS/2 environment,
           so the target segment is assumed for the frame segment. This error
           sometimes occurs if a 32-bit data item is referenced as if it were
           in a 16-bit segment or a 16-bit segment referenced as if it were in
           a 32-bit segment.
           Action: Check that this is acceptable.

 L4002     frame-relative absolute fix-up near location in segment name
           Explanation: A fix up occurred with a frame segment different from
           the target segment where both frame and target segments are
           absolute. This fix up is processed using base-offset arithmetic, but
           the warning is issued because the fix up might not be valid in the
           OS/2 environment. This error sometimes occurs if a 32-bit data item
           is referenced as if it were in a 16-bit segment or a 16-bit segment
           referenced as if it were in a 32-bit segment.
           Action: Check that this is acceptable.

 L4003     intersegment self-relative fix up at location in segment name
           Explanation: LINK386 found an intersegment self-relative fix-up at
           the specified location. This might cause a problem with the
           executable file.
           Action: The error might have been caused by the way the program was
           written or when it was compiled or assembled.

 L4004     possible fix-up overflow at location in segment name
           Explanation: LINK386 found a possible fix-up overflow at the
           specified location. This might cause a problem with the executable
           file.
           Action: The error might have been caused by the way the program was
           written or when it was compiled or assembled.

 L4005     32-bit fix-up in 16-bit record ignored at location in segment name
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered a 32-bit fix-up in a 16-bit record
           at the specified location. This might cause a problem with the
           executable file.
           Action: The error might have been caused by the way the program was
           written or when it was compiled or assembled.

 L4006     illegal 16-bit flat-relative offset fix-up at location in object
           name
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered an illegal 16-bit flat relative
           offset fix-up at the specified location. This might cause a problem
           with the executable file. This error sometimes occurs if a 32-bit
           data item is referenced as if it were in a 16-bit segment or a
           16-bit segment referenced as if it were in a 32-bit segment.
           Action: The error might have been caused by the way the program was
           written or when it was compiled or assembled.

 L4007     illegal 16-bit flat-relative pointer fix-up at location in object
           name
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered an illegal 16-bit flat-relative
           pointer fix-up at the specified location. This error sometimes
           occurs if a 32-bit data item is referenced as if it were in a 16-bit
           segment or a 16-bit segment referenced as if it were in a 32-bit
           segment.
           Action: The error might have been caused by the way the program was
           written or when it was compiled or assembled.

 L4008     aliased fix-up to non-alias object near location in object name
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered an aliased fix-up to a non-alias
           object at the specified location. This error sometimes occurs if a
           32-bit data item is referenced as if it were in a 16-bit segment or
           a 16-bit segment referenced as if it were in a 32-bit segment.
           Action: The error might have been caused by the way the program was
           written or when it was compiled or assembled.

 L4009     illegal target of flat-relative fix-up ignored at number in segment
           name
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered an illegal flat-relative fix-up at
           the specified location.
           Action: The error might have been caused by the way the program was
           written or when it was compiled or assembled.

 L4010     invalid alignment specification; assuming number
           Explanation: The number following the /ALIGNMENT option is not a
           power of 2, or is not in numerical form. The maximum alignment value
           is 4096.
           Action: If the default alignment of 512 is not acceptable, restart
           LINK386 using a valid number.

 L4017     name: unrecognized option name; option ignored
           Explanation: The option specified is not valid for LINK386.
           Action: Specify a valid option or remove the unrecognized option and
           relink.

 L4018     missing or bad application type; option name ignored
           Explanation: The /PMTYPE option was specified without an application
           type or with an invalid application type.
           Action: Relink with an application type of PM, VIO, or NOVIO.

 L4020     name: code segment size exceeds 65,500
           Explanation: The code segment indicated is larger than 65,500 bytes
           and might not be reliable.
           Action: Break the segment into smaller segments and try again.

 L4021     no stack segment
           Explanation: The program does not contain a stack segment defined
           with the STACK combine type. Normally, every .EXE program should
           have a stack segment with the combine type specified as STACK.
           Action: You can ignore this message if you have a specific reason
           for not defining a stack or for defining one without the STACK
           combine type.

 L4022     name1, name2: groups overlap
           Explanation: Two groups are defined in such a way that one starts in
           the middle of another. This can occur if you defined segments in a
           module definition file or assembly file and did not correctly order
           the segments by class.
           Action: Edit the source file and reorder the segments in the group.

 L4023     name (alias): export internal name conflict
           Explanation: An exported name, or its associated internal name,
           conflicts with an already defined public symbol.
           Action: Edit the source file using new names.

 L4024     name: multiple definitions for export name
           Explanation: The module named has been exported more than once with
           different internal names. All internal names except the first one
           are ignored.
           Action: Edit the source file using new names.

 L4025     modname impname (intname): import internal name conflict
           Explanation: An imported name, or its associated internal name, is
           also defined as an exported name. The import name is ignored. The
           conflict could come from a definition in either the module
           definition file or an object file.
           Action: Edit the source file or module definition file using new
           names.

 L4026     modname impname (intname): self-imported
           Explanation: The module definition file directed that a name be
           imported from the module being produced.
           Action: Edit the module definition file.

 L4027     name: multiple definitions for import internal name
           Explanation: An imported name, or its associated internal name, is
           imported more than once. The imported name is ignored after the
           first mention.
           Action: Check that the name has been defined correctly.

 L4028     name: segment already defined
           Explanation: A segment is defined more than once with the same name
           in the module definition file. Segments must have unique names for
           LINK386. All definitions with the same name are ignored after the
           first mention.
           Action: Check that the segment has been defined correctly.

 L4029     name: DGROUP segment converted to type data
           Explanation: A segment that is a member of DGROUP has been defined
           as type CODE in a module definition file or object file. This
           probably happened because a CLASS keyword in a SEGMENTS statement
           was not given.
           Action: Check the module definition file syntax.

 L4030     name: segment attributes changed to conform with automatic data
           segment
           Explanation: The segment named is defined in DGROUP, but the shared
           attribute is in conflict with the instance attribute.
           Example:  The shared attribute is NONSHARED and the instance
           attribute is SINGLE, or the shared attribute is SHARED and the
           instance attribute is MULTIPLE. The bad segment is forced to have
           the right shared attribute and the link continues.
           Action: Check that the LINK386 action is acceptable.

 L4031     name: segment declared in more than one group
           Explanation: A segment is declared to be a member of two different
           groups.
           Action: Correct the source file and re-create the object files.

 L4032     name: code-group size exceeds 65500 bytes
           Explanation: The code group indicated is larger than 65500 bytes and
           therefore might not be reliable.
           Action: Break the group into smaller groups or remove one or more
           segments and try again.

 L4036     no automatic data segment
           Explanation: The program or dynamic link library did not define a
           group named DGROUP. This is recognized by LINK386 as the automatic
           data segment.
           Action: Edit the source file.

 L4038     program has no starting address
           Explanation: The program did not contain a starting address.
           Physical Device Drivers do not have program starting addresses, so
           this error can be ignored when linking Physical Device Drives.
           Action: Recompile the program and try again.

 L4044     CODE segment :name in DATA group:name; assuming DATA
           Explanation: A CODE statement in a module definition file was used
           to define default attributes for a DATA segment.
           Action: Define a CODE statement and relink.

 L4045     name of output file is name
           Explanation: A dynamic link library file was created without
           specifying an extension.  In such cases, LINK386 supplies an
           extension of .DLL.  This is to warn you in case you expected an .EXE
           file to be generated
           Action: No action.

 L4046     DATA segment: name in CODE group: name; assuming CODE
           Explanation: A DATA statement in a module definition file was used
           to define default attributes for a CODE segment.
           Action: Define a DATA statement and relink.

 L4048     ignoring non-zero heap size
           Explanation: The module definition file does not contain a HEAPSIZE
           statement.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4049     ignoring non-zero stack size
           Explanation: The module definition file does not contain a STACKSIZE
           statement.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4051     filename: cannot find library
           Explanation: LINK386 could not find the specified library file.
           Action: Enter a new file name, a new path specification, or both.

 L4053     VM.TMP :illegal file name; ignored
           Explanation: VM.TMP cannot be used for an object file name.
           Action: Rename the file and restart LINK386.

 L4054     filename: cannot find file
           Explanation: LINK386 could not find the specified file.
           Action: Enter a new file name, a new path specification, or both.

 L4067     changing default resolution for weak external name from oldname to
           newname
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered a redefinition of a default
           resolution and is changing it to the value indicated.
           Action: If the change is OK, no action is required; otherwise, fix
           the module definition file and try again.

 L4068     ignoring stack size greater than 64K
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered a stack greater than 64K or zero
           and is assuming a stack size of 65,534.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4069     filename truncated to name
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered a file name greater than 256 bytes
           (including terminating null) and truncated it to the size indicated.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4071     application type not specified; assuming name
           Explanation: An application type of WINDOWAPI, WINDOWCOMPAT,
           NOTWINDOWCOMPAT, or PRIVATE was not specified. LINK386 is assuming
           the application type indicated.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4072     changing application type from oldname to newname
           Explanation: The application type specified with /PMTYPE is
           different from that in .DEF file. LINK386 is using the application
           type indicated.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4073     name: 32-bit aliased data segment size exceeds 64K
           Explanation: The segment indicated is greater than 64K in length and
           is a 32-bit aliased data segment
           Action: If this is expected, do nothing; if not, break into smaller
           segments.

 L4074     attribute conflict for segment name; ignoring attribute type
           Explanation: The segment indicated for the .DEF file is defined with
           conflicting characteristics. LINK386 is ignoring the attribute
           indicated.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4075     object type conflict - assuming name
           Explanation: The .DEF files specified conflicting attributes for an
           object; only one of the following attributes are allowed: RESIDENT,
           NONPERMANENT, PERMANENT, CONTIGUOUS, or DYNAMIC. LINK386 is assuming
           the attribute indicated.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4077     symbol name not defined; ordered allocation ignored
           Explanation: While doing ordered allocation of COMDAT records,
           LINK386 encountered an undefined COMDAT record; ordered allocation
           is determined from the .DEF file.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4079     symbol name already defined for ordered allocation; duplicate
           ignored
           Explanation: While processing ORDER list in .DEF file, LINK386
           encountered a COMDAT record already defined for ordered allocation.
           Action: Edit the file and relink.

 L4080     changing substitute name for alias name from name to name
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered an alias redefiniton and is
           changing it to the values indicated.
           Action: If this is OK, no action is required. Otherwise, edit the
           file and relink.

 L4082     name ignored for module with 16-bit starting address
           Explanation: LINK386 encountered a DLL module with a 16-bit entry
           point requesting termination. Only modules with 32-bit entry points
           can specify DLL termination.
           Action: Remove the termination request from the module definition
           file.

 L4083     invalid base address specification; assuming number
           Explanation: The base address specified with the /BASE option or in
           the module definition file is illegal, and LINK386 is assuming the
           given value.
           Action: Change the base address if necessary; otherwise, ignore the
           message.

 L4084     module name truncated to string
           Explanation: The module name was truncated to the number of
           characters indicated.
           Action: If this action is satisfactory, no action is required.
           Otherwise, edit the module definition file and shorten the name.

 L4085     name (alias alias name): forwarder entry created for imported export
           Explanation: LINK386 created a forwarder entry within the entry
           table for the named export.
           Action: If this action is satisfactory, no action is required.

 L4087     internal fix-up applied to uninitialized area at offset in object
           number
           Explanation: LINK386 attempted to apply an internal fix-up beyond
           the initialize limits of the object.
           Action: If this is acceptable, no action is required. If the problem
           continues, you might want to disable based addressing.

 L4090     cannot load identifier manipulation DLL name
           Explanation:  LINK386 detected an error while trying to load an
           identifier manipulator dynamic link library.  This DLL was specified
           in an object file, and is used by LINK386 to demangle a compiler
           generated mangled name into a function prototype when printing an
           error message.  Error messages will not be demangled for this object
           file.
           Action:  Make sure the appropriate identifier manipulator DLL is in
           the LIBPATH.

 L4091     cannot locate procedure in identifier manipulation DLL name
           Explanation: LINK386 detected an error while trying to load a
           procedure from an identifier manipulator dynamic link library.  This
           DLL was specified in an object file, and is used by LINK386 to
           demangle a compiler generated mangled name into a function prototype
           when printing an error message.  Error messages will not be
           demangled for this object file.
           Action: Make sure the appropriate identifier manipulator DLL is in
           the LIBPATH.

 L4092     too many identifier manipulation DLLs
           Explanation: Too many identifier manipulator dynamic link libraries
           have been specified.  These DLLs are specified in object files, and
           are used by LINK386 to demangle compiler generated mangled names
           into function prototypes when printing an error messages. Error
           messages may not be demangled for some object files.
           Action: Reduce the number of different compilers used to create the
           objects.

 L4093     cannot initialize identifier manipulation DLL name
           Explanation: LINK386 detected an error while trying to initialize an
           identifier manipulator dynamic link library.  This DLL was specified
           in an object file, and is used by LINK386 to demangle a compiler
           generated mangled name into a function prototype when printing an
           error message. Error messages will not be demangled for this object
           file.
           Action: Make sure the appropriate identifier manipulator DLL is in
           the LIBPATH.

 L4094     increasing stack size from number to number
           Explanation: The stack size specified by either

             1. size of a segment with combine type stack
             2. STACKSIZE statement in the .DEF file
             3. /STACK LINK386 command line option

           will cause a system error if the program is executed on an OS/2 2.x
           system.  LINK386 has changed the stacksize to a larger value to
           preserve compatibility.
           Action: No action required, LINK386 has corrected the problem.  To
           eliminate the warning message, restart LINK386 and specify the new
           stack size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1.7. Conditions That Can Cause LINK386 Error 2002 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LINK386 Error 2002 can be caused by the following conditions:

   o  A group is larger than 64K.
   o  The program contains an intersegment short jump or intersegment short
      call.
   o  The name of a data item in the program conflicts with that of a
      subroutine in a library included in the link.
   o  An EXTRN declaration in an assembler language source file appeared inside
      the body of a segment, as in the following example:

            code    SEGMENT public  'CODE'
                    EXTRN   main:far
            start   PROC    far
                    call    main
                    ret
            start   ENDP
            code    ENDS

      The following construction is preferred:

                    EXTRN   main:far
            code    SEGMENT public  'CODE'
            start   PROC    far
                    call    main
                    ret
            start   ENDP
            code    ENDS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. Make Message File (MKMSGF) Error Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 MKMSGF: Codepage %s is all zeroes
           Explanation: The code-page ID specified with the /P option is zero.
           The message file is built with a code-page of zero.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct code-page specification.

 MKMSGF: Codepage %s error in numeric conversion
           Explanation: The code-page ID specified with the /P option is not
           numeric. The message file is built with a code-page of zero.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct code-page specification.

 MKMSGF: Codepage %s is too large
           Explanation: The code-page ID specified with the /P option is too
           large. The message file is built with a code-page of zero.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct code-page specification.

 MKMSGF: Country %u is not supported
           Explanation: The country ID specified within the /D option is not
           supported. MKMSGF processing is stopped.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct country code
           specification.

 MKMSGF: DBCS code page not found
           Explanation: No DBCS code page has been found that supports the DBCS
           range specified in the /D option.  MKMSGF processing is stopped.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct DBCS ranges or country
           ID for the input message file.

 MKMSGF: Error reading input file
           Explanation: Error during input from source file.
           Action: Make sure the source message file exists and that the drive
           is ready.  Retry the command.

 MKMSGF: Error writing output file
           Explanation: Error during output to target file.
           Action: Make sure there is sufficient disk space or that the drive
           is ready.  Retry the command.

 MKMSGF: File not found
           Explanation: Input file could not be found.
           Action: Retry the command, using the correct source message file
           name.

 MKMSGF: Infile[.ext] outfile[.ext] [/V]
 [/D <DBCS range or country>] [/P <code page>] [/L <language id,sub id>]
           Explanation: This is the proper syntax for MKMSGF.  It is displayed
           when no operands are specified on the command line and after some
           syntax errors.
           Action: None.

 MKMSGF: Input file same as output file
           Explanation: The input and output file names are the same.
           Processing is stopped.
           Action: Correct the command line or the control file and restart
           MKMSGF.

 MKMSGF: Insufficient storage
           Explanation: Not enough storage to execute program or too many
           messages in the file.  Message limit is about 6000.
           Action: Reduce the number of programs running in your system, or
           reduce the size of the message file by either deleting messages or
           by reducing the size of each message.  Retry the command.

 MKMSGF: Invalid language or sub id
           Explanation: The language family ID specified with the /L option is
           not supported.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct language family ID.

 MKMSGF: Invalid message file format
           Explanation: Input file is not a recognizable message text file.
           Action: If an incorrect file name was entered, retry the command
           with the correct source message file name.

 MKMSGF: Language family %s is all zeroes
           Explanation: The language family ID specified with the /L option is
           zero. The message file is built with a language family ID of zero.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct language family ID.

 MKMSGF: Language family %s error in numeric conversion
           Explanation: The language family ID specified with the /L option is
           not numeric.  The message file is built with a language family ID of
           zero.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct language family ID.

 MKMSGF: Language family %s is too large
           Explanation: The language family ID specified with the /L option is
           not supported.  The message file is built with a language family ID
           of zero.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct language family ID.

 MKMSGF: Message ID out of sequence
           Explanation: A message was detected that was out of the required
           sequential order.
           Action: Correct the error by editing your source message file and
           renumbering the messages. You might also want to delete or insert
           the appropriate message numbers to achieve the required sequential
           order.

 MKMSGF: Message XXXX too long
           Explanation: The message was too long to be processed (limit is
           approximately 2K characters).
           Action: Correct the error by editing your source message file and
           making the message shorter. Then, retry the command.

 MKMSGF: More than NN codepages entered
           Explanation: A maximum of NN code-page IDs may specified for a
           single message fil   e, Only the first NN will be accepted.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct code-page
           specifications.

 MKMSGF: No sub id using 1 default
           Explanation: The language version ID specified with the /L option is
           either invalid or not supported.  The message file is built using
           the default value shown.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct language version ID.

 MKMSGF: Sub id %s error in numeric conversion
           Explanation: The language version specified with the /L option is
           not numeric. The message file is built with a default language
           version.
           Action: Retry the command using the correct language version ID.

 MKMSGF: Syntax error
           Explanation: You entered the command incorrectly.
           Action: Retry the command using proper syntax. To display the proper
           syntax, type MKMSGF at the command line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.1. Message Segment Binder (MSGBIND) Error Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 MSGBIND: I/O error seeking infile
           Explanation: A disk error occurred while seeking either the message
           file or the .EXE file.
           Action: Run CHKDSK on the drive containing the file and restart
           MSGBIND.

 MSGBIND: I/O error writing file
           Explanation: A disk error occurred while writing messages to the
           .EXE file.
           Action: Run CHKDSK on the drive containing the .EXE file, and
           restart MSGBIND.

 MSGBIND: Must specify .EXE file before message file
           Explanation: The input file was in error.
           Action: Correct input file.

 MSGBIND: Must specify message file before message number
           Explanation: The input file was in error.
           Action: Correct the input file.

 MSGBIND: Out of memory, needed xxxx bytes
           Explanation: There was not enough memory available to run MSGBIND.
           Action: Reduce the number of programs presently running in your
           system and restart MSGBIND.

 MSGBIND: Premature EOF during copy
           Explanation: The .EXE file was not built correctly.
           Action: Rebuild the .EXE file and restart MSGBIND.

 MSGBIND: Unable to create temp file-MSGBIND.TMP
           Explanation: An error occurred while creating the intermediary file
           MSGBIND.TMP.
           Action: Delete or move files to make disk space available. If
           MSGBIND.TMP is present as a read-only file, it must first be
           deleted. Restart MSGBIND.

 MSGBIND: Unable to open xxxxxxxx
           Explanation: The input file specified was not found or an error
           occurred when opening the message file.
           Action: Restart MSGBIND using the correct input file name or a
           backup copy of the message file.

 Number of Message Files exceeded. Only nnn allowed
           Explanation: The number of message files specified in the input file
           exceeds the maximum number of files that MSGBIND can process at one
           time.
           Action: Correct the input file or combine message files, and then
           restart MSGBIND.

 Reading messages from xxxxxxxx
           Explanation: Messages from the displayed message file are being read
           into memory.
           Action: None. This message is for information only.

 Reading messages from xxxxxxxx -file not found
           Explanation: The message file was not found in the path specified in
           the input file.
           Action: Edit the input file, correcting the path or file name, or
           both.  Restart MSGBIND.

 Reading messages from xxxxxxxx -not created with MKMSGF program
           Explanation: The message file displayed was not created using the
           MKMSGF program.
           Action: Convert the source message file to a formatted message file
           using the MKMSGF program, and restart MSGBIND. See the Make Message
           File (MKMSGF).

 Reading messages from xxxxxxxx -not enough memory
           Explanation: There was not enough memory available to store the
           messages.
           Action: Reduce the number of programs running in your system, and
           restart MSGBIND.

 The object that would contain the bound messages would be too large. Refer to
 the Toolkit Documentation for more information.
           Explanation: (self explanatory)
           Action: Do one or more, of the following:

   1. Modify the module definition file to isolate the message object, and then
      relink the application.
   2. Reduce the number of messages to be bound to the application as specified
      in the input file.
   3. Reduce the size of the messages and rebuild the message file with MKMSGF.
   4. Then restart MSGBIND.

 Unable to bind message nnnn, message segment would exceed 64K. The remaining
 messages will NOT be bound.
           Explanation: (self explanatory)
           Action: Do one or more, of the following:

   1. Modify the module definition file to isolate the message object, and then
      relink the application.
   2. Reduce the number of messages to be bound to the application as specified
      in the input file.
   3. Reduce the size of the messages and rebuild the message file with MKMSGF.
   4. Then restart MSGBIND.

 Unable to locate call to Dos32GetMessage, messages will not be bound.
           Explanation: The executable file to be modified makes no function
           calls to the message retriever, or was not linked with the correct
           library file.
           Action: If the application does use the message retriever function,
           such as DosGetMessage, relink the application using the correct
           library file, and then restart MSGBIND.

           If not, messages cannot be bound to the application.

 Updating xxxxxxxx
           Explanation: The .EXE file name displayed is being updated with the
           requested messages.
           Action: None. This message is for information only.

 Updating xxxxxxxx -file not found
           Explanation: The .EXE file name was not found in the path specified
           in the input file.
           Action: Edit the input file, correcting the path or file name, or
           both.  Restart MSGBIND.

 Updating xxxxxxxx -not linked with MSGSEG.OBJ
           Explanation: The .EXE file name displayed made no DosGetMessage
           functions, or the .EXE file was not linked with the correct library.
           Messages can only be bound to applications that call message
           retriever functions, such as DosGetMessage.
           Action: If the .EXE file does make calls to message retriever
           functions, relink the application using the correct library, and
           restart MSGBIND.

 usage: MSGBIND scriptfile
           Explanation: The command was entered incorrectly.
           Action: Restart MSGBIND. Refer to Syntax for the correct syntax.

 Warning: No msgseg data found in new executable
           Explanation: The executable file to be modified makes no function
           calls to the message retriever, or was not linked with the correct
           library file.
           Action: If the application does use the message retriever function,
           such as DosGetMessage, relink the application using the correct
           library file, and then restart MSGBIND.

           If not, messages cannot be bound to the application.

 WARNING: Skipping messages for this file
           Explanation: The .EXE file was in error, so the messages were not
           bound to it. Either the .EXE file does not exist, or it has not been
           linked with the correct library.
           Action: If the .EXE file name is correct, relink the application
           using the correct library, and restart MSGBIND.

 WARNING: Skipping message numbers for this file
           Explanation: The message file was in error, so all messages from
           this message file were ignored. The message file might not exist,
           might not be formatted correctly, or there might not be enough
           memory to store all the messages.
           Action: If the message file name is correct and has been correctly
           formatted, check the memory available for the file. Restart MSGBIND.

 WARNING: xxxx is an invalid message number
           Explanation: The message number specified was not found in the
           message file.
           Action: Edit the input file and correct any message numbers that are
           in error. Restart MSGBIND.

 Writing messages
           Explanation: The .EXE file is being updated with the messages
           requested.
           Action: None. This message is for information only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.2. Resource Compiler Error Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The error messages produced by the resource compiler utility (RC) and its
preprocessor are listed below.

RC Preprocessor Fatal Error Messages

Error Message Descriptions

 C1012
           bad parenthesis nesting - missing symbol
           Explanation: You wrote an expression which was missing the given
           left or right parenthesis symbol.
           Action: Rewrite the expression with balanced parentheses.
 C1014
           too many include files
           Explanation: You might have tried to include a file recursively.
           Action: Remove the include directive for any file which has already
           been included to the preprocessor.
 C1015
           cannot open include file 'filename'
           Explanation: The preprocessor could not locate the given include
           file.
           Action: If the include file is not in the current directory or in a
           directory named in the INCLUDE environment variable, or in a
           directory specified by a -i option, you must provide the full path
           and include file name.
 C1016
           #if[n]def expected an identifier
           Explanation:You wrote an ifdef or ifndef directive with no macro
           name.
           Action: Supply the missing name.
 C1017
           invalid integer constant expression
           Explanation: You used an incorrect expression where an integer
           constant was expected.
           Action: Supply a correct expression to the directive.
 C1018
           unexpected #elif
           Explanation: You used a directive in an incorrect context.
           Action: Correct the logic of the if directives.
 C1019
           unexpected #else
           Explanation: You used a directive in an incorrect context.
           Action: Correct the logic of the if directives.
 C1020
           unexpected #endif
           Explanation: You used a directive in an incorrect context.
           Action: Correct the logic of the if directives.
 C1021
           bad preprocessor command 'command'
           Explanation: The given command is not a recognized directive.  You
           might have misspelled the directive.
           Action: Use the correct spelling for the directive.
 C1022
           expected #endif
           Explanation: You wrote an if directive but omitted any endif.
           Action: Supply the missing endif directive.
 C1056
           compiler limit 'name' out of macro expansion space
           Explanation: The macro called name expanded to a length exceeding
           2042 bytes.
           Action: Revise your definition of the macro so that its value is
           shorter than the length limit.
 C1065
           compiler limit 'name' macro definition too big
           Explanation: The macro called name expanded to a length exceeding
           2042 bytes.
           Action: Revise your definition of the macro so that its value is
           shorter than the length limit.

           Resource Compiler Preprocessor Error Messages
 C2001
           newline in constant
           Explanation: You wrote a string literal constant without the closing
           double quotation mark.
           Action: Provide the ending double quote for the string.
 C2004
           expected defined(id)
           Explanation: You wrote an if defined directive but omitted the macro
           name.
           Action: Supply the missing macro name.
 C2006
           #include expected a file name,found text
           Explanation: The preprocessor found the given text instead of an
           include file name.
           Action Supply the correct include file name.
 C2007
           #define syntax
           Explanation: The syntax of your define directive is incorrect.
           Action: Use the correct form as described for the define directive.
 C2014
           preprocessor command must start as first non-white space
           Explanation: You wrote a directive with text on the line before the
           number sign (#).
           Action: Put the number sign at the beginning of a line.

           RC Preprocessor warnings
 C4005
           name redefinition
           Explanation: You attempted to redefine the macro name to a value
           different from its current definition.
           Action: To use a different macro value, define it as a macro using
           another macro name.
 C4067
           unexpected characters following include directive -newline expected
           Explanation: You specified a filename to an include directive
           without surrounding the name by double quotation marks or angle
           brackets.
           Action: Use double quotation marks or angle brackets around the
           include filename.
 C4067
           unexpected characters following 'endif' directive - newline expected
           Explanation: No characters should appear on the line of an endif or
           else directive after the directive keyword.
           Action: Remove the extra characters.
 C4067
           unexpected characters following 'else' directive-newline expected.
           Explanation: No characters should appear on the line of an endif or
           else directive after the directive keyword.
           Action: Remove the extra characters.
 C4067
           unexpected characters following 'undef' directive - newline expected
           Explanation: You can undefine only one macro on an undef directive.
           Action:Use separate undef directive to undefine more than one macro.

 Accelerator type required (CHAR, SCANCODE, or VIRTUALKEY)
           Explanation: An acceloption has not been specified in the
           accelerator table to define the type of accelerator. If the
           accelerator character code is something other than a single
           character or a character preceded by a caret ( ^ ), an acceloption
           is required.
           Action: Check accelerator table syntax.
 BEGIN expected in accelerator table
           Explanation: BEGIN keyword missing from accelerator table.
           Action: Check syntax.
 BEGIN expected in dialog or window template
           Explanation: BEGIN keyword missing from dialog or window template.
           Action: Check syntax.
 BEGIN expected in menu
           Explanation: BEGIN keyword missing from menu.
           Action: Check syntax.
 BEGIN expected in message table
           Explanation: BEGIN keyword missing from message table.
           Action: Check syntax.
 BEGIN expected in RCData
           Explanation: BEGIN keyword missing from RCData table.
           Action: Check syntax.
 BEGIN expected in String Table
           Explanation: BEGIN keyword missing from string table.
           Action: Check syntax.
 Cannot re-use message constants
           Explanation: Message identifier has been used more than once in
           message table.
           Action: Check message table syntax.
 Cannot re-use string constants
           Explanation: Message identifier has been used more than once in
           string table.
           Action: Check string table syntax.
 Comma expected after item string
           Explanation: A comma must be used to separate the menu item
           identifier and the menu item string.
           Action: Check menu syntax.
 Control character out of range ( ^A - ^Z)
           Explanation: Accelerator character codes that use the Ctrl key, and
           are therefore preceded by a caret ( ^ ), must use alphabetic keys.
           Action: Check accelerator table syntax.
 END expected in dialog
           Explanation: END keyword missing from dialog template.
           Action: Check syntax.
 END expected in menu
           Explanation: END keyword missing from menu.
           Action: Check syntax.
 Error creating temp file
           Explanation: Temporary files are created by the resource compiler
           during the compilation process.
           Action: Check that there is sufficient disk space to run the
           resource compiler, and restart the resource compiler.
 Expected comma in accelerator table
           Explanation: Commas are used in the accelerator table to separate
           the accelerator key, the accelerator command, and the accelerator
           options.
           Action: Check accelerator table syntax.
 Expected ID value for menu item
           Explanation: A selection identifier is needed for each item within a
           menu.
           Action: Check menu syntax.
 Expected menu string
           Explanation: A character string should be specified in the menu
           definition to describe the menu selection.
           Action: Check menu syntax. The string should be enclosed in double
           quotation marks.
 Expected numeric command value
           Explanation: A number should be used in the accelerator table to
           identify the message that is generated by an accelerator key.
           Action: Check accelerator table syntax.
 Expected numeric constant in message table
           Explanation: The identifier that precedes a message definition must
           be an integer.
           Action: Check message definition syntax.
 Expected numeric constant in string table
           Explanation: The identifier that precedes a string definition must
           be an integer.
           Action: Check string definition syntax.
 Expected numerical dialog constant
           Explanation: Integers are required in dialog and window templates to
           specify the coordinates and dimensions of the dialog box.
           Action: Check syntax of dialog box definition.
 Expected string in message table
           Explanation: A character string was not found in the message table.
           Action: Check syntax. The string should be enclosed in double
           quotation marks.
 Expected string in string table
           Explanation: A character string was not found in the string table.
           Action: Check string table syntax. The string should be enclosed in
           double quotation marks.
 Expected string or constant accelerator command
           Explanation: The accelerator character code is missing.
           Action: Check accelerator table syntax.
 File not found
           Explanation: The resource compiler could not find the .RC or .RES
           file that you requested.
           Action: Check that the file is in the current directory and check
           the path to the directory.
 Illegal empty BEGIN/END block found, resource not written
           Explanation: A BEGIN/END block with no DIALOG, CONTROL, or WINDOW
           statements in it was found in the dialog template.
           Action: Delete unwanted BEGIN/END blocks.
 Invalid accelerator
           Explanation: The character code specified as an accelerator key must
           be a valid keyboard operation.
           Action: Check accelerator key definition syntax.
 Invalid accelerator option
           Explanation: The accelerator option must be a valid keyword.
           Action: Check syntax.
 Invalid control character
           Explanation: The accelerator key definition can include a caret
           ( ^) to specify that the key should be used with the Ctrl key.
           Action: Check accelerator key definition syntax.
 Invalid Type
           Explanation: The resource type must be a valid keyword.
           Action: Check resource definition syntax.
 Non-numeric template ID in dialog or window template
           Explanation: The resource identifier must be an integer.
           Action: Check dialog or window template syntax.
 Only one top level window allowed
           Explanation: Only one DIALOG, CONTROL, or WINDOW statement is
           allowed within the dialog or window template.
           Action: Check dialog or window template syntax.
 Resource Type keyword expected
           Explanation: The resource type must be specified in the resource
           script file.
           Action: Check resource definition syntax.
 String literal too long
           Explanation: Strings cannot be longer than 255 characters.
           Action: Edit the string.
 Text string or ordinal expected in control
           Explanation: A text string can be specified in the DIALOG statement
           of a dialog template to give it a title.  If a title is not
           required, double quotation marks must be used with no characters
           between them (" ").
           Action: Edit DIALOG statement.
 Unbalanced parentheses
           Explanation: The left and right parentheses have not been matched.
           Action: Edit the parentheses.
 Undefined keyword or key name
           Explanation: An invalid keyword or key name has been used.
           Action: Check syntax.
 Unexpected end of file in string literal
           Explanation: The double quotation marks have not been closed at the
           end of a character string.
           Action: Edit the string.
 Unexpected value in RCData
           Explanation: The variable defined in RCData must be a string or a
           number.
           Action: Check the RCData syntax.
 Unknown dialog or window token
           Explanation: The dialog and window templates must use only the
           DIALOG, WINDOW, or CONTROL keywords.
           Action: Check the dialog or window template syntax.
 Unknown menu sub type
           Explanation: Items within a menu can be specified only with the
           MENUITEM and SUBMENU keywords.
           Action: Check menu definition syntax.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.3. NMAKE Error Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section provides a convenient reference to the many error messages that
can be encountered when using the NMAKE facility.

Error Message Descriptions

 NMAKE Fatal Error Messages          (Part 1) 1000 - 1098

 NMAKE Warnings                      (Part 2) 4001 - 4008

 NMAKE Informational Messages        (Part 3)   2 -   6


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.3.1. Fatal Error Messages (Part 1) 1000 - 1098 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 U1000     syntax error : ')' missing in macro invocation
           Explanation: A left parenthesis appeared without a matching right
           parenthesis in a macro invocation.  The correct form is $(name).
           Action: Add the right parenthesis in the proper syntax.

 U1001     syntax error : illegal character 'character' in macro
           Explanation: A non-alphanumeric character other than underscore
           appeared in a macro.
           Action: Use only characters valid for a macro name.

 U1002     syntax error : bad macro invocation '$'
           Explanation: A single dollar sign ($) appeared without a macro name
           associated with it.  The correct form is $(name).
           Action: Use a defined macro name.

 U1003     syntax error : '=' missing in macro
           Explanation: The = sign was missing in a macro definition. The
           correct form is 'name = value'.
           Action: Insert an equals sign (=) and retry.

 U1004     syntax error : macro name missing
           Explanation: A macro invocation appeared without a name. The correct
           form is $(name).
           Action: Supply the macro name and retry.

 U1005     syntax error : text must follow ':' in macro
           Explanation: A string substitution was specified for a macro, but
           the string to be changed in the macro was not specified.
           Action: Specify the string to be substituted.

 U1006     syntax error : missing closing double quotation mark
           Explanation: An opening double quotation mark appeared without a
           closing quotation mark.
           Action: Edit the line and add the closing quotation mark.

 U1007     double quotation mark not allowed in name
           Explanation: You used a ' " ' symbol inside a macro name.
           Action: Correct the name without the quotation mark.

 U1017     unknown directive 'directive'
           Explanation: The directive specified is not a recognized directive.
           Action: Check your spelling of the intended directive.

 U1018     directive and/or expression part missing
           Explanation: The directive is incompletely specified.  The
           expression part is required.
           Action: Supply the expression and retry the directive.

 U1019     too many nested if blocks
           Explanation: You exceeded the limit of 16 levels of nested !IF
           directives.
           Action: Simplify your nesting logic to fewer than 16 levels.

 U1020     EOF found before next directive
           Explanation: A directive, such as !ENDIF, was missing.
           Action: Insert the required directive and retry.

 U1021     syntax error : else unexpected
           Explanation: An !ELSE directive was found that was not expected, or
           was placed in a syntactically incorrect place.
           Action: Correct the position of the !ELSE directive.

 U1022     missing terminating character for string/program invocation :
           'character'
           Explanation: The closing double quotation mark in a string
           comparison in an !IF directive was missing.  Or else the closing
           bracket ( ] ) in a program invocation in a directive is missing.
           Action: Insert the proper termination character.

 U1023     syntax error present in expression
           Explanation: An expression is incorrect.
           Action: Check the allowed operators and operator precedence for the
           expression.

 U1024     illegal argument to !CMDSWITCHES
           Explanation: An unrecognized !CMDSWITCHES option was specified.
           Action: Use the correct !CMDSWITCHES option.

 U1031     file name missing (or macro is null)
           Explanation: An !INCLUDE directive was found, but the name of the
           file to include is missing.
           Action: Supply the name of the file to be included.

 U1033     syntax error : 'string' unexpected
           Explanation: The specified string is not part of the valid syntax
           for a makefile.
           Action: Correct the line according to the proper syntax.

 U1034     syntax error : separator missing
           Explanation: The colon that separates targets from dependents is
           missing.
           Action: Insert a colon after the target list.

 L1035     syntax error : expected ':' or '=' separator
           Explanation: Either a colon, implying a dependency line, or an =
           sign, implying a macro definition, was expected.
           Action: Insert the proper separator in the line.

 U1036     syntax error : too many names to left of '='
           Explanation: Only one string is allowed to the left of a macro
           definition.
           Action: Remove the incorrect text before the = sign.

 U1037     syntax error : target name missing
           Explanation: A colon (:) was found before a target name was found.
           At least one target is required.
           Action: Insert the correct target name before the colon.

 U1038     internal error : lexer
           Explanation: The lexer encountered an unexpected condition.
           Action: Note the circumstances of the failure and contact IBM
           Support.

 U1039     internal error : parser
           Explanation: The parser encountered an unexpected condition.
           Action: Note the circumstances of the failure and contact IBM
           Support.

 U1040     internal error : macro expansion
           Explanation: An unexpected condition was found during macro
           expansion.
           Action: Note the circumstances of the failure and contact IBM
           Support.

 U1041     internal error : target building
           Explanation: An unexpected condition was found during target
           building.
           Action: Note the circumstances of the failure and contact IBM
           Support.

 U1042     internal error : expression stack overflow
           Explanation: An expression was too complex to decode using internal
           memory space.
           Action: Note the circumstances of the failure and contact IBM
           Support.

 U1043     internal error : temp file limit exceeded
           Explanation: NMAKE required too many temporary files.
           Action: Note the circumstances of the failure and contact IBM
           Support.

 U1044     internal error : too many levels of recursion building a target
           Explanation: Recursive invocations of NMAKE exceeded available
           memory.
           Action: Note the circumstances of the failure and contact IBM
           Support.

 U1045     messagetext
           Explanation: NMAKE encountered an unexpected condition.
           Action: Note the text of the message and contact IBM Support.

 U1046     internal error : out of search handles
           Explanation: NMAKE exceeded an internal limit on handles.
           Action: Note the circumstances of the failure and contact IBM
           Support.

 U1049     macro too long (max allowed size : 64K)
           Explanation: One of your macros expanded to longer than 65 535
           bytes.
           Action: Recode the macro definition so that it is less than 64K.

 U1050     user-specified text
           Explanation: The message specified with the !ERROR directive is
           displayed.
           Action: Action depends on the defined error condition.

 U1051     out of memory
           Explanation: NMAKE ran out of space in the far heap.
           Action: Note the circumstances of the failure and contact IBM
           Support.

 U1052     file 'filename' not found
           Explanation: The file was not found.
           Action: Specify the filename properly in the makefile.

 U1053     file 'filename' unreadable
           Explanation: The filename cannot be read.
           Action: Be sure that the file has the appropriate attributes to be
           read.

 U1054     cannot create in-line file 'filename'
           Explanation: The program was unable to generate the specified
           in-line file as a uniquely-named temporary file.
           Action: Be sure your file system has enough space for temporary
           files.

 U1055     out of environment space
           Explanation: The environment space limit was reached.
           Action: Restart NMAKE with a larger environment space.

 U1056     cannot find command processor
           Explanation: The command processor CMD.EXE could not be found.
           Action: Be sure that the COMSPEC environment variable points to a
           command processor on your file system.

 U1057     cannot delete temporary file 'filename'
           Explanation: The program was unable to delete the specified file.
           Action: The file needs to exist and have the write attribute.

 U1058     terminated by user
           Explanation: You pressed Ctrl+Break to stop NMAKE.
           Action: None, the program has stopped.

 U1060     unable to close file : 'filename'
           Explanation: NMAKE was unable to close filename.
           Action: Look for the named file with write attribute on your file
           system.

 U1061     /F option requires a file name
           Explanation: You coded command-line option /f but failed to follow
           it with the name of a description file.
           Action: Specify the description file name after the option.

 U1062     missing file name with /X option
           Explanation: You coded command-line option /x but failed to follow
           it with the name of a file to receive redirected stderr output.
           Action: Give an output error file name after the option.

 U1063     missing macro name before '='
           Explanation: You coded '=' in a command line macro definition, but
           failed to supply the name of the macro.
           Action: Give the macro name in the definition.

 U1064     MAKEFILE not found and no target specified
           Explanation: You invoked NMAKE without a /f option, and no file
           named MAKEFILE was present.
           Action: Either create a file named MAKEFILE, or use the /f switch.

 U1065     incorrect option 'option'
           Explanation: NMAKE does not use the option which you specified.
           Action: Use a valid command line option.

 U1070     cycle in macro definition 'macroname'
           Explanation: A cycle was detected in the macro definition specified.
           Action: Rewrite the macro to avoid the circular definition.

 U1071     cycle in dependency tree for target 'targetname'
           Explanation: A cycle was detected in the target dependency tree.
           Action: Check the dependency lists descending from the given target
           and remove the circular dependency.

 U1072     cycle in include files : 'filenames'
           Explanation: A cycle was detected in the tree of included files.
           Action: Check the file names included by the given include file and
           remove the circular inclusion.

 U1073     don't know how to make 'filename'
           Explanation: The specified target does not exist and there are no
           commands to execute or inference rules given for it.  Hence NMAKE
           cannot build it.
           Action: Correct the specification of the file, which should exist on
           your file system.

 U1076     name too long
           Explanation: The macro name, target name, or build command name
           would overflow an internal buffer.
           Action: Reduce the length of the specified name.

 U1077     'program' : return code 'value'
           Explanation: The invocation of NMAKE failed with a nonzero return
           value.
           Action: Determine the cause of failure of the specified program.

 U1078     constant overflow at 'directive'
           Explanation: A constant in 'directive' expression was too big.
           Action: Reduce the size of the specified constant to a value within
           the range of a signed long integer, -2147483648 <= value <=
           2147483647.

 U1079     illegal expression : divide by zero present
           Explanation: An expression contains a division by zero.
           Action: Remove the undefined division by zero from the expression.

 U1080     operator and/or operand out of place : usage illegal
           Explanation: The expression uses an operand or operator incorrectly.
           Action: Check the allowed set of operators and their precedence.

 U1081     'program' : program not found
           Explanation: NMAKE could not find the external command or program.
           Action: Be sure that the program is located in the PATH.

 U1082     'command' : cannot execute command: out of memory
           Explanation: NMAKE ran out of memory while running command.
           Action: Make more memory available while running NMAKE.

 U1083     target macro 'macroname' expands to nothing
           Explanation: The expansion of the given macro is a null string.
           Action: Correct the definition of the macro.

 U1084     cannot create temporary file 'filename'
           Explanation: NMAKE was unable to open the specified temporary file.
           Action: Check the filename specification for validity.

 U1085     cannot mix implicit and explicit rules
           Explanation: A regular target was specified along with the target
           for a rule (which has the form .sufx1.sufx2).
           Action: Separate targets built by implicit and explicit inference
           rules into different lists.

 U1086     inference rule cannot have dependents
           Explanation: Dependents are not allowed in the definition of an
           inference rule.
           Action: Remove the dependents list from the rule.

 U1087     cannot have : and :: dependents for same target
           Explanation: A target cannot have both a single-colon and
           double-colon dependency.
           Action: Choose either single-colon or double-colon separator for the
           target.

 U1088     invalid separator on inference rule : '::'
           Explanation: Inference rules can use only a single-colon separator.
           Action: Use a single-colon dependency for the target.

 U1089     cannot have build commands for pseudotarget 'targetname'
           Explanation: Pseudotargets (for example, .PRECIOUS, .SUFFIXES)
           cannot have build commands specified.
           Action: Remove the build commands from the specification of
           targetname.

 U1090     cannot have dependents for pseudotarget 'targetname'
           Explanation: The specified pseudotarget, for example, .SILENT,
           .IGNORE) cannot have a dependent.
           Action: Remove the dependent from the specification of targetname.

 U1092     too many names in rule
           Explanation: The rules cannot have more than one pair of extensions
           (ext1.ext2) as a target for the rule.
           Action: Use only one pair of extensions in any inference rule.

 U1093     cannot mix special pseudotargets
           Explanation: It is illegal to list two or more pseudotargets
           together.
           Action: Use only one pseudotarget in any list.

 U1094     syntax error : only [no]keep allowed here
           Explanation: In a context where only KEEP or NOKEEP is accepted to
           indicate the desired disposition of the inline file, you used an
           incorrect string.
           Action: Use the correct syntax for In-Line Files.

 U1095     expanded command line 'string' too long
           Explanation: After macro expansion, the command line length exceeds
           1024 bytes.
           Action: Rewrite the command line to stay within a 1024-byte limit.

 U1097     extmake syntax usage error, no dependent
           Explanation: You used the extmake file syntax on a description block
           which had no dependent files.
           Action: Specify one or more dependent files for the block.

 U1098     extmake syntax in 'string' incorrect
           Explanation: The given string contains an extmake syntax error.
           Action: Correct the string according to the proper syntax.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.3.2. Warnings (Part 2) 4001 - 4008 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 U4001     command file can be invoked only from command line
           Explanation: You used an @ symbol on an argument in a command file.
           You cannot invoke another command file from within a command file.
           Action: If the you want '@' to be part of an argument in a command
           file, you must enclose that argument in quotation marks.

 U4002     no match found for wild card 'string'
           Explanation: NMAKE expanded wildcards in the given string, but found
           no files matching the specification.
           Action: Check the existence of desired files on your file system.

 U4004     too many rules for target 'targetname'
           Explanation: You specified too many inference rules for the
           specified targetname.
           Action: Revise your rules specification for targetname.

 U4005     ignoring rule 'string' (extension not in .SUFFIXES)
           Explanation: You specified an inference rule with a suffix which was
           not in the .SUFFIXES list.
           Action: To use the suffix, be sure to include it in the .SUFFIXES
           list.

 U4006     special macro undefined : 'macroname'
           Explanation: You specified the undefined macro macroname.
           Action: NMAKE will ignore the undefined macroname.  You may use only
           predefined special macros.

 U4007     file name 'filename' too long; truncating to 8.3
           Explanation: The specified filename is too long for a FAT file
           system name.
           Action: NMAKE will shorten the filename to at most an
           eight-character name and 3-character extension.

 U4008     removed target 'filename'
           Explanation: While deleting non-precious files, NMAKE erased the
           specified filename which was a target.
           Action: Check your lists of targets and dependent files to be sure
           that filename is not needed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.3.3. Informational Messages (Part 3) 2-6 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Message 2 'filename' is up-to-date.
           Explanation: The specified target filename is no older than any of
           its dependent files.
           Action: NMAKE does not need to rebuild this target.

 Message 3 **'file1' newer than 'file2'
           Explanation: While reporting creation times of files, NMAKE notes
           that file1 was created after file2.
           Action: [none]

 Message 5 touch 'filename'
           Explanation: You specified option /t to touch targets with the
           current date and time.
           Action: NMAKE has updated the creation time of filename.

 Message 6 'filename' target does not exist
           Explanation: The specified filename could not be found.
           Action: NMAKE will rebuild the target.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This glossary defines many of the terms used in this book. It includes terms
and definitions from the IBM Dictionary of Computing, as well as terms specific
to the OS/2 operating system and the Presentation Manager. It is not a complete
glossary for the entire OS/2 operating system; nor is it a complete dictionary
of computer terms.

Other primary sources for these definitions are:

   o  The American National Standard Dictionary for Information Systems, ANSI
      X3.172-1990, copyrighted 1990 by the American National Standards
      Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036. These
      definitions are identified by the symbol (A) after the definition.

   o  The Information Technology Vocabulary, developed by Subcommittee 1, Joint
      Technical Committee 1, of the International Organization for
      Standardization and the International Electrotechnical Commission
      (ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1). Definitions of published parts of this vocabulary are
      identified by the symbol (I) after the definition; definitions taken from
      draft international standards, committee drafts, and working papers being
      developed by ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1 are identified by the symbol (T) after the
      definition, indicating that final agreement has not yet been reached
      among the participating National Bodies of SC1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.1. Glossary Listing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a starting letter of glossary terms:

 A    N
 B    O
 C    P
 D    Q
 E    R
 F    S
 G    T
 H    U
 I    V
 J    W
 K    X
 L    Y
 M    Z


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 accelerator  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a key or combination of
   keys that invokes an application-defined function.

 accelerator table  -A table used to define which key strokes are treated as
   accelerators and the commands they are translated into.

 access mode  -The manner in which an application gains access to a file it has
   opened. Examples of access modes are read-only, write-only, and read/write.

 access permission  -All access rights that a user has regarding an object. (I)

 action  -One of a set of defined tasks that a computer performs. Users request
   the application to perform an action in several ways, such as typing a
   command, pressing a function key, or selecting the action name from an
   action bar or menu.

 action bar  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, the area at the top of a
   window that contains choices that give a user access to actions available in
   that window.

 action point  -The current position on the screen at which the pointer is
   pointing. Contrast with hot spot and input focus.

 active program  -A program currently running on the computer.  An active
   program can be interactive (running and receiving input from the user) or
   noninteractive (running but not receiving input from the user). See also
   interactive program and noninteractive program.

 active window  -The window with which the user is currently interacting.

 address space  -(1) The range of addresses available to a program. (A)  (2)
   The area of virtual storage available for a particular job.

 alphanumeric video output  -Output to the logical video buffer when the video
   adapter is in text mode and the logical video buffer is addressed by an
   application as a rectangular array of character cells.

 American National Standard Code for Information Interchange  -The standard
   code, using a coded character set consisting of 7-bit coded characters (8
   bits including parity check), that is used for information interchange among
   data processing systems, data communication systems, and associated
   equipment. The ASCII set consists of control characters and graphic
   characters. (A)

   Note:  IBM has defined an extension to ASCII code (characters 128-255).

 anchor  -A window procedure that handles Presentation Manager* message
   conversions between an icon procedure and an application.

 anchor block  -An area of Presentation-Manager-internal resources to allocated
   process or thread that calls WinInitialize.

 anchor point  -A point in a window used by a program designer or by a window
   manager to position a subsequently appearing window.

 ANSI  -American National Standards Institute.

 APA  -All points addressable.

 API  -Application programming interface.

 application  -A collection of software components used to perform specific
   types of work on a computer; for example, a payroll application, an airline
   reservation application, a network application.

 application object  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a form
   that an application provides for a user; for example, a spreadsheet form.
   Contrast with user object.

 application programming interface (API)  -A functional interface supplied by
   the operating system or by a separately orderable licensed program that
   allows an application program written in a high-level language to use
   specific data or functions of the operating system or the licensed program.

 application-modal  -Pertaining to a message box or dialog box for which
   processing must be completed before further interaction with any other
   window owned by the same application may take place.

 area  -In computer graphics, a filled shape such as a solid rectangle.

 ASCII  -American National Standard Code for Information Interchange.

 ASCIIZ  -A string of ASCII characters that is terminated with a byte
   containing the value 0.

 aspect ratio  -In computer graphics, the width-to-height ratio of an area,
   symbol, or shape.

 asynchronous (ASYNC)  -(1) Pertaining to two or more processes that do not
   depend upon the occurrence of specific events such as common timing
   signals. (T)  (2) Without regular time relationship;  unexpected or
   unpredictable with respect to the execution of program instructions. See
   also synchronous.

 atom  -A constant that represents a string. As soon as a string has been
   defined as an atom, the atom can be used in place of the string to save
   space. Strings are associated with their respective atoms in an atom table.
   See also integer atom.

 atom table  -A table used to relate atoms with the strings that they
   represent. Also in the table is the mechanism by which the presence of a
   string can be checked.

 atomic operation  -An operation that completes its work on an object before
   another operation can be performed on the same object.

 attribute  -A characteristic or property that can be controlled, usually to
   obtain a required appearance;  for example, the color of a line. See also
   graphics attributes and segment attributes.

 automatic link  -In Information Presentation Facility (IPF), a link that
   begins a chain reaction at the primary window. When the user selects the
   primary window, an automatic link is activated to display secondary windows.

 AVIO  -Advanced Video Input/Output.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - B ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 BВzier curve  -(1) A mathematical technique of specifying smooth continous
   lines and surfaces, which require a starting point and a finishing point
   with several intermediate points that influence or control the path of the
   linking curve. Named after Dr. P. BВzier. (2) (D of C) In the AIX Graphics
   Library, a cubic spline approximation to a set of four control points that
   passes through the first and fourth control points and that has a continuous
   slope where two spline segments meet. Named after Dr. P. BВzier.

 background  -(1) In multiprogramming, the conditions under which low-priority
   programs are executed. Contrast with foreground. (2) An active session that
   is not currently displayed on the screen.

 background color  -The color in which the background of a graphic primitive is
   drawn.

 background mix  -An attribute that determines how the background of a graphic
   primitive is combined with the existing color of the graphics presentation
   space. Contrast with mix.

 background program  -In multiprogramming, a program that executes with a low
   priority. Contrast with foreground program.

 bit map  -A representation in memory of the data displayed on an APA device,
   usually the screen.

 block  -(1) A string of data elements recorded or transmitted as a unit. The
   elements may be characters, words, or logical records. (T)  (2) To record
   data in a block. (3) A collection of contiguous records recorded as a unit.
   Blocks are separated by interblock gaps and each block may contain one or
   more records. (A)

 block device  -A storage device that performs I/O operations on blocks of data
   called sectors. Data on block devices can be randomly accessed. Block
   devices are designated by a drive letter (for example, C:).

 blocking mode  -A condition set by an application that determines when its
   threads might block. For example, an application might set the Pipemode
   parameter for the DosCreateNPipe function so that its threads perform I/O
   operations to the named pipe block when no data is available.

 border  -A visual indication (for example, a separator line or a background
   color) of the boundaries of a window.

 boundary determination  -An operation used to compute the size of the smallest
   rectangle that encloses a graphics object on the screen.

 breakpoint  -(1) A point in a computer program where execution may be halted.
   A breakpoint is usually at the beginning of an instruction where halts,
   caused by external intervention, are convenient for resuming
   execution. (T)  (2) A place in a program, specified by a command or a
   condition, where the system halts execution and gives control to the
   workstation user or to a specified program.

 broken pipe  -When all of the handles that access one end of a pipe have been
   closed.

 bucket  -One or more fields in which the result of an operation is kept.

 buffer  -(1) A portion of storage used to hold input or output data
   temporarily. (2) To allocate and schedule the use of buffers. (A)

 button  -A mechanism used to request or initiate an action. See also barrel
   buttons, bezel buttons, mouse button, push button, and radio button.

 byte pipe  -Pipes that handle data as byte streams. All unnamed pipes are byte
   pipes. Named pipes can be byte pipes or message pipes. See byte stream.

 byte stream  -Data that consists of an unbroken stream of bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - C ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 cache  -A high-speed buffer storage that contains frequently accessed
   instructions and data; it is used to reduce access time.

 cached micro presentation space  -A presentation space from a
   Presentation-Manager-owned store of micro presentation spaces. It can be
   used for drawing to a window only, and must be returned to the store when
   the task is complete.

 CAD  -Computer-Aided Design.

 call  -(1) The action of bringing a computer program, a routine, or a
   subroutine into effect, usually by specifying the entry conditions and
   jumping to an entry point. (I)  (A)  (2) To transfer control to a procedure,
   program, routine, or subroutine.

 calling sequence  -A sequence of instructions together with any associated
   data necessary to execute a call. (T)

 Cancel  -An action that removes the current window or menu without processing
   it, and returns the previous window.

 cascaded menu  -In the OS/2 operating system, a menu that appears when the
   arrow to the right of a cascading choice is selected. It contains a set of
   choices that are related to the cascading choice. Cascaded menus are used to
   reduce the length of a menu. See also cascading choice.

 cascading choice  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a choice in a menu
   that, when selected, produces a cascaded menu containing other choices.  An
   arrow () appears to the right of the cascading choice.

 CASE statement  -In PM programming, provides the body of a window procedure.
   There is usually one CASE statement for each message type supported by an
   application.

 CGA  -Color graphics adapter.

 chained list  -A list in which the data elements may be dispersed but in which
   each data element contains information for locating the
   next. (T)Synonymous with linked list.

 character  -A letter, digit, or other symbol.

 character box  -In computer graphics, the boundary that defines, in world
   coordinates, the horizontal and vertical space occupied by a single
   character from a character set. See also character mode. Contrast with
   character cell.

 character cell  -The physical, rectangular space in which any single character
   is displayed on a screen or printer device. Position is addressed by row and
   column coordinates. Contrast with character box.

 character code  -The means of addressing a character in a character set,
   sometimes called code point.

 character device  -A device that performs I/O operations on one character at a
   time. Because character devices view data as a stream of bytes,
   character-device data cannot be randomly accessed. Character devices include
   the keyboard, mouse, and printer, and are referred to by name.

 character mode  -A mode that, in conjunction with the font type, determines
   the extent to which graphics characters are affected by the character box,
   shear, and angle attributes.

 character set  -(1) An ordered set of unique representations called
   characters; for example, the 26 letters of English alphabet, Boolean 0 and
   1, the set of symbols in the Morse code, and the 128 ASCII
   characters. (A)  (2) All the valid characters for a programming language or
   for a computer system. (3) A group of characters used for a specific reason;
   for example, the set of characters a printer can print.

 check box  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a square box with
   associated text that represents a choice. When a user selects a choice, an X
   appears in the check box to indicate that the choice is in effect. The user
   can clear the check box by selecting the choice again. Contrast with radio
   button.

 check mark  - (1) (D of C) In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a
   symbol that shows that a choice is currently in effect. (2) The symbol that
   is used to indicate a selected item on a pull-down menu.

 child process  -In the OS/2 operating system, a process started by another
   process, which is called the parent process. Contrast with parent process.

 child window  -A window that appears within the border of its parent window
   (either a primary window or another child window). When the parent window is
   resized, moved, or destroyed, the child window also is resized, moved, or
   destroyed; however, the child window can be moved or resized independently
   from the parent window, within the boundaries of the parent window. Contrast
   with parent window.

 choice  -(1) An option that can be selected. The choice can be presented as
   text, as a symbol (number or letter), or as an icon (a pictorial symbol).
   (2) (D of C) In SAA Common User Access architecture, an item that a user can
   select.

 chord  -(1) To press more than one button on a pointing device while the
   pointer is within the limits that the user has specified for the operating
   environment. (2) (D of C) In graphics, a short line segment whose end points
   lie on a circle. Chords are a means for producing a circular image from
   straight lines. The higher the number of chords per circle, the smoother the
   circular image.

 class  -In object-oriented design or programming, a group of objects that
   share a common definition and that therefore share common properties,
   operations, and behavior. Members of the group are called instances of the
   class.

 class method  -In System Object Model, an action that can be performed on a
   class object. Synonymous with factory method.

 class object  -In System Object Model, the run-time implementation of a class.

 class style  -The set of properties that apply to every window in a window
   class.

 client  -(1) A functional unit that receives shared services from a
   server. (T)  (2) A user, as in a client process that uses a named pipe or
   queue that is created and owned by a server process.

 client area  -The part of the window, inside the border, that is below the
   menu bar. It is the user's work space, where a user types information and
   selects choices from selection fields.  In primary windows, it is where an
   application programmer presents the objects that a user works on.

 client program  -An application that creates and manipulates instances of
   classes.

 client window  -The window in which the application displays output and
   receives input. This window is located inside the frame window, under the
   window title bar and any menu bar, and within any scroll bars.

 clip limits  -The area of the paper that can be reached by a printer or
   plotter.

 clipboard  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, an area of computer
   memory, or storage, that temporarily holds data. Data in the clipboard is
   available to other applications.

 clipping  -In computer graphics, removing those parts of a display image that
   lie outside a given boundary. (I)  (A)

 clipping area  -The area in which the window can paint.

 clipping path  -A clipping boundary in world-coordinate space.

 clock tick  -The minimum unit of time that the system tracks. If the system
   timer currently counts at a rate of X Hz, the system tracks the time every
   1/X of a second. Also known as time tick.

 CLOCK$  -Character-device name reserved for the system clock.

 code page  -An assignment of graphic characters and control-function meanings
   to all code points.

 code point  -(1) Synonym for character code. (2) (D of C) A 1-byte code
   representing one of 256 potential characters.

 code segment  -An executable section of programming code within a load module.

 color dithering  -See dithering.

 color graphics adapter (CGA)  -An adapter that simultaneously provides four
   colors and is supported by all IBM Personal Computer and Personal System/2
   models.

 command  -The name and parameters associated with an action that a program can
   perform.

 command area  -An area composed of a command field prompt and a command entry
   field.

 command entry field  -An entry field in which users type commands.

 command line  -On a display screen, a display line, sometimes at the bottom of
   the screen, in which only commands can be entered.

 command mode  -A state of a system or device in which the user can enter
   commands.

 command prompt  -A field prompt showing the location of the command entry
   field in a panel.

 Common Programming Interface (CPI)  -Definitions of those application
   development languages and services that have, or are intended to have,
   implementations on and a high degree of commonality across the SAA
   environments. One of the three SAA architectural areas. See also Common User
   Access architecture.

 Common User Access (CUA) architecture  - Guidelines for the dialog between a
   human and a workstation or terminal. One of the three SAA architectural
   areas. See also Common Programming Interface.

 compile  -To translate a program written in a higher-level programming
   language into a machine language program.

 composite window  -A window composed of other windows (such as a frame window,
   frame-control windows, and a client window) that are kept together as a unit
   and that interact with each other.

 computer-aided design (CAD)  -The use of a computer to design or change a
   product, tool, or machine, such as using a computer for drafting or
   illustrating.

 COM1, COM2, COM3  -Character-device names reserved for serial ports 1 through
   3.

 CON  -Character-device name reserved for the console keyboard and screen.

 conditional cascaded menu  -A pull-down menu associated with a menu item that
   has a cascade mini-push button beside it in an object's pop-up menu. The
   conditional cascaded menu is displayed when the user selects the mini-push
   button.

 container  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, an object that holds other
   objects. A folder is an example of a container object. See also folder and
   object.

 contextual help  -In SAA Common User Access Architecture, help that gives
   specific information about the item the cursor is on. The help is contextual
   because it provides information about a specific item as it is currently
   being used. Contrast with extended help.

 contiguous  -Touching or joining at a common edge or boundary, for example, an
   unbroken consecutive series of storage locations.

 control  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a component of the
   user interface that allows a user to select choices or type information; for
   example, a check box, an entry field, a radio button.

 control area  -A storage area used by a computer program to hold control information. (I)  (A)

 Control Panel  -In the Presentation Manager, a program used to set up user
   preferences that act globally across the system.

 Control Program  -(1) The basic functions of the operating system, including
   DOS emulation and the support for keyboard, mouse, and video input/output.
   (2) A computer program designed to schedule and to supervise the execution
   of programs of a computer system. (I)  (A)

 control window  -A window that is used as part of a composite window to
   perform simple input and output tasks. Radio buttons and check boxes are
   examples.

 control word  -An instruction within a document that identifies its parts or
   indicates how to format the document.

 coordinate space  -A two-dimensional set of points used to generate output on
   a video display of printer.

 Copy  -A choice that places onto the clipboard, a copy of what the user has
   selected. See also Cut and Paste.

 correlation  -The action of determining which element or object within a
   picture is at a given position on the display. This follows a pick
   operation.

 coverpage window  -A window in which the application's help information is
   displayed.

 CPI  -Common Programming Interface.

 critical extended attribute  -An extended attribute that is necessary for the
   correct operation of the system or a particular application.

 critical section  -(1) In programming languages, a part of an asynchronous
   procedure that cannot be executed simultaneously with a certain part of
   another asynchronous procedure. (I)

   Note:  Part of the other asynchronous procedure also is a critical section.
   (2) A section of code that is not reentrant; that is, code that can be
   executed by only one thread at a time.

 CUA architecture  -Common User Access architecture.

 current position  -In computer graphics, the position, in user coordinates,
   that becomes the starting point for the next graphics routine, if that
   routine does not explicitly specify a starting point.

 cursor  -A symbol displayed on the screen and associated with an input device.
   The cursor indicates where input from the device will be placed. Types of
   cursors include text cursors, graphics cursors, and selection cursors.
   Contrast with pointer and input focus.

 Cut  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a choice that removes a selected
   object, or a part of an object, to the clipboard, usually compressing the
   space it occupied in a window. See also Copy and Paste.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - D ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 daisy chain  -A method of device interconnection for determining interrupt
   priority by connecting the interrupt sources serially.

 data segment  -A nonexecutable section of a program module; that is, a section
   of a program that contains data definitions.

 data structure  -The syntactic structure of symbolic expressions and their
   storage-allocation characteristics. (T)

 data transfer  -The movement of data from one object to another by way of the
   clipboard or by direct manipulation.

 DBCS  -Double-byte character set.

 DDE  -Dynamic data exchange.

 deadlock  -(1) Unresolved contention for the use of a resource. (2) An error
   condition in which processing cannot continue because each of two elements
   of the process is waiting for an action by, or a response from, the other.
   (3) An impasse that occurs when multiple processes are waiting for the
   availability of a resource that will not become available because it is
   being held by another process that is in a similar wait state.

 debug  -To detect, diagnose, and eliminate errors in programs. (T)

 decipoint  -In printing, one tenth of a point.  There are 72 points in an
   inch.

 default procedure  -A function provided by the Presentation Manager Interface
   that may be used to process standard messages from dialogs or windows.

 default value  -A value assumed when no value has been specified. Synonymous
   with assumed value. For example, in the graphics programming interface, the
   default line-type is `solid'.

 definition list  -A type of list that pairs a term and its description.

 delta  -An application-defined threshold, or number of container items, from
   either end of the list.

 descendant  -See child process.

 descriptive text  -Text used in addition to a field prompt to give more
   information about a field.

 Deselect all  -A choice that cancels the selection of all of the objects that
   have been selected in that window.

 Desktop Manager  -In the Presentation Manager, a window that displays a list
   of groups of programs, each of which can be started or stopped.

 desktop window  -The window, corresponding to the physical device, against
   which all other types of windows are established.

 detached process  -A background process that runs independent of the parent
   process.

 detent  -A point on a slider that represents an exact value to which a user
   can move the slider arm.

 device context  -A logical description of a data destination such as memory,
   metafile, display, printer, or plotter. See also direct device context,
   information device context, memory device context, metafile device context,
   queued device context, and screen device context.

 device driver  -A file that contains the code needed to attach and use a
   device such as a display, printer, or plotter.

 device space  -(1) Coordinate space in which graphics are assembled after all
   GPI transformations have been applied. Device space is defined in
   device-specific units. (2) (D of C) In computer graphics, a space defined by
   the complete set of addressable points of a display device. (A)

 dialog  -The interchange of information between a computer and its user
   through a sequence of requests by the user and the presentation of responses
   by the computer.

 dialog box  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a movable
   window, fixed in size, containing controls that a user uses to provide
   information required by an application so that it can continue to process a
   user request. See also message box, primary window, secondary window. Also
   known as a pop-up window.

 Dialog Box Editor  -A WYSIWYG editor that creates dialog boxes for
   communicating with the application user.

 dialog item  -A component (for example, a menu or a button) of a dialog box.
   Dialog items are also used when creating dialog templates.

 dialog procedure  -A dialog window that is controlled by a window procedure.
   It is responsible for responding to all messages sent to the dialog window.

 dialog tag language  -A markup language used by the DTL compiler to create
   dialog objects.

 dialog template  -The definition of a dialog box, which contains details of
   its position, appearance, and window ID, and the window ID of each of its
   child windows.

 direct device context  -A logical description of a data destination that is a
   device other than the screen (for example, a printer or plotter), and where
   the output is not to go through the spooler. Its purpose is to satisfy
   queries. See also device context.

 direct manipulation  -The user's ability to interact with an object by using
   the mouse, typically by dragging an object around on the Desktop and
   dropping it on other objects.

 direct memory access (DMA)  -A technique for moving data directly between main
   storage and peripheral equipment without requiring processing of the data by
   the processing unit.(T)

 directory  -A type of file containing the names and controlling information
   for other files or other directories.

 display point  -Synonym for pel.

 dithering  -(1) The process used in color displays whereby every other pel is
   set to one color, and the intermediate pels are set to another. Together
   they produce the effect of a third color at normal viewing distances. This
   process can only be used on solid areas of color; it does not work, for
   example, on narrow lines. (2) (D of C ) In computer graphics, a technique of
   interleaving dark and light pixels so that the resulting image looks
   smoothly shaded when viewed from a distance.

 DMA  -Direct memory access.

 DOS Protect Mode Interface (DPMI)  -An interface between protect mode and real
   mode programs.

 double-byte character set (DBCS)  -A set of characters in which each character
   is represented by two bytes.  Languages such as Japanese, Chinese, and
   Korean, which contain more characters than can be represented by 256 code
   points, require double-byte character sets. Since each character requires
   two bytes, the entering, displaying, and printing of DBCS characters
   requires hardware and software that can support DBCS.

 doubleword  -A contiguous sequence of bits or characters that comprises two
   computer words and is capable of being addressed as a unit. (A)

 DPMI  -DOS Protect Mode Interface.

 drag  -In SAA Common User Access, to use a pointing device to move an object;
   for example, clicking on a window border, and dragging it to make the window
   larger.

 dragging  -(1) In computer graphics, moving an object on the display screen as
   if it were attached to the pointer. (2) (D of C) In computer graphics,
   moving one or more segments on a display surface by translating. (I)  (A)

 drawing chain  -See segment chain.

 drop  -To fix the position of an object that is being dragged, by releasing
   the select button of the pointing device.

 drop  -To fix the position of an object that is being dragged, by releasing
   the select button of the pointing device. See also drag.

 DTL  -Dialog tag language.

 dual-boot function  -A feature of the OS/2 operating system that allows the
   user to start DOS from within the operating system, or an OS/2 session from
   within DOS.

 duplex  -Pertaining to communication in which data can be sent and received at
   the same time. Synonymous with full duplex.

 dynamic data exchange (DDE)  -A message protocol used to communicate between
   applications that share data. The protocol uses shared memory as the means
   of exchanging data between applications.

 dynamic data formatting  -A formatting procedure that enables you to
   incorporate text, bit maps or metafiles in an IPF window at execution time.

 dynamic link library  -A collection of executable programming code and data
   that is bound to an application at load time or run time, rather than during
   linking. The programming code and data in a dynamic link library can be
   shared by several applications simultaneously.

 dynamic linking  -The process of resolving external references in a program
   module at load time or run time rather than during linking.

 dynamic segments  -Graphics segments drawn in exclusive-OR mix mode so that
   they can be moved from one screen position to another without affecting the
   rest of the displayed picture.

 dynamic storage  -(1) A device that stores data in a manner that permits the
   data to move or vary with time such that the specified data is not always
   available for recovery. (A)  (2) A storage in which the cells require
   repetitive application of control signals in order to retain stored data.
   Such repetitive application of the control signals is called a refresh
   operation. A dynamic storage may use static addressing or sensing
   circuits. (A)  (3) See also static storage.

 dynamic time slicing  -Varies the size of the time slice depending on system
   load and paging activity.

 dynamic-link module  -A module that is linked at load time or run time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 EBCDIC  -Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code. A coded character set
   consisting of 8-bit coded characters (9 bits including parity check), used
   for information interchange among data processing systems, data
   communications systems, and associated equipment.

 edge-triggered  -Pertaining to an event semaphore that is posted then reset
   before a waiting thread gets a chance to run. The semaphore is considered to
   be posted for the rest of that thread's waiting period; the thread does not
   have to wait for the semaphore to be posted again.

 EGA  -Extended graphics adapter.

 element  -An entry in a graphics segment that comprises one or more graphics
   orders and that is addressed by the element pointer.

 EMS  -Expanded Memory Specification.

 encapsulation  -Hiding an object's implementation, that is, its private,
   internal data and methods. Private variables and methods are accessible only
   to the object that contains them.

 entry field  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, an area where a user
   types information. Its boundaries are usually indicated. See also selection
   field.

 entry panel  -A defined panel type containing one or more entry fields and
   protected information such as headings, prompts, and explanatory text.

 entry-field control  -The component of a user interface that provides the
   means by which the application receives data entered by the user in an entry
   field. When it has the input focus, the entry field displays a flashing
   pointer at the position where the next typed character will go.

 environment segment  -The list of environment variables and their values for a
   process.

 environment strings  -ASCII text strings that define the value of environment
   variables.

 environment variables  -Variables that describe the execution environment of a
   process. These variables are named by the operating system or by the
   application. Environment variables named by the operating system are PATH,
   DPATH, INCLUDE, INIT, LIB, PROMPT, and TEMP. The values of environment
   variables are defined by the user in the CONFIG.SYS file, or by using the
   SET command at the OS/2 command prompt.

 error message  -An indication that an error has been detected. (A)

 event semaphore  -A semaphore that enables a thread to signal a waiting thread
   or threads that an event has occurred or that a task has been completed. The
   waiting threads can then perform an action that is dependent on the
   completion of the signaled event.

 exception  -An abnormal condition such as an I/O error encountered in
   processing a data set or a file.

 exclusive system semaphore  -A system semaphore that can be modified only by
   threads within the same process.

 executable file  -(1) A file that contains programs or commands that perform
   operations or actions to be taken. (2) A collection of related data records
   that execute programs.

 exit  -To execute an instruction within a portion of a computer program in
   order to terminate the execution of that portion. Such portions of computer
   programs include loops, subroutines, modules, and so on. (T)  Repeated exit
   requests return the user to the point from which all functions provided to
   the system are accessible. Contrast with cancel.

 expanded memory specification (EMS)  -Enables DOS applications to access
   memory above the 1MB real mode addressing limit.

 extended attribute  -An additional piece of information about a file object,
   such as its data format or category. It consists of a name and a value. A
   file object may have more than one extended attribute associated with it.

 extended help  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a help action that
   provides information about the contents of the application window from which
   a user requested help. Contrast with contextual help.

 extended-choice selection  -A mode that allows the user to select more than
   one item from a window. Not all windows allow extended choice selection.
   Contrast with multiple-choice selection.

 extent  -Continuous space on a disk or diskette that is occupied by or
   reserved for a particular data set, data space, or file.

 external link  -In Information Presentation Facility, a link that connects
   external online document files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - F ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 family-mode application  -An application program that can run in the OS/2
   environment and in the DOS environment; however, it cannot take advantage of
   many of the OS/2-mode facilities, such as multitasking, interprocess
   communication, and dynamic linking.

 FAT  -File allocation table.

 FEA  -Full extended attribute.

 field-level help  -Information specific to the field on which the cursor is
   positioned. This help function is "contextual" because it provides
   information about a specific item as it is currently used; the information
   is dependent upon the context within the work session.

 FIFO  -First-in-first-out. (A)

 file  -A named set of records stored or processed as a unit. (T)

 file allocation table (FAT)  -In IBM personal computers, a table used by the
   operating system to allocate space on a disk for a file, and to locate and
   chain together parts of the file that may be scattered on different sectors
   so that the file can be used in a random or sequential manner.

 file attribute  -Any of the attributes that describe the characteristics of a
   file.

 File Manager  -In the Presentation Manager, a program that displays
   directories and files, and allows various actions on them.

 file specification  -The full identifier for a file, which includes its drive
   designation, path, file name, and extension.

 file system  -The combination of software and hardware that supports storing
   information on a storage device.

 file system driver (FSD)  -A program that manages file I\O and controls the
   format of information on the storage media.

 fillet  -A curve that is tangential to the end points of two adjoining lines.
   See also polyfillet.

 filtering  -An application process that changes the order of data in a queue.

 first-in-first-out (FIFO)  -A queuing technique in which the next item to be
   retrieved is the item that has been in the queue for the longest time. (A)

 flag  -(1) An indicator or parameter that shows the setting of a switch. (2) A
   character that signals the occurrence of some condition, such as the end of
   a word. (A)  (3) (D of C) A characteristic of a file or directory that
   enables it to be used in certain ways. See also archive flag, hidden flag,
   and read-only flag.

 focus  -See input focus.

 folder  -A container used to organize objects.

 font  -A particular size and style of typeface that contains definitions of
   character sets, marker sets, and pattern sets.

 Font Editor  -A utility program provided with the IBM Developers Toolkit that
   enables the design and creation of new fonts.

 foreground program  -(1) The program with which the user is currently
   interacting. Also known as interactive program. Contrast with background
   program. (2) (D of C) In multiprogramming,  a high-priority program.

 frame  -The part of a window that can contain several different visual
   elements specified by the application, but drawn and controlled by the
   Presentation Manager. The frame encloses the client area.

 frame styles  -Standard window layouts provided by the Presentation Manager.

 FSD  -File system driver.

 full-duplex  -Synonym for duplex.

 full-screen application  -An application that has complete control of the
   screen.

 function  -(1) In a programming language, a block, with or without formal
   parameters, whose execution is invoked by means of a call. (2) A set of
   related control statements that cause one or more programs to be performed.

 function key  -A key that causes a specified sequence of operations to be
   performed when it is pressed, for example, F1 and Alt-K.

 function key area  -The area at the bottom of a window that contains function
   key assignments such as F1=Help.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - G ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 GDT  -Global Descriptor Table.

 general protection fault  -An exception condition that occurs when a process
   attempts to use storage or a module that has some level of protection
   assigned to it, such as I/O privilege level. See also IOPL code segment.

 Global Descriptor Table (GDT)  -A table that defines code and data segments
   available to all tasks in an application.

 global dynamic-link module  -A dynamic-link module that can be shared by all
   processes in the system that refer to the module name.

 global file-name character  -Either a question mark (?) or an asterisk (*)
   used as a variable in a file name or file name extension when referring to a
   particular file or group of files.

 glyph  -A graphic symbol whose appearance conveys information.

 GPI  -Graphics programming interface.

 graphic primitive  -In computer graphics, a basic element, such as an arc or a
   line, that is not made up of smaller parts and that is used to create
   diagrams and pictures. See also graphics segment.

 graphics  -(1) A picture defined in terms of graphic primitives and graphics
   attributes. (2) (D of C) The making of charts and pictures. (3) Pertaining
   to charts, tables, and their creation. (4) See computer graphics, coordinate
   graphics, fixed-image graphics, interactive graphics, passive graphics,
   raster graphics.

 graphics attributes  -Attributes that apply to graphic primitives. Examples
   are color, line type, and shading-pattern definition. See also segment
   attributes.

 graphics field  -The clipping boundary that defines the visible part of the
   presentation-page contents.

 graphics mode  -One of several states of a display. The mode determines the
   resolution and color content of the screen.

 graphics model space  -The conceptual coordinate space in which a picture is
   constructed after any model transforms have been applied. Also known as
   model space.

 Graphics programming interface  -The formally defined programming language
   that is between an IBM graphics program and the user of the program.

 graphics segment  -A sequence of related graphic primitives and graphics
   attributes. See also graphic primitive.

 graying  -The indication that a choice on a pull-down is unavailable.

 group  -A collection of logically connected controls. For example, the buttons
   controlling paper size for a printer could be called a group. See also
   program group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - H ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 handle  -(1) An identifier that represents an object, such as a device or
   window, to the Presentation Interface. (2) (D of C) In the Advanced DOS and
   OS/2 operating systems, a binary value created by the system that identifies
   a drive, directory, and file so that the file can be found and opened.

 hard error  -An error condition on a network that requires either that the
   system be reconfigured or that the source of the error be removed before the
   system can resume reliable operation.

 header  -(1) System-defined control information that precedes user data. (2)
   The portion of a message that contains control information for the message,
   such as one or more destination fields, name of the originating station,
   input sequence number, character string indicating the type of message, and
   priority level for the message.

 heading tags  -A document element that enables information to be displayed in
   windows, and that controls entries in the contents window controls placement
   of push buttons in a window, and defines the shape and size of windows.

 heap  -An area of free storage available for dynamic allocation by an
   application. Its size varies according to the storage requirements of the
   application.

 help function  -(1) A function that provides information about a specific
   field, an application panel, or information about the help facility. (2) (D
   of C) One or more display images that describe how to use application
   software or how to do a system operation.

 Help index  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a help action that
   provides an index of the help information available for an application.

 help panel  -A panel with information to assist users that is displayed in
   response to a help request from the user.

 help window  -A Common-User-Access-defined secondary window that displays
   information when the user requests help.

 hidden file  -An operating system file that is not displayed by a directory
   listing.

 hide button  -In the OS/2 operating system, a small, square button located in
   the right-hand corner of the title bar of a window that, when selected,
   removes from the screen all the windows associated with that window.
   Contrast with maximize button. See also restore button.

 hierarchical inheritance  -The relationship between parent and child classes.
   An object that is lower in the inheritance hierarchy than another object,
   inherits all the characteristics and behaviors of the objects above it in
   the hierarchy.

 hierarchy  -A tree of segments beginning with the root segment and proceeding
   downward to dependent segment types.

 high-performance file system (HPFS)  -In the OS/2 operating system, an
   installable file system that uses high-speed buffer storage, known as a
   cache, to provide fast access to large disk volumes. The file system also
   supports the coexistence of multiple, active file systems on a single
   personal computer, with the capability of multiple and different storage
   devices. File names used with the HPFS can have as many as 254 characters.

 hit testing  -The means of identifying which window is associated with which
   input device event.

 hook  -A point in a system-defined function where an application can supply
   additional code that the system processes as though it were part of the
   function.

 hook chain  -A sequence of hook procedures that are "chained" together so that
   each event is passed, in turn, to each procedure in the chain.

 hot spot  -The part of the pointer that must touch an object before it can be
   selected. This is usually the tip of the pointer. Contrast with action
   point.

 HPFS  -high-performance file system.

 hypergraphic link  -A connection between one piece of information and another
   through the use of graphics.

 hypertext  -A way of presenting information online with connections between
   one piece of information and another, called hypertext links. See also
   hypertext link.

 hypertext link  -A connection between one piece of information and another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 I/O operation  -An input operation to, or output operation from a device
   attached to a computer.

 I-beam pointer  -A pointer that indicates an area, such as an entry field in
   which text can be edited.

 icon  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a graphical
   representation of an object, consisting of an image, image background, and a
   label. Icons can represent items (such as a document file) that the user
   wants to work on, and actions that the user wants to perform. In the
   Presentation Manager, icons are used for data objects, system actions, and
   minimized programs.

 icon area  -In the Presentation Manager, the area at the bottom of the screen
   that is normally used to display the icons for minimized programs.

 Icon Editor  -The Presentation Manager-provided tool for creating icons.

 IDL  -Interface Definition Language.

 image font  -A set of symbols, each of which is described in a rectangular
   array of pels. Some of the pels in the array are set to produce the image of
   one of the symbols. Contrast with outline font.

 implied metaclass  -Subclassing the metaclass of a parent class without a
   separate CSC for the resultant metaclass.

 indirect manipulation  -Interaction with an object through choices and
   controls.

 information device context  -A logical description of a data destination other
   than the screen (for example, a printer or plotter), but where no output
   will occur. Its purpose is to satisfy queries. See also device context.

 information panel  -A defined panel type characterized by a body containing
   only protected information.

 Information Presentation Facility (IPF)  -A facility provided by the OS/2
   operating system, by which application developers can produce online
   documentation and context-sensitive online help panels for their
   applications.

 inheritance  -The derivation of new (child) classes from existing (parent)
   classes. The new class inherits all the data and methods of the parent class
   without having to redefine them.

 input focus  -(1) The area of a window where user interaction is possible
   using an input device, such as a mouse or the keyboard. (2) The position in
   the active window where a user's normal interaction with the keyboard will
   appear.

 input router  -An internal OS/2 process that removes messages from the system
   queue.

 input/output control  -A device-specific command that requests a function of a
   device driver.

 installable file system (IFS)  -A file system in which software is installed
   when the operating system is started.

 instance  -A single occurrence of an object class that has a particular
   behavior.

 instruction pointer  -In system/38, a pointer that provides addressability for
   a machine interface instruction in a program.

 integer atom  -An atom that represents a predefined system constant and
   carries no storage overhead. For example, names of window classes provided
   by Presentation Manager are expressed as integer atoms.

 interactive graphics  -Graphics that can be moved or manipulated by a user at
   a terminal.

 interactive program  -(1) A program that is running (active) and is ready to
   receive (or is receiving) input from a user. (2) A running program that can
   receive input from the keyboard or another input device. Compare with active
   program and contrast with noninteractive program.

   Also known as a foreground program.

 interchange file  -A file containing data that can be sent from one
   Presentation Manager interface application to another.

 Interface Definition Language (IDL)  -Language-neutral interface specification
   for a SOM class.

 interpreter  -A program that translates and executes each instruction of a
   high-level programming language before it translates and executes.

 interprocess communication (IPC)  -In the OS/2 operating system, the exchange
   of information between processes or threads through semaphores, pipes,
   queues, and shared memory.

 interval timer  -(1) A timer that provides program interruptions on a
   program-controlled basis. (2) An electronic counter that counts intervals of
   time under program control.

 IOCtl  -Input/output control.

 IOPL  -Input/output privilege level.

 IOPL code segment  -An IOPL executable section of programming code that
   enables an application to directly manipulate hardware interrupts and ports
   without replacing the device driver. See also privilege level.

 IPC  -Interprocess communication.

 IPF  -Information Presentation Facility.

 IPF compiler  -A text compiler that interpret tags in a source file and
   converts the information into the specified format.

 IPF tag language  -A markup language that provides the instructions for
   displaying online information.

 item  -A data object that can be passed in a DDE transaction.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - J ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 journal  -A special-purpose file that is used to record changes made in the
   system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - K ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Kanji  -A graphic character set used in Japanese ideographic alphabets.

 KBD$  -Character-device name reserved for the keyboard.

 kernel  -The part of an operating system that performs basic functions, such
   as allocating hardware resources.

 kerning  -The design of graphics characters so that their character boxes
   overlap. Used to space text proportionally.

 keyboard accelerator  -A keystroke that generates a command message for an
   application.

 keyboard augmentation  -A function that enables a user to press a keyboard key
   while pressing a mouse button.

 keyboard focus  -A temporary attribute of a window. The window that has a
   keyboard focus receives all keyboard input until the focus changes to a
   different window.

 Keys help  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a help action that
   provides a listing of the application keys and their assigned functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - L ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 label  -In a graphics segment, an identifier of one or more elements that is
   used when editing the segment.

 LAN  -local area network.

 language support procedure  -A function provided by the Presentation Manager
   Interface for applications that do not, or cannot (as in the case of COBOL
   and FORTRAN programs), provide their own dialog or window procedures.

 lazy drag  -See pickup and drop.

 lazy drag set  -See pickup set.

 LDT  -In the OS/2 operating system, Local Descriptor Table.

 LIFO stack  -A stack from which data is retrieved in last-in, first-out order.

 linear address  -A unique value that identifies the memory object.

 linked list  -Synonym for chained list.

 list box  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a control that
   contains scrollable choices from which a user can select one choice.

   Note:  In CUA architecture, this is a programmer term. The end user term is
   selection list.

 list button  -A button labeled with an underlined down-arrow that presents a
   list of valid objects or choices that can be selected for that field.

 list panel  -A defined panel type that displays a list of items from which
   users can select one or more choices and then specify one or more actions to
   work on those choices.

 load time  -The point in time at which a program module is loaded into main
   storage for execution.

 load-on-call  -A function of a linkage editor that allows selected segments of
   the module to be disk resident while other segments are executing. Disk
   resident segments are loaded for execution and given control when any entry
   point that they contain is called.

 local area network (LAN)  -(1) A computer network located on a user's premises
   within a limited geographical area. Communication within a local area
   network is not subject to external regulations;  however, communication
   across the LAN boundary may be subject to some form of regulation. (T)

   Note:  A LAN does not use store and forward techniques. (2) A network
   inwhich a set of devices are connected to one another for communication and
   that can be connected to a larger network.

 Local Descriptor Table (LDT)  -Defines code and data segments specific to a
   single task.

 lock  -A serialization mechanism by means of which a resource is restricted
   for use by the holder of the lock.

 logical storage device  -A device that the user can map to a physical (actual)
   device.

 LPT1, LPT2, LPT3  -Character-device names reserved for parallel printers 1
   through 3.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - M ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 main window  -The window that is positioned relative to the desktop window.

 manipulation button  -The button on a pointing device a user presses to
   directly manipulate an object.

 map  -(1) A set of values having a defined correspondence with the quantities
   or values of another set. (I)  (A)  (2) To establish a set of values having
   a defined correspondence with the quantities or values of another set. (I)

 marker box  -In computer graphics, the boundary that defines, in world
   coordinates, the horizontal and vertical space occupied by a single marker
   from a marker set.

 marker symbol  -A symbol centered on a point. Graphs and charts can use marker
   symbols to indicate the plotted points.

 marquee box  -The rectangle that appears during a selection technique in which
   a user selects objects by drawing a box around them with a pointing device.

 Master Help Index  -In the OS/2 operating system, an alphabetic list of help
   topics related to using the operating system.

 maximize  -To enlarge a window to its largest possible size.

 media window  -The part of the physical device (display, printer, or plotter)
   on which a picture is presented.

 memory block  -Part memory within a heap.

 memory device context  -A logical description of a data destination that is a
   memory bit map. See also device context.

 memory management  -A feature of the operating system for allocating, sharing,
   and freeing main storage.

 memory object  -Logical unit of memory requested by an application, which
   forms the granular unit of memory manipulation from the application
   viewpoint.

 menu  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, an extension of the
   menu bar that displays a list of choices available for a selected choice in
   the menu bar. After a user selects a choice in menu bar, the corresponding
   menu appears. Additional pop-up windows can appear from menu choices.

 menu bar  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, the area near the
   top of a window, below the title bar and above the rest of the window, that
   contains choices that provide access to other menus.

 menu button  -The button on a pointing device that a user presses to view a
   pop-up menu associated with an object.

 message  -(1) In the Presentation Manager, a packet of data used for
   communication between the Presentation Manager interface and Presentation
   Manager applications (2) In a user interface, information not requested by
   users but presented to users by the computer in response to a user action or
   internal process.

 message box  -(1) A dialog window predefined by the system and used as a
   simple interface for applications, without the necessity of creating
   dialog-template resources or dialog procedures. (2) (D of C) In SAA Advanced
   Common User Access architecture, a type of window that shows messages to
   users. See also dialog box, primary window, secondary window.

 message filter  -The means of selecting which messages from a specific window
   will be handled by the application.

 message queue  -A sequenced collection of messages to be read by the
   application.

 message stream mode  -A method of operation in which data is treated as a
   stream of messages.  Contrast with  byte stream.

 metacharacter  -See global file-name character.

 metaclass  -The conjunction of an object and its class information; that is,
   the information pertaining to the class as a whole, rather than to a single
   instance of the class. Each class is itself an object, which is an instance
   of the metaclass.

 metafile  -A file containing a series of attributes that set color, shape and
   size, usually of a picture or a drawing. Using a program that can interpret
   these attributes, a user can view the assembled image.

 metafile device context  -A logical description of a data destination that is
   a metafile, which is used for graphics interchange. See also device context.

 metalanguage  -A language used to specify another language. For example, data
   types can be described using a metalanguage so as to make the descriptions
   independent of any one computer language.

 method  -A function that defines a behavior for a class or object.

 method override  -The replacement, by a child class, of the implementation of
   a method inherited from a parent and an ancestor class.

 mickey  -A unit of measurement for physical mouse motion whose value depends
   on the mouse device driver currently loaded.

 micro presentation space  -A graphics presentation space in which a restricted
   set of the GPI function calls is available.

 minimize  -To remove from the screen all windows associated with an
   application and replace them with an icon that represents the application.

 mix  -An attribute that determines how the foreground of a graphic primitive
   is combined with the existing color of graphics output. Also known as
   foreground mix. Contrast with background mix.

 mixed character string  -A string containing a mixture of one-byte and Kanji
   or Hangeul (two-byte) characters.

 mnemonic  -(1) A method of selecting an item on a pull-down by means of typing
   the highlighted letter in the menu item. (2) (D of C) In SAA Advanced Common
   User Access architecture, usually a single character, within the text of a
   choice, identified by an underscore beneath the character. If all characters
   in a choice already serve as mnemonics for other choices, another character,
   placed in parentheses immediately following the choice, can be used. When a
   user types the mnemonic for a choice, the choice is either selected or the
   cursor is moved to that choice.

 modal dialog box  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a type of
   movable window, fixed in size, that requires a user to enter information
   before continuing to work in the application window from which it was
   displayed. Contrast with modeless dialog box. Also known as a serial dialog
   box. Contrast with parallel dialog box.

   Note:  In CUA architecture, this is a programmer term. The end user term is
   pop-up window.

 model space  -See graphics model space.

 modeless dialog box  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a type
   of movable window, fixed in size, that allows users to continue their dialog
   with the application without entering information in the dialog box. Also
   known as a parallel dialog box. Contrast with modal dialog box.

   Note:  In CUA architecture, this is a programmer term. The end user term is
   pop-up window.

 module definition file  -A file that describes the code segments within a load
   module. For example, it indicates whether a code segment is loadable before
   module execution begins (preload), or loadable only when referred to at run
   time (load-on-call).

 mouse  -In SAA usage, a device that a user moves on a flat surface to position
   a pointer on the screen. It allows a user to select a choice o function to
   be performed or to perform operations on the screen, such as dragging or
   drawing lines from one position to another.

 MOUSE$  -Character-device name reserved for a mouse.

 multiple-choice selection  -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a
   type of field from which a user can select one or more choices or select
   none. See also check box. Contrast with extended-choice selection.

 multiple-line entry field  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a
   control into which a user types more than one line of information. See also
   single-line entry field.

 multitasking  -The concurrent processing of applications or parts of
   applications. A running application and its data are protected from other
   concurrently running applications.

 mutex semaphore  -(Mutual exclusion semaphore). A semaphore that enables
   threads to serialize their access to resources. Only the thread that
   currently owns the mutex semaphore can gain access to the resource, thus
   preventing one thread from interrupting operations being performed by
   another.

 muxwait semaphore  -(Multiple wait semaphore). A semaphore that enables a
   thread to wait either for multiple event semaphores to be posted or for
   multiple mutex semaphores to be released. Alternatively, a muxwait semaphore
   can be set to enable a thread to wait for any ONE of the event or mutex
   semaphores in the muxwait semaphore's list to be posted or released.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - N ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 named pipe  -A named buffer that provides client-to-server, server-to-client,
   or full duplex communication between unrelated processes. Contrast with
   unnamed pipe.

 national language support (NLS)  -The modification or conversion of a United
   States English product to conform to the requirements of another language or
   country. This can include the enabling or retrofitting of a product and the
   translation of nomenclature, MRI, or documentation of a product.

 nested list  -A list that is contained within another list.

 NLS  -national language support.

 non-8.3 file-name format  -A file-naming convention in which file names can
   consist of up to 255 characters. See also 8.3 file-name format.

 noncritical extended attribute  -An extended attribute that is not necessary
   for the function of an application.

 nondestructive read  -Reading that does not erase the data in the source
   location. (T)

 noninteractive program  -A running program that cannot receive input from the
   keyboard or other input device. Compare with active program, and contrast
   with interactive program.

 nonretained graphics  -Graphic primitives that are not remembered by the
   Presentation Manager interface when they have been drawn. Contrast with
   retained graphics.

 null character (NUL)  -(1) Character-device name reserved for a nonexistent
   (dummy) device. (2) (D of C) A control character that is used to accomplish
   media-fill or time-fill and that may be inserted into or removed from a
   sequence of characters without affecting the meaning of the sequence;
   however, the control of equipment or the format may be affected by this
   character. (I)  (A)

 null-terminated string  -A string of (n+1) characters where the (n+1)th
   character is the `null' character (0x00) Also known as `zero-terminated'
   string and 'ASCIIZ' string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - O ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 object  -A set of data and actions that can be performed on that data.

 Object Interface Definition Language (OIDL)  -Specification language used in
   SOM Version 1 for defining classes. Replaced by Interface Definition
   Language (IDL).

 object window  -A window that does not have a parent but which might have
   child windows. An object window cannot be presented on a device.

 OIDL  -Object Interface Definition Language.

 open  -To start working with a file, directory, or other object.

 ordered list  -Vertical arrangements of items, with each item in the list
   preceded by a number or letter.

 outline font  -A set of symbols, each of which is created as a series of lines
   and curves.  Synonymous with vector font. Contrast with image font.

 output area  -An area of storage reserved for output. (A)

 owner window  -A window into which specific events that occur in another
   (owned) window are reported.

 ownership  -The determination of how windows communicate using messages.

 owning process  -The process that owns the resources that might be shared with
   other processes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 page  -(1) A 4KB segment of contiguous physical memory. (2) (D of C) A defined
   unit of space on a storage medium.

 page viewport  -A boundary in device coordinates that defines the area of the
   output device in which graphics are to be displayed. The presentation-page
   contents are transformed automatically to the page viewport in device space.

 paint  -(1) The action of drawing or redrawing the contents of a window. (2)
   In computer graphics, to shade an area of a display image;  for example,
   with crosshatching or color.

 panel  -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a particular arrangement
   of information that is presented in a window or pop-up. If some of the
   information is not visible, a user can scroll through the information.

 panel area  -An area within a panel that contains related information. The
   three major Common User Access-defined panel areas are the action bar, the
   function key area, and the panel body.

 panel area separator  -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a solid,
   dashed, or blank line that provides a visual distinction between two
   adjacent areas of a panel.

 panel body  -The portion of a panel not occupied by the action bar, function
   key area, title or scroll bars. The panel body can contain protected
   information, selection fields, and entry fields. The layout and content of
   the panel body determine the panel type.

 panel body area  -See client area.

 panel definition  -A description of the contents and characteristics of a
   panel. A panel definition is the application developer's mechanism for
   predefining the format to be presented to users in a window.

 panel ID  -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a panel identifier,
   located in the upper-left corner of a panel.  A user can choose whether to
   display the panel ID.

 panel title  -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a particular
   arrangement of information that is presented in a window or pop-up. If some
   of the information is not visible, a user can scroll through the
   information.

 paper size  -The size of paper, defined in either standard U.S. or European
   names (for example, A, B, A4), and measured in inches or millimeters
   respectively.

 parallel dialog box  -See modeless dialog box.

 parameter list  -A list of values that provides a means of associating
   addressability of data defined in a called program with data in the calling
   program. It contains parameter names and the order in which they are to be
   associated in the calling and called program.

 parent process  -In the OS/2 operating system, a process that creates other
   processes. Contrast with child process.

 parent window  -In the OS/2 operating system, a window that creates a child
   window. The child window is drawn within the parent window. If the parent
   window is moved, resized, or destroyed, the child window also will be moved,
   resized, or destroyed. However, the child window can be moved and resized
   independently from the parent window, within the boundaries of the parent
   window. Contrast with child window.

 partition  -(1) A fixed-size division of storage. (2) On an IBM personal
   computer fixed disk, one of four possible storage areas of variable size;
   one may be accessed by DOS, and each of the others may be assigned to
   another operating system.

 Paste  -A choice in the Edit pull-down that a user selects to move the
   contents of the clipboard into a preselected location. See also Copy and
   Cut.

 path  -The route used to locate files; the storage location of a file. A fully
   qualified path lists the drive identifier, directory name, subdirectory name
   (if any), and file name with the associated extension.

 PDD  -Physical device driver.

 peeking  -An action taken by any thread in the process that owns the queue to
   examine queue elements without removing them.

 pel  -(1) The smallest area of a display screen capable of being addressed and
   switched between visible and invisible states. Synonym for display point,
   pixel, and picture element. (2) (D of C) Picture element.

 persistent object  -An object whose instance data and state are preserved
   between system shutdown and system startup.

 physical device driver (PDD)  -A system interface that handles hardware
   interrupts and supports a set of input and output functions.

 pick  -To select part of a displayed object using the pointer.

 pickup  -To add an object or set of objects to the pickup set.

 pickup and drop  -A drag operation that does not require the direct
   manipulation button to be pressed for the duration of the drag.

 pickup set  -The set of objects that have been picked up as part of a pickup
   and drop operation.

 picture chain  -See segment chain.

 picture element  -(1) Synonym for pel. (2) (D of C) In computer graphics, the
   smallest element of a display surface that can be independently assigned
   color and intensity. (T)  . (3) The area of the finest detail that can be
   reproduced effectively on the recording medium.

 PID  -Process identification.

 pipe  -(1) A named or unnamed buffer used to pass data between processes. A
   process reads from or writes to a pipe as if the pipe were a standard-input
   or standard-output file. See also named pipe and unnamed pipe. (2) (D of C)
   To direct data so that the output from one process becomes the input to
   another process. The standard output of one command can be connected to the
   standard input of another with the pipe operator (|).

 pixel  -(1) Synonym for pel. (2) (D of C) Picture element.

 plotter  -An output unit that directly produces a hardcopy record of data on a
   removable medium, in the form of a two-dimensional graphic representation. (T)

 PM  -Presentation Manager.

 pointer  -(1) The symbol displayed on the screen that is moved by a pointing
   device, such as a mouse. The pointer is used to point at items that users
   can select. Contrast with cursor. (2) A data element that indicates the
   location of another data element. (T)

 POINTER$  -Character-device name reserved for a pointer device (mouse screen
   support).

 pointing device  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, an
   instrument, such as a mouse, trackball, or joystick, used to move a pointer
   on the screen.

 pointings  -Pairs of x-y coordinates produced by an operator defining
   positions on a screen with a pointing device, such as a mouse.

 polyfillet  -A curve based on a sequence of lines. The curve is tangential to
   the end points of the first and last lines, and tangential also to the
   midpoints of all other lines. See also fillet.

 polygon  -One or more closed figures that can be drawn filled, outlined, or
   filled and outlined.

 polyline  -A sequence of adjoining lines.

 polymorphism  -The ability to have different implementations of the same
   method for two or more classes of objects.

 pop  -To retrieve an item from a last-in-first-out stack of items. Contrast
   with push.

 pop-up menu  -A menu that lists the actions that a user can perform on an
   object. The contents of the pop-up menu can vary depending on the context,
   or state, of the object.

 pop-up window  -(1) A window that appears on top of another window in a
   dialog. Each pop-up window must be completed before returning to the
   underlying window. (2) (D of C) In SAA Advanced Common User Access
   architecture, a movable window, fixed in size, in which a user provides
   information required by an application so that it can continue to process a
   user request.

 presentation drivers  -Special purpose I/O routines that handle field
   device-independent I/O requests from the PM and its applications.

 Presentation Manager (PM)  -The interface of the OS/2 operating system that
   presents, in windows a graphics-based interface to applications and files
   installed and running under the OS/2 operating system.

 presentation page  -The coordinate space in which a picture is assembled for
   display.

 presentation space (PS)  -(1) Contains the device-independent definition of a
   picture. (2) (D of C) The display space on a display device.

 primary window  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, the window in which
   the main interaction between the user and the application takes place. In a
   multiprogramming environment, each application starts in its own primary
   window. The primary window remains for the duration of the application,
   although the panel displayed will change as the user's dialog moves forward.
   See also secondary window.

 primitive  -In computer graphics, one of several simple functions for drawing
   on the screen, including, for example, the rectangle, line, ellipse,
   polygon, and so on.

 primitive attribute  -A specifiable characteristic of a graphic primitive. See
   graphics attributes.

 print job  -The result of sending a document or picture to be printed.

 Print Manager  -In the Presentation Manager, the part of the spooler that
   manages the spooling process. It also allows users to view print queues and
   to manipulate print jobs.

 privilege level  -A protection level imposed by the hardware architecture of
   the IBM personal computer.  There are four privilege levels (number 0
   through 3).  Only certain types of programs are allowed to execute at each
   privilege level.  See also IOPL code segment.

 procedure call  -In programming languages, a language construct for invoking
   execution of a procedure.

 process  -An instance of an executing application and the resources it is
   using.

 program  -A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and
   execute.

 program details  -Information about a program that is specified in the Program
   Manager window and is used when the program is started.

 program group  -In the Presentation Manager, several programs that can be
   acted upon as a single entity.

 program name  -The full file specification of a program. Contrast with program
   title.

 program title  -The name of a program as it is listed in the Program Manager
   window. Contrast with program name.

 prompt  -A displayed symbol or message that requests input from the user or
   gives operational information; for example, on the display screen of an IBM
   personal computer, the DOS A> prompt. The user must respond to the prompt in
   order to proceed.

 protect mode  -A method of program operation that limits or prevents access to
   certain instructions or areas of storage. Contrast with real mode.

 protocol  -A set of semantic and syntactic rules that determines the behavior
   of functional units in achieving communication. (I)

 pseudocode  -An artificial language used to describe computer program
   algorithms without using the syntax of any particular programming language. (A)

 pull-down  -(1) An action bar extension that displays a list of choices
   available for a selected action bar choice. After users select an action bar
   choice, the pull-down appears with the list of choices. Additional pop-up
   windows may appear from pull-down choices to further extend the actions
   available to users. (2) (D of C) In SAA Common User Access architecture,
   pertaining to a choice in an action bar pull-down.

 push  -To add an item to a last-in-first-out stack of items. Contrast with
   pop.

 push button  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a rectangle
   with text inside. Push buttons are used in windows for actions that occur
   immediately when the push button is selected.

 putback  -To remove an object or set of objects from the lazy drag set. This
   has the effect of undoing the pickup operation for those objects

 putdown  -To drop the objects in the lazy drag set on the target object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - Q ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 queue  -(1) A linked list of elements waiting to be processed in FIFO order.
   For example, a queue may be a list of print jobs waiting to be printed. (2)
   (D of C) A line or list of items waiting to be processed; for example, work
   to be performed or messages to be displayed.

 queued device context  -A logical description of a data destination (for
   example, a printer or plotter) where the output is to go through the
   spooler. See also device context.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - R ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 radio button  -(1) A control window, shaped like a round button on the screen,
   that can be in a checked or unchecked state. It is used to select a single
   item from a list. Contrast with check box. (2) In SAA Advanced Common User
   Access architecture, a circle with text beside it. Radio buttons are
   combined to show a user a fixed set of choices from which only one can be
   selected. The circle is partially filled when a choice is selected.

 RAS  -Reliability, availability, and serviceability.

 raster  -(1) In computer graphics, a predetermined pattern of lines that
   provides uniform coverage of a display space. (T)  (2) The coordinate grid
   that divides the display area of a display device.  (A)

 read-only file  -A file that can be read from but not written to.

 real mode  -A method of program operation that does not limit or prevent
   access to any instructions or areas of storage.  The operating system loads
   the entire program into storage and gives the program access to all system
   resources. Contrast with protect mode.

 realize  -To cause the system to ensure, wherever possible, that the physical
   color table of a device is set to the closest possible match in the logical
   color table.

 recursive routine  -A routine that can call itself, or be called by another
   routine that was called by the recursive routine.

 reentrant  -The attribute of a program or routine that allows the same copy of
   the program or routine to be used concurrently by two or more tasks.

 reference phrase  -(1) A word or phrase that is emphasized in a
   device-dependent manner to inform the user that additional information for
   the word or phrase is available. (2) (D of C) In hypertext, text that is
   highlighted and preceded by a single-character input field used to signify
   the existence of a hypertext link.

 reference phrase help  -In SAA Common User Access architecture, highlighted
   words or phrases within help information that a user selects to get
   additional information.

 refresh  -To update a window, with changed information, to its current status.

 region  -A clipping boundary in device space.

 register  -A part of internal storage having a specified storage capacity and
   usually intended for a specific purpose. (T)

 remote file system  -A file-system driver that gains access to a remote system
   without a block device driver.

 resource  -The means of providing extra information used in the definition of
   a window. A resource can contain definitions of fonts, templates,
   accelerators, and mnemonics; the definitions are held in a resource file.

 resource file  -A file containing information used in the definition of a
   window. Definitions can be of fonts, templates, accelerators, and mnemonics.

 restore  -To return a window to its original size or position following a
   sizing or moving action.

 retained graphics  -Graphic primitives that are remembered by the Presentation
   Manager interface after they have been drawn. Contrast with nonretained
   graphics.

 return code  -(1) A value returned to a program to indicate the results of an
   operation requested by that program. (2) A code used to influence the
   execution of succeeding instructions.(A)

 reverse video  -(1) A form of highlighting a character, field, or cursor by
   reversing the color of the character, field, or cursor with its background;
   for example, changing a red character on a black background to a black
   character on a red background. (2) In SAA Basic Common User Access
   architecture, a screen emphasis feature that interchanges the foreground and
   background colors of an item.

 REXX Language  -Restructured Extended Executor. A procedural language that
   provides batch language functions along with structured programming
   constructs such as loops; conditional testing and subroutines.

 RGB  -(1) Color coding in which the brightness of the additive primary colors
   of light, red, green, and blue, are specified as three distinct values of
   white light. (2) Pertaining to a color display that accepts signals
   representing red, green, and blue.

 roman  -Relating to a type style with upright characters.

 root segment  -In a hierarchical database, the highest segment in the tree
   structure.

 round-robin scheduling  -A process that allows each thread to run for a
   specified amount of time.

 run time  -(1) Any instant at which the execution of a particular computer
   program takes place. (T)  (2) The amount of time needed for the execution of
   a particular computer program. (T)  (3) The time during which an instruction
   in an instruction register is decoded and performed. Synonym for execution
   time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - S ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 SAA  -Systems Application Architecture.

 SBCS  -Single-byte character set.

 scheduler  -A computer program designed to perform functions such as
   scheduling, initiation, and termination of jobs.

 screen  -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, the physical surface of
   a display device upon which information is shown to a user.

 screen device context  -A logical description of a data destination that is a
   particular window on the screen. See also device context.

 SCREEN$  -Character-device name reserved for the display screen.

 scroll bar  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a part of a
   window, associated with a scrollable area, that a user interacts with to see
   information that is not currently allows visible.

 scrollable entry field  -An entry field larger than the visible field.

 scrollable selection field  -A selection field that contains more choices than
   are visible.

 scrolling  -Moving a display image vertically or horizontally in a manner such
   that new data appears at one edge, as existing data disappears at the
   opposite edge.

 secondary window  -A window that contains information that is dependent on
   information in a primary window and is used to supplement the interaction in
   the primary window.

 sector  -On disk or diskette storage, an addressable subdivision of a track
   used to record one block of a program or data.

 segment  -See graphics segment.

 segment attributes  -Attributes that apply to the segment as an entity, as
   opposed to the individual primitives within the segment. For example, the
   visibility or detectability of a segment.

 segment chain  -All segments in a graphics presentation space that are defined
   with the `chained' attribute. Synonym for picture chain.

 segment priority  -The order in which segments are drawn.

 segment store  -An area in a normal graphics presentation space where retained
   graphics segments are stored.

 select  -To mark or choose an item. Note that select means to mark or type in
   a choice on the screen; enter means to send all selected choices to the
   computer for processing.

 select button  -The button on a pointing device, such as a mouse, that is
   pressed to select a menu choice.  Also known as button 1.

 selection cursor  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a visual
   indication that a user has selected a choice. It is represented by outlining
   the choice with a dotted box. See also text cursor.

 selection field  -(1) In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a set
   of related choices. See also entry field. (2) In SAA Basic Common User
   Access architecture, an area of a panel that cannot be scrolled and contains
   a fixed number of choices.

 semantics  -The relationships between symbols and their meanings.

 semaphore  -An object used by applications for signalling purposes and for
   controlling access to serially reusable resources.

 separator  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a line or color
   boundary that provides a visual distinction between two adjacent areas.

 serial dialog box  -See modal dialog box.

 serialization  -The consecutive ordering of items.

 serialize  -To ensure that one or more events occur in a specified sequence.

 serially reusable resource (SRR)  -A logical resource or object that can be
   accessed by only one task at a time.

 session  -(1) A routing mechanism for user interaction via the console; a
   complete environment that determines how an application runs and how users
   interact with the application. OS/2 can manage more than one session at a
   time, and more than one process can run in a session. Each session has its
   own set of environment variables that determine where OS/2 looks for
   dynamic-link libraries and other important files. (2) (D of C) In the OS/2
   operating system, one instance of a started program or command prompt. Each
   session is separate from all other sessions that might be running on the
   computer. The operating system is responsible for coordinating the resources
   that each session uses, such as computer memory, allocation of processor
   time, and windows on the screen.

 Settings Notebook  -A control window that is used to display the settings for
   an object and to enable the user to change them.

 shadow  -An object that refers to another object. A shadow is not a copy of
   another object, but is another representation of the object.

 shadow box  -The area on the screen that follows mouse movements and shows
   what shape the window will take if the mouse button is released.

 shared data  -Data that is used by two or more programs.

 shared memory  -In the OS/2 operating system, a segment that can be used by
   more than one program.

 shear  -In computer graphics, the forward or backward slant of a graphics
   symbol or string of such symbols relative to a line perpendicular to the
   baseline of the symbol.

 shell  -(1) A software interface between a user and the operating system of a
   computer. Shell programs interpret commands and user interactions on devices
   such as keyboards, pointing devices, and touch-sensitive screens, and
   communicate them to the operating system. (2) Software that allows a kernel
   program to run under different operating-system environments.

 shutdown  -The process of ending operation of a system or a subsystem,
   following a defined procedure.

 sibling processes  -Child processes that have the same parent process.

 sibling windows  -Child windows that have the same parent window.

 simple list  -A list of like values; for example, a list of user names.
   Contrast with mixed list.

 single-byte character set (SBCS)  -A character set in which each character is
   represented by a one-byte code.  Contrast with double-byte character set.

 slider box  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture: a part of the
   scroll bar that shows the position and size of the visible information in a
   window relative to the total amount of information available. Also known as
   thumb mark.

 SOM  -System Object Model.

 source file  -A file that contains source statements for items such as
   high-level language programs and data description specifications.

 source statement  -A statement written in a programming language.

 specific dynamic-link module  -A dynamic-link module created for the exclusive
   use of an application.

 spin button  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a type of entry
   field that shows a scrollable ring of choices from which a user can select a
   choice. After the last choice is displayed, the first choice is displayed
   again.  A user can also type a choice from the scrollable ring into the
   entry field without interacting with the spin button.

 spline  -A sequence of one or more BВzier curves.

 spooler  -A program that intercepts the data going to printer devices and
   writes it to disk. The data is printed or plotted when it is complete and
   the required device is available.  The spooler prevents output from
   different sources from being intermixed.

 stack  -A list constructed and maintained so that the next data element to be
   retrieved is the most recently stored. This method is characterized as
   last-in-first-out (LIFO).

 standard window  -A collection of window elements that form a panel. The
   standard window can include one or more of the following window elements:
   sizing borders, system menu icon, title bar, maximize/minimize/restore
   icons, action bar and pull-downs, scroll bars, and client area.

 static control  -The means by which the application presents descriptive
   information (for example, headings and descriptors) to the user. The user
   cannot change this information.

 static storage  -(1) A read/write storage unit in which data is retained in
   the absence of control signals. (A)  Static storage may use dynamic
   addressing or sensing circuits. (2) Storage other than dynamic storage. (A)

 style  -See window style.

 subclass  -A class that is a child of another class. See also Inheritance.

 subdirectory  -In an IBM personal computer, a file referred to in a root
   directory that contains the names of other files stored on the diskette or
   fixed disk.

 swapping  -(1) A process that interchanges the contents of an area of real
   storage with the contents of an area in auxiliary storage. (I)  (A)  (2) In
   a system with virtual storage, a paging technique that writes the active
   pages of a job to auxiliary storage and reads pages of another job from
   auxiliary storage into real storage. (3) The process of temporarily removing
   an active job from main storage, saving it on disk, and processing another
   job in the area of main storage formerly occupied by the first job.

 switch  -(1) In SAA usage, to move the cursor from one point of interest to
   another;  for example, to move from one screen or window to another or from
   a place within a displayed image to another place on the same displayed
   image. (2) In a computer program, a conditional instruction and an indicator
   to be interrogated by that instruction. (3) A device or programming
   technique for making a selection, for example, a toggle, a conditional jump.

 switch list  -See Task List.

 symbolic identifier  -A text string that equates to an integer value in an
   include file, which is used to identify a programming object.

 symbols  -In Information Presentation Facility, a document element used to
   produce characters that cannot be entered from the keyboard.

 synchronous  -Pertaining to two or more processes that depend upon the
   occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals. (T)  See also
   asynchronous.

 System Menu  -In the Presentation Manager, the pull-down in the top left
   corner of a window that allows it to be moved and sized with the keyboard.

 System Object Model (SOM)  -A mechanism for language-neutral, object-oriented
   programming in the OS/2 environment.

 system queue  -The master queue for all pointer device or keyboard events.

 system-defined messages  -Messages that control the operations of applications
   and provides input an other information for applications to process.

 Systems Application Architecture (SAA)  -A set of IBM software interfaces,
   conventions, and protocols that provide a framework for designing and
   developing applications that are consistent across systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - T ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 table tags  -In Information Presentation Facility, a document element that
   formats text in an arrangement of rows and columns.

 tag  -(1) One or more characters attached to a set of data that contain
   information about the set, including its identification. (I)  (A)  (2) In
   Generalized Markup Language markup, a name for a type of document or
   document element that is entered in the source document to identify it.

 target object  -An object to which the user is transferring information.

 Task List  -In the Presentation Manager, the list of programs that are active.
   The list can be used to switch to a program and to stop programs.

 terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR)  -Pertaining to an application that modifies
   an operating system interrupt vector to point to its own location (known as
   hooking an interrupt).

 text  -Characters or symbols.

 text cursor  -A symbol displayed in an entry field that indicates where typed
   input will appear.

 text window  -Also known as the VIO window.

 text-windowed application  -The environment in which the operating system
   performs advanced-video input and output operations.

 thread  -A unit of execution within a process. It uses the resources of the
   process.

 thumb mark  -The portion of the scroll bar that describes the range and
   properties of the data that is currently visible in a window. Also known as
   a slider box.

 thunk  -Term used to describe the process of address conversion, stack and
   structure realignment, etc., necessary when passing control between 16-bit
   and 32-bit modules.

 tilde  -A mark used to denote the character that is to be used as a mnemonic
   when selecting text items within a menu.

 time slice  -(1) An interval of time on the processing unit allocated for use
   in performing a task. After the interval has expired, processing-unit time
   is allocated to another task, so a task cannot monopolize processing-unit
   time beyond a fixed limit. (2) In systems with time sharing, a segment of
   time allocated to a terminal job.

 time-critical process  -A process that must be performed within a specified
   time after an event has occurred.

 timer  -A facility provided under the Presentation Manager, whereby
   Presentation Manager will dispatch a message of class WM_TIMER to a
   particular window at specified intervals. This capability may be used by an
   application to perform a specific processing task at predetermined
   intervals, without the necessity for the application to explicitly keep
   track of the passage of time.

 timer tick  -See clock tick.

 title bar  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, the area at the
   top of each window that contains the window title and system menu icon. When
   appropriate, it also contains the minimize, maximize, and restore icons.
   Contrast with panel title.

 TLB  -Translation lookaside buffer.

 transaction  -An exchange between a workstation and another device that
   accomplishes a particular action or result.

 transform  -(1) The action of modifying a picture by scaling, shearing,
   reflecting, rotating, or translating. (2) The object that performs or
   defines such a modification; also referred to as a transformation.

 Translation lookaside buffer (TLB)  -A hardware-based address caching
   mechanism for paging information.

 Tree  -In the Presentation Manager, the window in the File Manager that shows
   the organization of drives and directories.

 truncate  -(1) To terminate a computational process in accordance with some
   rule (A)  (2) To remove the beginning or ending elements of a string. (3) To
   drop data that cannot be printed or displayed in the line width specified or
   available. (4) To shorten a field or statement to a specified length.

 TSR  -Terminate-and-stay-resident.

 unnamed pipe  -A circular buffer, created in memory, used by related processes
   to communicate with one another. Contrast with named pipe.

 unordered list  -In Information Presentation Facility, a vertical arrangement
   of items in a list, with each item in the list preceded by a special
   character or bullet.

 update region  -A system-provided area of dynamic storage containing one or
   more (not necessarily contiguous) rectangular areas of a window that are
   visually invalid or incorrect, and therefore are in need of repainting.

 user interface  -Hardware, software, or both that allows a user to interact
   with and perform operations on a system, program, or device.

 User Shell  -A component of OS/2 that uses a graphics-based, windowed
   interface to allow the user to manage applications and files installed and
   running under OS/2.

 utility program  -(1) A computer program in general support of computer
   processes; for example, a diagnostic program, a trace program, a sort
   program. (T)  (2) A program designed to perform an everyday task such as
   copying data from one storage device to another. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - U ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are no glossary terms for this starting letter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - V ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 value set control  -A visual component that enables a user to select one
   choice from a group of mutually exclusive choices.

 vector font  -A set of symbols, each of which is created as a series of lines
   and curves. Synonymous with outline font. Contrast with image font.

 VGA  -Video graphics array.

 view  -A way of looking at an object's information.

 viewing pipeline  -The series of transformations applied to a graphic object
   to map the object to the device on which it is to be presented.

 viewing window  -A clipping boundary that defines the visible part of model
   space.

 VIO  -Video Input/Output.

 virtual memory (VM)  -Synonymous with virtual storage.

 virtual storage  -(1) The storage space that may be regarded as addressable
   main storage by the user of a computer system in which virtual addresses are
   mapped into real addresses. The size of virtual storage is limited by the
   addressing scheme of the computer system and by the amount of auxiliary
   storage available, not by the actual number of main storage
   locations. (I)  (A)  (2) Addressable space that is apparent to the user as
   the processor storage space, from which the instructions and the data are
   mapped into the processor storage locations. (3) Synonymous with virtual
   memory.

 visible region  -A window's presentation space, clipped to the boundary of the
   window and the boundaries of any overlying window.

 volume  -(1) A file-system driver that uses a block device driver for input
   and output operations to a local or remote device. (I)  (2) A portion of
   data, together with its data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a
   unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 wildcard character  -Synonymous with global file-name character.

 window  -(1) A portion of a display surface in which display images pertaining
   to a particular application can be presented. Different applications can be
   displayed simultaneously in different windows. (A)  (2) An area of the
   screen with visible boundaries within which information is displayed. A
   window can be smaller than or the same size as the screen. Windows can
   appear to overlap on the screen.

 window class  -The grouping of windows whose processing needs conform to the
   services provided by one window procedure.

 window coordinates  -A set of coordinates by which a window position or size
   is defined; measured in device units, or pels.

 window handle  -Unique identifier of a window, generated by Presentation
   Manager when the window is created, and used by applications to direct
   messages to the window.

 window procedure  -Code that is activated in response to a message. The
   procedure controls the appearance and behavior of its associated windows.

 window rectangle  -The means by which the size and position of a window is
   described in relation to the desktop window.

 window resource  -A read-only data segment stored in the .EXE file of an
   application o the .DLL file of a dynamic link library.

 window style  -The set of properties that influence how events related to a
   particular window will be processed.

 window title  -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, the area in
   the title bar that contains the name of the application and the OS/2
   operating system file name, if applicable.

 Workplace Shell  -The OS/2 object-oriented, graphical user interface.

 workstation  -(1) A display screen together with attachments such as a
   keyboard, a local copy device, or a tablet. (2) (D of C) One or more
   programmable or nonprogrammable devices that allow a user to do work.

 world coordinates  -A device-independent Cartesian coordinate system used by
   the application program for specifying graphical input and output. (I)  (A)

 world-coordinate space  -Coordinate space in which graphics are defined before
   transformations are applied.

 WYSIWYG  -What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get. A capability of a text editor to
   continually display pages exactly as they will be printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - X ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are no glossary terms for this starting letter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - Y ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are no glossary terms for this starting letter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - Z ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 z-order  -The order in which sibling windows are presented. The topmost
   sibling window obscures any portion of the siblings that it overlaps; the
   same effect occurs down through the order of lower sibling windows.

 zooming  -The progressive scaling of an entire display image in order to give
   the visual impression of movement of all or part of a display group toward
   or away from an observer. (I)  (A)

 8.3 file-name format  -A file-naming convention in which file names are
   limited to eight characters before and three characters after a single dot.
   Usually pronounced "eight-dot-three." See also non-8.3 file-name format.